Virtual Disk Facility Programs

Virtual Disk Facility Programs
Office Systems Family
Program Numbers 5727-WS1, 5727-WS6
PC Support/36
User's Guide
Office Systems Family
--..- --- -- ------------,
-=-~~=-.
Personal
Computer
Software
-~-
-~-
SC21-9088-3
Fourth Edition (June 1987)
This major revision makes obsolete SC21-9088-2. See the
"Preface" for a summary of major changes to this edition.
This edition applies to Release 5, Modification Levell, of
the IBM System/36 PC Support/36 Products (Program
5727-WS1 for the 5360 and 5362 System Units, and
Program 5727-WS6 for the 5364 System Unit), and to all
subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise
indicated in new editions. Changes are periodically made
to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of this publication. This
publication contains examples of data and reports used in
daily business operations. To illustrate them as
completely as possible, the examples include the names of
individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these
names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and
addresses used for an actual business enterprise is entirely
coincidental.
References in this publication to IBM products, programs,
or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these
available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any
reference to an IBM licensed program in this publication
is not intended to state or imply that only IBM's licensed
program may be used. Any functionally equivalent
program may be used instead. The numbers at the bottom
right of illustrations are publishing control numbers and
are not part of the technical content of this manual.
Publications are not stocked at the address given below.
Requests for IBM publications should be made to your
IBM representative or to your IBM-approved remarketer.
This publication could contain technical inaccuracies or
typographical errors. A Reader's Comment Form is
provided at the back of this publication. If this form has
been removed, address comments to IBM Corporation,
Information Development, Department 245, Rochester,
Minnesota 55901. IBM may use or distribute any of the
information you supply in any way it believes appropriate
without incurring any obligations whatever.
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation
1985, 1986, 1987
©
~
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Organization of This Manual .......... xi
Related Publications ............... xiv
Summary of Changes ............... xvi
Data Security .................... xvii
Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents ........................
What Is PC Support/36? .............
Virtual Disk Facility ............
Shared Folders Facility ..........
Virtual Printer Facility ..........
Message Facility ................
Transfer Facility ................
PC Support/36 Programming Functions
What Is Needed to Use PC Support/36?
Personal Computer Storage
Requirements ................
Installing PC Support/36 ...........
Chapter 2. What You Should Know
before Operating PC Support/36 .....
Contents ........................
Introduction ......................
Display Operation .................
Windows ......................
OPTIONS Menus ...............
Arrows '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
List of Keys ...................
Help Text .....................
Messages ....................
Status Indicator ...............
Prompts and Input Areas ........
Cursor ......................
Highlighting ..................
Keyboard Operation ...............
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-12
1-14
1-16
1-27
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-12
2-12
2-14
2-15
2-16
111
Cursor Movement and Window
Movement Keys ..............
Control Keys .................
Function Keys ................
A Few Words about Files ...........
Personal Computer Files .........
Naming Personal Computer Files ..
System/36 Files and Libraries .....
PC Support/36 Command Format .....
Using the Correct Display Attributes ..
Chapter 3. Starting PC Support/36 ... .
Contents ....................... .
Introduction ..................... .
Running the PC Support/36 Programs
Summary of PC Support/36 Commands .
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-5
Chapter 4. Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents ........................
Introduction ......................
Setting Up PC Support/36 ...........
Using the Virtual Disk Facility .......
Using the Virtual Printer Facility ....
Using the Message Facility .........
Using the Shared Folders Facility ....
U sing the Transfer Facility .........
Transferring Data to the Personal
Computer ...................
Transferring Data to the System/36
Using the PC Utility ..............
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-7
4-13
4-17
4-21
4-22
Chapter 5. Using the PC Support/36
Virtual Disk Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents ........................
Introduction ........ ~ . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Installing the Virtual Disk Facility ....
Setting Up the CONFIG.SYS File ...
Assigning Disk Drives ...........
The Virtual Disk Facility Programs ....
Running the Interactive Virtual Disk
Facility ......................
Running the Automatic Virtual Disk
Facility .....................
IV
2-16
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-26
2-28 (
2-29
2-31
4-23
4-30
4-37
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-24
Virtual Disk Considerations
Chapter 6. U sing the PC Support/36
Shared Folders Facility . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents ........................
Introduction ......................
Getting Ready to Use Shared Folders
Shared Folder Command ............
Using Help ......................
Accessing Shared Folders .. .. . . . . . ..
Directory Considerations ........
Using a Directory Drive .........
Using a System Drive ...........
Sharing Folder Members ...........
File Sharing Considerations .........
Securing Shared Folders ...........
Security Requirements ..........
5-29
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-6
6-8
6-11
6-12
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-20
Chapter 7. Using the PC Support/36
Virtual Printer Facility •..........
Contents ........................
Introduction ......................
Starting the Virtual Printer Facility ...
Running the Interactive Virtual Printer
Facility Program .................
Assigning and Changing Virtual
Printer Configuration ..........
Releasing Virtual Printers .......
Closing a Print File or Displaying
Print File Status ..............
Advanced Options ..............
Running the Automatic Virtual Printer
Program .......................
Special Considerations .............
7-47
7·52
Chapter 8. Using the PC Support/36
Transfer Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents ...................,~....
Introduction ......................
Transfer Requests .................
Transfer Facility Programs ..........
Transferring Data ..................
8-1
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8·5
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-7
7-9
7-13
7-20
7-21
7·23
v
Using System/36 Files Defined by
IDDU Data Definitions .......... 8-6
System/36 Files Not Defined by IDDU
Data Definitions or Library
Members .................... 8-10
Reserved Words .................. 8-13
Chapter 9. Transferring Data from the
System/36 to the Personal Computer
9-1
Contents ........................ 9-1
Introduction ...................... 9-3
Running the Interactive
System/36-to-Personal Computer
Transfer Facility ................. 9-4
Creating a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request ...... 9-12
Joining Records from More Than
One System/36 File ............ 9-57
Modifying a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request ...... 9-73
Running a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request ...... 9-74
Saving a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request ...... 9-89
Recalling a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request ...... 9-96
Name of Transfer Request to be Recalled 9-97
Erasing a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request ..... 9-101
Ending the System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Facility ....... 9-101
Running the Automatic
System/36-to-Personal Computer
Transfer Facility ............... 9-102
Error Messages ............... 9-110
Incompatibilities from the Transfer
Facility PRPQ ................. 9-111
Chapter 10. Transferring Data from the
Personal Computer to the System/36 . 10-1
Contents ....................... 10-1
Introduction ..................... 10-3
VI
Running the Interactive Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Facility .......................
Creating a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request ....................
Modifying a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request ....................
Running a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request ....................
Saving a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request ....................
Recalling a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request ....................
Erasing a Personal
Computer-to-System/ 36 Transfer
Request ....................
Ending the Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Facility ......................
Running the Automatic Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Facility ......................
Error Messages ...............
Chapter 11. Using the PC Support/36
Message Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents .......................
Introduction .....................
Installation .....................
Configuration ...................
Setup CONFIG.S36 .............
Creating an Alternate Configuration
File ........................
Starting the Message Facility .......
Message Facility Commands ........
STARTMSG ..................
MSG ...... ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
RCVMSG ...................
10-3
10-10
10-25
10-28
10-34
10-41
10-46
10-46
10-47
10-53
11-1
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-7
11-8
11-9
11-14
11-25
VB
STOPMSG
................. .
Chapter 12. Ending PC Support/36 ... .
Contents ...................... .
Overview ...................... .
Ending the PC Support/36 Programs ..
Ending the PC Support/36 Router ....
Chapter 13. Problem Determination
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents ...................... .
Introduction ..................... .
Personal Computer or PC Support/36
Stopped ...................... .
Virtual Printer Stopped ........ .
Virtual Disk Stopped .......... .
Transfer Facility Stopped ...... .
Output Not as Expected .......... .
Communications Problems ........ .
Determining if You Have a
Communications Problem ..... .
LINK36.BAT Problems ........ .
Shared Folder Problems ....... .
Vill
11-27
12-1
12-1
12-2
12-2
12-4 (
13-1
13-1
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-9
13-12
13-20
13-40
13-40
13-55
13-58
Glossary
G-1
Index
X-I
Preface
This manual explains how to use PC Support/36
with an IBM Personal Computer attached to an
IBM System/36. The IBM Personal Computer
can be anyone of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
5150
5155
5160
5162
5170
Personal Computer
Portable Personal Computer
Personal Computer XTl
Personal Computer
PERSONAL COMPUTER AT®
Throughout this manual, the term personal
computer applies to any of these products.
This manual is intended for personal computer
users, such as executives, secretaries, or anyone
who has a personal computer attached to the
IBM System/36. Before using PC Support/36, you
should have some knowledge of the personal
computer, including the IBM Personal Computer
Disk Operating System (DOS), and the IBM
System/36.
This manual will not teach you how to use your
personal computer, but will refer you to the
appropriate manuals for information.
1
Trademark of IBM.
IX
Technical information and reference information
about PC Support/36, such as installation and
service procedures, are contained in the PC
Support/36 Technical Reference.
Unless your personal computer is attached as the
console of a 5364 system unit, PC Support/36
requires that you have one of the following:
•
•
•
•
5250 Emulation Program
Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program
Remote 5250 Emulation Program
IBM Token-Ring Network and IBM
Token-Ring Network PC Adapter Support
Interface Program
Unless specifically stated otherwise, this manual
uses the term link to refer to these programs.
With a few exceptions, the interactive
System/36-to-personal computer transfer facility
program, which is part of PC Support/36, is
compatible with the IBM System/36 Transfer
Facility PRPQ. The exceptions are noted in
Chapter 9, "Transferring Data from the
System/36 to the Personal Computer."
x
Organization of This Manual
This manual has thirteen chapters. External
tabs are provided to group related chapters into
sections, and to aid you in finding information
quickly. The following lists each section and a
description of the chapters it contains:
•
Getting started
Chapter 1, "Introduction," describes the
functions of PC Support/36 and what you
need to use those functions.
Chapter 2, "What You Should Know
before Operating PC Support/36,"
describes display operation, keyboard
operation, and information about files and
commands to help you use PC Support/36.
Chapter 3, "Starting PC Support/36,"
describes the procedures for starting PC
Support/36.
•
Tutorial
Chapter 4, "Tutorial," helps you learn to
use PC Support/36 by doing tasks with
various PC Support/36 programs.
•
Virtual disk
Chapter 5, "Using the PC Support/36
Virtual Disk Facility," describes how to
start and use the PC Support/36 virtual
disk facility.
Xl
•
Shared folders
Chapter 6, "Using the PC Support/36
Shared Folders Facility," describes how to
start and use the PC Support/36 shared
folders facility.
•
Virtual printer
Chapter 7, "Using the PC Support/36
Virtual Printer Facility," describes how to
start and use the PC Support/36 virtual
printer facility.
•
Transfer facility
Chapter 8, "Using the PC Support/36
Transfer Facility," provides an overview
of the functions of the transfer facility
programs.
Chapter 9, "Transferring Data from the
System/36 to the Personal Computer,"
describes how to use the interactive and
automatic programs to transfer data from
the System/36 to the personal computer.
Chapter 10, "Transferring Data from the
Personal Computer to the System/36,"
describes how to use the interactive and
automatic programs to transfer data from
the personal computer to the System/36.
xu
•
Message facility
Chapter 11, "Using the PC Support/36
Message Facility," describes what you
need to know to use the message facility
on your personal computer.
•
Ending
Chapter 12, "Ending PC Support/36,"
describes what you need to know to end
the PC Support/36 programs when you
want to use your personal computer for
other work.
•
Problem determination
Chapter 13, "Problem Determination
Procedures," provides information for
determining the cause of and correcting
problems that may occur while you are
using PC Support/36.
•
Glossary
•
Index
xiii
Related Publications
The following IBM publications contain related
information you may find useful:
•
IBM PC Support/36 Messages Guide,
SC21-9525
•
•
IBM PC Support/36 Organizer, SC21-9563
IBM PC Support/36 Quick Reference Card,
SX21-9846
•
IBM PC Support/36 Technical Reference,
SC21-9097
•
IBM PC Support/36 Work Station Feature
User's Guide, SC21-9564
•
IBM PC Support/36 Work Station Feature
Technical Reference, SC21-9569
•
IBM Personal Computer Guide to Operations
•
IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating
System
• . IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating
System Technical Reference
•
IBM 5250 Emulation Program User's Guide,
IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program
User's Guide, or IBM Remote 5250 Emulation
Program User's Guide
•
IBM System/36 Operating Your System-5360,
5362, SC21-9452
XIV
•
IBM System/36 Operating Your System-5364,
SC21-9453
•
IBM System/36 Using Your Display Station,
SC21-9455
•
IBM System/36 Concepts and Programmer's
Guide, SC21-9019
•
IBM System/36 Getting Started with the
Interactive Data Definition Utility, SC21-8003
•
IBM System/36 System Reference, SC21-9020
•
IBM System/36 System Messages, SC21-7938
•
IBM System/36 Changing Your System
Configuration, SC21-9052
•
IBM System/36 System Security Guide,
SC21-9042
•
IBM Token-Ring Network PC Adapter Guide
to Operations, 6165874
•
IBM Token-Ring Network Problem
Determination Guide, GA27-0280
•
IBM Using System/36 Communications,
SC21-9082
xv
Summary of Changes
This section lists the major changes in this
revision:
xvi
•
The IBM Token-Ring Network is supported as /
another link for PC Support/36. This change
is covered in Chapter 3, "Starting PC
Support/36. "
•
The PC Support/36 message facility has been
added to allow you to send and receive
messages when the IBM Token-Ring Network
is operational. This change is covered in
Chapter 11, "Using the PC Support/36
Message Facility."
•
There is a new installation procedure that is
covered in the PC Support/36 Technical
Reference.
Data Security
PC Support/36, together with the IBM Personal
Computer and the IBM System/36, is a powerful
and useful tool to help you with your personal
and business data processing needs. However, as
with any information system, inadvertent errors
may occur and information may be misused.
We suggest that when processing sensitive or
valuable information, you take steps to ensure
that your data and programs are protected from
accidental or intentional unauthorized
disclosure, modification, destruction, or misuse.
Simple measures, such as removing diskettes
when not in use, keeping backup copies of
valuable information, or installing the equipment
in a secure facility, can help to maintain the
integrity and privacy of your information.
xvii
XVlll
Chapter 1. Introduction
Contents
What Is PC Support/36? .............
Virtual Disk Facility ............
Shared Folders Facility ..........
Virtual Printer Facility ..........
Message Facility ................
Transfer Facility ................
Transferring Data from the
System/36 to the Personal
Computer ..................
Transferring Data from the
Personal Computer to the
System/36 .................
PC Support/36 Programming Functions
Application Program Interface .
Translation Table Utility
System/36 PC Utility .........
What Is Needed to Use PC Support/36?
Personal Computer Storage
Requirements ............... .
Storage Requirements for Locally
and Remotely Attached Personal
Computers ............... .
Storage Requirements for IBM
Token-Ring Network Attached
Personal Computers ........ .
Installing PC Support/36 .......... .
1-2
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-11
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-16
1-17
1-23
1-27
1-1
What Is PC Support/36?
PC Support/36 is a set of programs that allows
you to perform the following major functions:
•
Use disk storage on the System/36 the same
way you would use personal computer disk
storage by using the virtual disk facility.
•
Use shared folders on the System/36 to store
information that can be accessed and used by
other System/36 and personal computer users.
•
Use printers attached to the System/36 by
using the virtual printer facility.
•
Transfer data from the System/36 to the
personal computer, and from the personal
computer to the System/36 by using the
transfer facility.
•
Send messages to other users, and receive
messages from them.
•
Use personal computer and System/36
applications from a single menu.
Each of these functions of PC Support/36 is
independent of the others. This means that you
can use any combination of the functions
provided by PC Support/36 to satisfy your own
data processing needs. For example, you can use
the transfer facility to retrieve data from the
System/36, then print the data on a System/36
printer using the virtual printer facility.
1-2
The PC Support/36 programs communicate with
the System/36 using one of the following:
•
•
•
•
5250 Emulation Program
Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program
Remote 5250 Emulation Program
IBM Token-Ring Network and the IBM
Token-Ring Network PC adapter Support
Interface Program
A link must be active before you can use PC
Support/36.
PC Support/36 includes a router that manages
requests to and from the virtual disk facility,
shared folders facility, virtual printer facility,
transfer facility, and message facility. The
router controls communication between these
programs and the System/36 through a session.
The router must be running before you can use
any of the other PC Support/36 programs.
1-3
Virtual Disk Facility
The virtual disk facility allows you to use
storage on the System/36 as though it were one
or more personal computer fixed disks. A PC
Support/36 virtual disk is a form of permanent
storage on the System/36; the data on a PC
Support/36 virtual disk is not lost when you
power off your personal computer.
You can access up to eight virtual disks at one
time. However, you can create any number of
virtual disks on the System/36. Each virtual disk
can be any size from 5K bytes to 32M bytes, in
increments of 5K bytes.
The virtual disk facility includes interactive and
automatic programs:
1-4
•
The interactive virtual disk facility program
prompts you, step-by-step, to supply
information about the virtual disk or disks
you want to use. The interactive virtual disk
facility also allows you to create or delete
virtual disks.
•
The automatic virtual disk facility program
allows you to automatically use, without
going through the prompting sequence,
virtual disks that were previously created
using the interactive virtual disk facility.
Shared Folders Facility
The shared folders facility allows you to access
and use information stored in document folders
on the System/a6. You access these folders as
though they were on personal computer diskettes
or fixed disks. The information in a shared
folder on the System/a6 can be used by both
System/a6 and personal computer users; a shared
folder can be accessed by more than one
System/a6 or personal computer user at a time.
You access shared folders by assigning a drive
letter. You can assign a drive (directory drive)
to one shared folder, or you can assign a single
drive (system drive) to all of the folders on the
System/a6.
The shared folders facility provides an
easy-to-use command interface with help text;
there is no interactive prompting sequence.
1·5
Virtual Printer Facility
The virtual printer facility allows you to use
printers attached to the System/36 as though
they were directly attached to the personal
computer. The virtual printer facility allows you
to specify parameters for the virtual printer, such
as the number of lines to be printed per page and
the number of characters per line, just as you
would for the personal computer printer.
You can assign ·as many as three printers to be
used with your personal computer. All three of
these printers can be personal computer printers,
virtual printers, or any. combination of the two.
The virtual printer facility includes interactive
and automatic programs:
1-6
•
The interactive virtual printer facility
program prompts you, step-by-step, to supply
information about the virtual printers you
want to use.
•
The automatic virtual printer facility program
allows you to automatically use virtual
printers without going through the prompting
sequence.
Message Facility
The message facility allows you to send, receive
and store messages when the IBM Token-Ring
Network is your link to the System/36.
You can communicate with other display
stations, personal computers attached to the
System/36 and other users located elsewhere on
the IBM Token-Ring Network.
The message facility includes interactive and
command line inputs.
•
You can send messages through the
interactive message command and you will be
prompted for all the necessary information.
•
You can send messages through the command
line and you will not be prompted for the
information.
•
You can display received messages through
the interactive command.
•
You can automatically display received
messages.
•
You can store received messages in a file you
specify.
The message facility can be started automatically
by entering a command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT
file. This will start the message facility prior to
you receiving messages.
1-7
Transfer Facility
The transfer facility allows you to transfer data
from the System/36 to the personal computer, and
from the personal computer to the System/36.
The transfer facility includes interactive and
automatic programs:
•
The interactive transfer facility programs
prompt you, step-by-step, to supply
information about the data you want to
transfer. The information you supply is
called a transfer request. A transfer request is
a description of the data you want to transfer
to or from the System/36. When you use the
transfer request, the data is transferred to or
from the personal computer.
•
The automatic transfer facility programs
allow you to use, without going through the
prompting sequence, a transfer request that
you previously created and saved using the
interactive transfer facility program.
Because data is stored and used differently on
the System/36 than it is on the personal
computer, the data must be translated when it is
transferred. PC Support/36 automatically
translates this data for you.
1-8
Transferring Data from the
System/36 to the Personal
Computer
When you transfer data from the System/36 to
the personal computer, the data can be sent to
the personal computer display, a personal
computer printer (including a virtual printer), or
a personal computer disk, virtual disk, shared
folder, or diskette file. All of the necessary data
conversion is done when the data is transferred.
You can transfer data from any of the following:
•
A System/36 file defined by interactive data
definition utility (IDDU) data definitions.
You can specify which records to transfer
from the file, which fields to transfer from
those records, and how the data should be
sorted. Data conversion is done on a
field-by-field basis.
•
A System/36 file that is not defin~d by IDDU
data definitions. In this case, all records are
transferred. The data consists of either
EBCDIC characters to be converted to ASCII,
or data that is not to be converted.
•
A System/36 source or procedure library
member. All records from the member are
transferred. The data consists of either
EBCDIC characters to be converted to ASCII,
or data that is not converted.
1-9
You can transfer data that is combined or joined
from two to five System/a6 data files. You can
specify how the records in the files are to be
joined when you make the transfer request.
When output is sent to a personal computer disk
or diskette file, the data is converted to one of
the following file types:
•
ASCII text
•
DOS random
•
BASIC sequential
•
BASIC random
•
DIFI
•
No conversion (the data is not converted)
Files sent to personal computer disk or diskette
files can be used with personal computer
application programs.
1
1-10
DIF is a trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.
Transferring Data from the
Personal Computer to the
System/36
You can use the transfer facility to transfer data
from a personal computer disk or diskette file to:
•
An existing System/36 file defined by IDDU
data definitions. Data conversion is done on
a field-by-field basis.
•
An existing System/36 file not defined by
IDDU data definitions. Data consists of
either ASCII characters to be converted to
EBCDIC, or data that is not converted.
•
A new or existing source or procedure library
member. Data consists of ASCII characters to
be converted to EBCDIC, or data that is not
to be converted.
Data can be transferred from one of the following
personal computer file types:
•
ASCII text
•
DOS random
•
BASIC sequential
•
BASIC random
•
DIF
•
No conversion (the data is not converted)
1-11
PC Support/36 Programming
Functions
Application Program Interface
The PC Support/36 transfer facility provides an
application program interface, which allows a
programmer to write a personal computer
application program to transfer data to and from
System/36 files and libraries. This interface
allows System/36 data to be integrated directly
into personal computer application programs.
For example, a personal computer program might
receive data from a System/36 file, and use that
data to create a graph to be displayed on the
personal computer.
The application program interface is described in
detail in the PC Support/36 Technical Reference.
Translation Table Utility
Because the System/36 uses only EBCDIC data
and the personal computer uses only ASCII data,
the data must be translated when it is transferred
to and from the personal computer. PC
Support/36 provides default translation tables for
data translation.
Using the PC Support/a6 translation table utility,
you can use these default translation tables to
create new ones. The translation table utility,
through a series of prompts, allows the
programmer to create EBCDIC to ASCII, or
ASCII to EBCDIC translation tables. For more
information, refer to the PC Support/36 Technical
Reference.
~
1-12
System/36 PC Utility
The System/36 PC utility (PCU) allows you to do
the following:
•
Create, copy, and delete virtual disks from
the System/36 console or from a System/36
display station (this can be a personal
computer in 5250 emulation mode)
•
Copy a virtual disk file to another virtual
disk, System/36 file, System/36 library
member, and DisplayWrite/36 (DW/36)
document
•
Copy a System/36 file and library member to a
virtual disk file
•
Copy a DW /36 document to a virtual disk file
•
Modify ASClI-to-EBCDIC and
EBCDIC-to-ASCII translation tables
•
Create, delete, rename, or reorganize shared
folders
•
Create and maintain documents
•
Copy a virtual disk to a shared folder
For information on how to use the System/36 PC
utility, refer to the PC Support/36 Technical
Reference.
1-13
What Is Needed to Use PC
Support/36?
To set up and operate PC Support/36, you will
need the following:
•
IBM System/a6 (any model) with Release 5
Modification Levell of the System Support
Program installed.
•
One of the following System Units:
-
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
5150
5155
5160
5162
5170
Personal Computer
Portable Personal Computer
Personal Computer XT
Personal Computer
Personal Computer AT
•
IBM Personal Computer keyboard.
•
One of the following displays:
IBM Monochrome Display attached to an
IBM Monochrome Display and Printer
Adapter card, an IBM Color/Graphics
Monitor Adapter card, IBM Enhanced
Graphics Adapter card, or IBM
Professional Graphics Adapter card
-
1-14
IBM Color Display and IBM Enhanced
Color Display that supports lines of up to
80 characters, attached to an IBM
Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter card, an
IBM Enhanced Graphics Adapter card, or
an IBM Professional Graphics Adapter
card
•
One diskette drive and diskette adapter, or a
fixed disk and adapter card.
•
IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating
System (DOS):
If you are running on the 5250 Emulation
you need version 2.1 or a later compatible
verSIon
If you are running on the IBM Token-Ring
Network you need version 3.2 or a later
compatible version
•
If you plan to run on 5250 Emulation you
need one of the following:
IBM 5250 Emulation Adapter card and
IBM Personal Computer 5250 Emulation
Program Version 1.1 or later
Enhanced 5250 Emulation Adapter card
and the Enhanced 5250 Emulation
Program Version 2.1 or later
Note:
Enhanced 5250 Emulation cannot be
configured as a 5292 Model 2.
SDLC Communications Adapter and the
Remote 5250 Emulation Program
Note:
You may need the Enhanced 5250
Emulation adapter card and the
Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program,
Version 2.1 Service Updates, if you are
using the options for Printer data type
in .the virtual printer facility. For
information on the Printer data type
options available, refer to "Setting
Printer Data Type," in
Chapter 7, "Using the PC Support/36
Virtual Printer Facility."
1-15
•
If you plan to run on the IBM Token-Ring
Network you need:
The System/36 IBM Token-Ring Network
Attachment Feature
IBM Token-Ring Network PC Adapter
card, or the IBM Token-Ring Network PC
Adapter II card
The IBM Token-Ring Network PC Adapter
Support Interface Program
•
PC Support/36 supports, although it does not
need, as locally attached printers the IBM
Personal Computer Matrix printer, the IBM
Personal Computer Graphics printer, the IBM
Proprinter, the IBM Quietwriter, and the IBM
Color Printer.
Personal Computer Storage
Requirements
The personal computer storage requirements
depend on the size of the PC Support/36
functions you want to use, and any other
personal computer facilities you are using, such
as RAM disks and communications.
In most cases, the PC Support/36 functions can
be performed if your personal computer has 512K
bytes of storage. However, depending on what
hardware you are using and how you are using
your personal computer, your storage
requirements may be more or less than 512K
bytes.
1-16
The amount of storage you need also depends on
if you are using the IBM Token-Ring Network or
not. If you are not using the IBM Token-Ring
Network, you are using a locally or remotely
attached personal computer. If this is your case,
then proceed to the following section. If you are
using the IBM Token-Ring Network, skip to the
section "Storage Requirements for IBM
Token-Ring Network Attached Personal
Computers. "
Storage Requirements for Locally
and Remotely Attached Personal
Computers
To determine approximately how much personal
computer storage you need, you must determine
how much resident storage and how much
nonresident storage you will be using. The total
amount of storage you require is the sum of the
resident and nonresident storage required.
1-17
Resident Storage Requirements
Use the following table to determine your
approximate resident storage requirements. Your
total resident storage requirement is the sum of
all individual requirements for the various
facilities you are using.
Facility and Type or Version
DOS 2.1
DOS 3.0 or 3.1
DOS 3.2
DOS 3.3
DOS Buffers (0.5K
Default = 3
per buffer)
Recommended = 20
5250 Emulation
Enhanced 5250 Emulation, Version 2.1
Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program with
printer emulation, Version 2.1
Remote 5250 Emulation
Remote 5250 Emulation with printer
emulation
1-18
Size
in Bytes
25K
37K
46K
47K
1.5K
10K
16K
28K
51K
163K
183K
Facility and Type or Version
Color/Graphics Adapter
Virtual disk facility
Shared folders facility
Virtual printer facility (one virtual printer)
Virtual printer facility (two virtual
printers)
Virtual printer facility (three virtual
printers)
Source transfer facility program
5250 Router
Other resident programs, such as RAM
disks
Note:
Size
in Bytes
12K
24K
65K
18K
24K
30K
20K
38K
See
Note
For the exact storage requirements of other
resident programs, refer to the appropriate
manuals for those specific products.
1-19
Nonresident Storage Requirements
Use the following table to determine your
approximate nonresident storage requirements.
Your total nonresident storage requirement is
the largest of all of the individual requirements
for the various facilities you are using.
Facility and Type or Version
Virtual disk facility
Shared folders facility
Virtual printer facility
Transfer facility (typical usage)
Transfer facility (System/36-to-personal
computer transfers that interactively
display more than 100 data records, or
records over 2K bytes long)
Organizer
Organizer Text Assist
Other personal computer applications being
run while PC Support/36 is active, such as
an editor
Size
in Bytes
.43K
25K
64K
147K
159K
26K
lOOK
See
note
Note: For the exact storage requirements of other
nonresident programs, refer to the
appropriate manuals for those specific
products.
1-20
Total Storage
Add the resident storage requirements to the
nonresident storage requirements to determine
the approximate total personal computer storage
required to run PC Support/36 with other
personal computer applications.
For example, suppose you are using a personal
computer with DOS 3.2 and the Enhanced 5250
Emulation Program, Version 2.1, and you want to
use the virtual disk facility and the virtual
printer facility.
Your approximate total resident storage
requirements would be as follows:
Program Facility
DOS 3.2
Enhanced 5250 Emulation
Program, Version 2.1
5250 Router
Virtual disk facility
Virtual printer facility (one
virtual printer)
Storage
Requirements
in Bytes
46K
28K
38K
24K
18K
The total resident storage requirement would be
the sum of 46K, 28K, 38K, 24K, and 18K bytes, or
154K bytes of resident storage.
1-21
Your total nonresident storage requirements
would be the largest of the following:
Program Facility
Storage
Requirement,
in Bytes
Virtual disk facility
Virtual printer facility
43K
64K
Your total storage requirement would be the sum
of the total resident storage required, 154K bytes,
and the largest nonresident storage required, 64K
bytes, which is 218K bytes.
1-22
Storage Requirements for IBM
Token-Ring Network Attached
Personal Computers
To determine approximately how much personal
computer storage you need, you must determine
how much resident storage and how much
nonresident storage you will be using. The total
amount of storage you require is the sum of the
resident and nonresident storage you require.
Resident Storage Requirements
Use the following table to determine your
approximate resident storage requirements. Your
total resident storage requirement is the sum of
all individual requirements for the various
facilities you are using.
Facility and Type or Version
DOS 3.2
DOS 3.3
DOS Buffers (0.5K
Default = 3
per buffer)
Recommended = 20
Color/Graphics Adapter
IBM Token-Ring Network Router
Virtual disk facility
Shared folders facility
Size
in Bytes
46K
47K
1.5K
10K
12K
32K
24K
65K
1-23
Facility and Type or Version
Virtual printer facility (one virtual printer)
Virtual printer facility (two virtual
printers)
Virtual printer facility (three virtual
printers)
Source transfer facility program
Message facility
IBM Token-Ring Adapter Support Interface
Work Station Feature with 1 display
session
Work Station Feature with 1 display and 1
printer session
Work Station Feature with 2 displays and 1
printer session
.
Work Station Feature with 3 displays and 1
printer session
Work Station Feature with 4 displays and 1
printer session
Other resident programs, such as additional
buffers
Note:
1-24
Size
in Bytes
18K
24K
30K
20K
18K
8K
54K
99K
106K
113K
120K
See
note
For the exact storage requirements of other
resident programs, refer to the appropriate
manuals for those specific products.
Nonresident Storage Requirements
Use the following table to determine your
approximate nonresident storage requirements.
The amount of nonresident storage you need is
the largest one of the following that you use.
Facility and Type or Version
Virtual disk facility
Shared folders facility
Virtual printer facility
Transfer facility (typical usage)
Message facility
Transfer facility (System/36-to-personal
computer transfers that interactively
display more than 100 data records, or
records over 2K bytes long)
PC Support/36 Organizer
PC Support/36 Organizer Text Assist
Other personal computer applications being
run while PC Support/36 is active, such as
an editor
Note:
Size
in Bytes
43K
25K
64K
l47K
50K
l59K
26K
lOOK
See
note
For the exact storage requirements of other
nonresident programs, refer to the
appropriate manuals for those specific
products.
1-25
Total Storage
Add the resident storage requirements to the
nonresident storage requirements to determine
the approximate total personal computer storage
you require to run PC Support/36 with other
personal computer applications.
For example, suppose you are using a personal
computer connected to a System/36 by a IBM
Token-Ring Network with DOS 3.2, Work Station
Feature with 1 display session, the PC Support/36
Organizer, and the virtual disk facility.
Your total resident storage requirements would
be as follows:
Program Facility
DOS 3.2
Work Station Feature with 1
display session
IBM Token-Ring Adapter Support
Interface
IBM Token-Ring Router
Virtual disk facility
Shared folders facility
1-26
Storage
Requirements
in Bytes
46K
54K
8K
32K
24K
65K
Your total nonresident storage requirements
would be as follows:
Program Facility
Storage
Requirements
in Bytes
PC Support/a6 Organizer
Virtual disk facility
Shared folders facility
26K
43K
25K
Your total storage requirement would be the sum
of the total resident storage required, 229K bytes,
and the largest nonresident storage required, 43K
bytes, which is 272K bytes of storage.
Installing PC Support/36
For detailed instructions on how to install PC
Support/a6, refer to the PC Support/36 Technical
Reference.
If you are installing the PC Support/a6
Expansion Feature, refer to the IBM System/36
Changing Your System Configuration manual for
details. Installation of this feature allows you to
double the number of concurrent users of PC
Support/a6.
1-27
1-28
Chapter 2. What You Should
Know before Operating PC
Support/36
Contents
Introduction ......................
Display Operation .................
Windows ......................
OPTIONS Menus ...............
Arrows .......................
List of Keys ...................
Help Text .....................
Messages ....................
Error Messages .............
Informational Messages .......
Status Indicator ...............
Prompts and Input Areas ........
Input Areas ................
Cursor ......................
Highlighting ..................
Keyboard Operation ...............
Cursor Movement and Window
Movement Keys ..............
Control Keys .................
Function Keys ................
A Few Words about Files ...........
Personal Computer Files .........
Naming Personal Computer Files ..
File Name Format ...........
System/36 Files and Libraries .....
PC Support/36 Command Format .....
Using the Correct Display Attributes ..
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-16
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-31
2-1
Introduction
The first thing you should know about PC
Support/a6 is that you should not be afraid to try
it. If you try something that does not work, you
will receive an error message to help you identify
what went wrong. PC Support/36 will not let
you do something you should not. If you need
help for a particular prompt on a -display,
pressing the function key Fl displays help text
for that prompt.
This chapter contains information you will find
helpful when operating PC Support/36. This
information pertains primarily to the interactive
PC Support/36 programs. This information
includes how the display and keyboard function
when you use PC Support/a6, how to display help
text, how to read the format of the PC Support/36
commands, and how to start the various PC
Support/a6 programs.
After reading this chapter, if you want to try
using PC Support/36, refer to
Chapter 4, "Tutorial."
2-2
Display Operation
When using PC Support/36, you will need to
select options and respond to prompts on the
display. To do this, you need to understand the
functions of:
•
Windows
•
OPTIONS menus
•
Arrows
•
Help text
•
Messages
•
Status indicator
•
List of keys
•
Prompts and input areas
•
Cursor
•
Highlighting
2-3
Windows
Windows display additional information, such as
help text, selection lists, transferred records, and
messages. When a window is displayed, it
temporarily overlays a portion of the display
(depending on the amount of information) either
above or below the line to which it applies.
The following display shows a list window:
r - - - - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E : - - - - - - - - - ,
S/38 f'ile or library melllber name
FROM
LIST FOR FRO
FILE
~
OUSTKAST
INVENTOl
I NVENTO 2
ITEHMST
SUPPLYOl
SUPPLY02
SUPPLY03
OUSTeDT
FS=Select
Fl=Help
TEXT
Department Payroll File
Master Customer List
Inventory tile #1
Inventory tile #2
Item Master File
Supplier tile #1
Supplier tile #2
Suppl1 er f'il e #3
Customer charge f'i I e
'/~
F2=List
=Scroll
F3=R\m
RECL
0140
00S8
1140
1140
0540
0120
0120
0120
0080
Esc=Exit List
F4=Save
Fl0=New Line
59088604-1
You can display a window (for example, by
requesting help text) or PC Support/36 sometimes
automatically displays a window (for example, to
show you the total number of records transferred
from a System/36 file).
Refer to "Function Keys," later in this chapter,
for descriptions of the function keys that allow
you to page, display, and remove windows.
2-4
OPTIONS Menus
When you start any of the interactive PC
Support/a6 programs, an OPTIONS menu is
displayed. The functions you can perform for
that particular program are listed in the
OPTIONS menu. For example, when you start
the interactive PC Support/a6 virtual disk
facility, the following OPTIONS menu appears:
SET VIRTUAL DISKS
DISK liA.HJ::
DBl.llE
TESTINFO
CUS TORD 1
CUST1087
F
G
H
I
J
A~SS
lEllEl
Read/Write
Exclusive
Read
SIZE (KB)
tl.lB-S.l.ZE
32785
20
380
2048
18
112
Exclusive
1040
338
K
HFKTEKP
L
K
ITEKINV
Read
535
128
. - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _-aPTIO·m;._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . .
Select one ot,Iii~;n;i§liFfii\EifljiimSiler.
2
3
4
5
Release virtual diskl!!l
Create a new virtual disK
Delete an existing virtual disK
Exit
' - - - - - - - - - - - - - V e r s i o n 04.00 (c)
IBM Corp. 1987
89088401·5
When the OPTIONS menu is displayed, the
default option is highlighted. You can select any
option you want by typing the number of the
option in the Select input area and pressing the
Enter key, or you can use the Up Arrow and
Down Arrow keys to position the highlighting to
the option you want and press the Enter key.
(
"
2-5
Arrows
There are times when not all of the information
fits on a display or in a window at once. When
this occurs, arrows on the window border show
the direction of additional information.
If there is more information previous to that
currently shown in the display or window,
arrows appear on the top border of the display or
window. If there is more information following
what is currently shown in the display or
window, arrows appear on the bottom border of
the display or window.
For example, this display shows a window. The
arrows indicate that more information follows:
. . . . - - - - - - - - - - s / 3 8 - T O - p c TRANSFER: R l J N - - - - - - - - - - ,
F~K
=~~TC=D~T
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _
SELECT
~NUM.LSTNAK.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
WHERE
CUSNUM>100000 AND BALDUE>100
ORDER BY
~NUM
FORMAT OF TRANSFERRED DAT
TO filename: KASTER.XPC
File type: ASCII
text
---- System/38 --- ------- PC ------Name • • CUSNUM
Data type • • • • • • • EBCDIC Zoned
ASCII Numeric
Si ze in bytes • • • • •
8
Digits • • • • • •
8
Decimal posi tiona •
0
.,
Name • • LSTNAM
Data type. • • • •
Si ze in bytes • • •
• EBCDIC Char
8
ASCII Char
2
59088634·2
2-6
To move forward or backward one page at a time,
press the Page Down key or the Page Up key. To
move forward or backward one line at a time,
press the Down Arrow key or the Up Arrow key.
If there is more information to the left of the
window, arrows appear on the left border of the
window. If there is more information to the right
of the window, arrows appear on the right border
of the window.
To move the window left or right one page at a
time, press the Control key and the Left Arrow
key or the Control key and the Right Arrow key.
When transferred data records are displayed, you
can move the window left or right I-character
position at a time by pressing the Left Arrow or
Right Arrow key.
2-7
List of Keys
A list of keys and the functions they perform
appears on the last line of the display or window.
This list of keys may change as you move the
cursor from one prompt to another. The
following display shows a list of valid keys:
r - - - - - - - - - P C - T O - S / 3 6 TRANSFER: CREATE-_ _ _ _ _ _ _....,
S/36 :tile or library member name
TO
p.-_..t.IST FOR T
FILE
TEXT
RECL
PAYROLL
Department payro 11 F 11 e
0T40
CUSTMAST Kaster Customer List
0056
INVENTOl Inventory tile #1
1140
INVENT02 Inventory :t11e #2
1140
ITEMMST
Item Kal!lter File
0540
SUPPLYOl Supplier :tile #1
0120
SUPPLY02 Suppl1 er :til e #2
0120
SUPPLY03 Supplier tile #3
0120
Customer charge :t11e
CUSTCDT
0080
TEKPCDT
0060
•
F5=Select
Fl=Help
t/' =Scroll
F2=Llst
F3=Run
Esc=Exit List
F4=Save
59088639·3
For a detailed description of the functions these
keys perform, refer to "Keyboard Operation"
later in this chapter.
2-8
Help Text
Help text is provided to help you use PC
Support/36. You can request help text by
pressing the Fl key. Help is available any time
you see Fl = Help in the list of keys at the
bottom of the display.
For example, the help text for the transfer
facility FROM prompt might appear as follows:
.--_ _ _ _ _ _ S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER: CREATIr&---_ _ _ _ _ _---,
S/38 tile or library member name
FROM
HELP FOR FRO
Enter the name at the Systeml38 tile or library member to be
transterred to the Personal Computer.
Examples at a tile:
1: CUSTKAST
2: EKPFILE/NEWRECRD
Examples at a library member:
1: ACCOUNTS/S/ ACCT1
2: REPORTS/P/PRINTREP
Presa the 1"2 key to aee a list at tiles and library members stored
on the Systeml3S. Kere details below.
Enter the name in one at the tollowins ways:
For a tile:
For a library member:
:filename/tormat-name
Llbrary-name/member-type/member-name
.-.--.-.-.-.-.--.-.-.-.-.-.-.
For a :file:
PgUp/Dn=Pll8e
Fi=Help
Esc=Exi t Help
F3=Run
F4=Save
F10=New Line
89088670-1
To remove the help text window from the display,
press the Escape key. To remove the help text
window from the display and proceed to the next
prompt, press the Enter key.
The keys that are valid while help text is
displayed and the function they perform are
shown on the last line of the help text window.
For a detailed description of the functions these
keys perform, refer to "Keyboard Operation"
later in this chapter.
2-9
Messages
PC Support/36 issues two kinds of messages.
There are error messages, which tell you when
an error occurred and processing cannot be done
or was done incorrectly, and there are
informational messages, which simply tell you
what is happening during or after processing.
Error Messages
Error messages are shown inside windows on the
display, or on the bottom of the display. For
example:
Translation Table Utility : CREATE
Type in requested information; press Enter_
File name
PC filename
A-mWl.i
Description
ERRO
5820 - F1le already exists
Press Enter to modify tile
or
Press Esc and enter another filename
59097703-0
/
If you receive an error message, you can refer to
the PC Support/36 Messages Guide for detailed
cause and recovery information.
2-10
Informational Messages
Some messages are for your information only.
These messages require no recovery action. For
example:
r-----------------------S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER.--------------------------,
FROM
CUSTCDT
SELECT
CUSNUK.LSTNAK.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
WHERE
CUSNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
ORDER BY
CUSNUK
ITEM
Output device
CHOICE
~
POSSIBLE CHOICES
l=Displ~
2=Printer
3=DiBk
.-----------a·PTIONS------------.
Select one of these options; press Enter.
1 Create a transfer request
2 Modi~ the current transfer request
3 Run the current transfer request
4 Save the current transfer request
5 Recall a transfer request
8 Exit S/38-to-PC Transfer FacUity
Select
~
'---------------------your transfer request has been successfully saved
S9088663-3
2-11
Status Indicator
Some of the PC Support/36 programs use a status
indicator located on the bottom right corner of
the display. This indicator tells you when the
PC Support/36 program is running. When the
status indicator is on, the PC Support/36 program
is processing your request and cannot accept
input. For example:
r---_ _ _ _ _ _ PC-TO-S/38 TRANSFER:
TO
~TE=~~C=DT~
CTKU1'tJN-_ _ _ _ _- - ' - _ - ,
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
FROM PC fil ename • • • • •
B:CUSTOMER\ REPORT\ KASTER.XPC
Transfer data using
PC file description? •
.1
PC file description
name • • • • • • • • •
B:CUSTOME~ REPORT\KASTER.FDF
PC filename
l=Yes
2=No
PC filename
. .______________~n.~__________________~
•
Your transfer request is running
Please wait
~---------------------~1~
59088652·3
Prompts and Input Areas
Prompts appear on the display followed by input
areas. Prompts ask you for specific information.
When you use the interactive PC Support/36
programs, prompts guide you through functions,
such as creating a transfer request or assigning
virtual disks.
Some prompts have default values. If you do not
specify a value, the function uses the default
value shown.
2-12
Input Areas
Input areas show where you can type information
on the display. Input areas are designated by
underscores L) when shown ona display
attached to a monochrome adapter, or by a
contrasting shade or color when shown on a
display attached to a color adapter. Values that
automatically appear in the input areas are
called default values. If you do not type a value,
the program uses the default value shown.
The following display shows a prompt and input
area:
F1=Hel
~
.
M
~
F
. . . - - - - - - - - - S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER : C R E A T ' I ! i - - - - - - - - - ,
S/38 tile or library member name
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
F2=List
F3=Run
F4--Save
F10 New Line
Eac=Options
S9088603-1
Prompt
Input Area
2-13
Cursor
A cursor is a movable symbol on a display, used
to indicate where to type the next character.
When you are using PC Support/36, the cursor
blinks. It can appear as a blinking rectangle
occupying the bottom half of a character position
or a blinking rectangle occupying a full
character position.
A blinking rectangle cursor (occupying the
bottom half of a character position) usually
indicates that you are not in insert mode and
that you can type in an input area. A blinking
rectangle cursor (occupying a full character
position) indicates that you are in insert mode,
and can insert characters.
2-14
Highlighting
Highlighting indicates which item is to be
selected in a list or OPTIONS menu. To select
other items from a menu or list, you can move
the highlighting by pressing the UpArrow and
Down Arrow keys.
The following display shows highlighting. If you
pressed the Enter key at this display, option 1
would be selected.
SET VIRTUAL DISKS
DBDlE
F
G
H
IJISK
rwm
TESTINFO
CUSTORD1
CUST1087
A~SS
lEllEI
Read/Write
Exclusive
Read
SIZ! eKa)
32765
20
360
llliLS.lZE
2048
16
112
I
J
Exclusive
1040
HFKTEKP
336
L
ITEMINV -c.PTIOI~-M
Read
535
128
. .__________________
______________
~
__. . .
K
Select one at these o~tiO~;:aS Enter.
'M,.,:;'Eii& ~
2 Release virtual disD
3 Create a new virtual disk
4 Delete an existing virtual disk
5 Exit
"ea
L--...:::=.;::....;:;~----------VerBion
04.00 (c)
IBM Corp. 1987
59088401·5
Note:
The remaining screens in this manual do
not show highlighting.
2-15
Keyboard Operation
This section describes the keyboard operation for
PC Support/36.
Cursor Movement and Window
Movement Keys
The following keys control cursor and window
movement for PC Support/36:
Key
Tab (~)
Back Tab
(I+-)
Function
Moves the cursor to the first position
of the next input area. If the next
input area is not on the display, the
display rolls forward to the next input
area, and the cursor moves to the first
position of that input area.
To use the Back Tab, you must press
and hold the Shift key (t), then press
the Back Tab key.
When the cursor is in the first
position of an input area, this key
moves the cursor to the first position
of the previous input area. If the
previous input area is not on the
display, the display rolls backward to
the input area on the previous display
and the cursor moves to the first
position of that input area.
When the cursor is not in the first
position of an input area, this key
moves the cursor to the first position
of that input area.
2-16
Key
Backspace
(4--)
Enter
(.-....J)
Function
When the cursor is not in the first
position of the input area, this key
moves the cursor backwards one
position and deletes the character at
that position.
When the cursor is in the first
position of the input area, this key
deletes the character at that position.
Processes input and moves the cursor
to the first position of the next input
area. The next input area can be on a
following display. This key can also
be used to respond to an error
message. If the Enter key is pressed
on the last input area of a display, the
information on the display is
processed by the program.
2-17
Key
Up Arrow
(j)
Function
When there is an input area above
the cursor, this key moves the cursor
to that area.
When there is no input area above
the cursor on the display, but there is
an input area above the cursor that is
not on the display, the display rolls
backward and this key moves the
cursor to that input area.
If a window is displayed (for example,
when you are scrolling transferred
records or help windows), this key
rolls the window backward one line
when there are arrows on the top
border of the window.
In a list, this key moves the
highlighting up one line. If the
highlighting is at the top of the
window and there are arrows on the
top border of the window, the window
rolls backward one line.
2-18
(
Function
Down Arrow When there is an input area below
(!)
the cursor, this key moves the cursor
to that input area.
Key
When there is no input area below
the cursor on the display, but there is
an input area below the cursor that is
not on the display, the display rolls
forward and this key moves the cursor
to that input area.
If a window is displayed (for example,
when you are scrolling transferred
records or help windows), this key
rolls the window forward one line if
there are arrows on the bottom border
of the window.
In a list, this key moves the
highlighting down one line. If the
highlighting is at the bottom of the
window, the window rolls forward one
line if there are arrows on the bottom
border of the window.
2-19
Key
Left Arrow
(+- )
Function
Moves the cursor to the left one
position. If the cursor is in the first
position of an input area, the cursor
moves to the last position of the
previous input area.
If you are paging through transferred
records and there is data to the left of
the window, this key moves the
window to the left one position.
Right Arrow Moves the cursor to the right one
( -+)
position. If the cursor is in the last
position of an input area, the cursor
moves to the first position of the next
input area on the display.
If you are paging through transferred
records and there is data to the right
of the window, this key moves the
window to the right one position.
2-20
Key
Home
Function
When the cursor is in the first
position of an input area, this key
moves the cursor to the first position
of the first input area. If the first
input area is rolled off the top of the
display, this key rolls the display
backward to show the first input area.
When the cursor is not in the first
position of an input area, this key
moves the cursor to the first position
of the input area where the cursor is
located.
If a window is displayed (for example,
when you are paging through
transferred records, help windows, or
list windows), this key rolls the
window backward to the first item,
unless the first item is already on the
display.
2-21
Key
End
Escape
(Esc)
Function
Moves the cursor to the first position
of the last input area. If the last
input area is rolled off the bottom of
the display, the key rolls the display
forward to show the last input area.
If a window is displayed (for example,
when you are paging through
transferred records, help windows, or
list windows), this key rolls the
window forward to the last item, if
the last item is not already on the
display(there are arrows on the
bottom border of the display.)
Ends the current display.
Page Up
(Pg Up)
If a window is displayed, this key
removes the window from the display.
When there are arrows on the top
border of the display, this key rolls
the display backward one page and
places the cursor at the first input
area on that display.
Page Down
(Pg Dn)
If a window is displayed, this key
rolls the window backward one page.
When there are arrows on the bottom
border of the display, this key rolls
the display forward one page and
places the cursor at the first input
area on that display.
If a window is displayed, this key
rolls the window forward one page.
2-22
Key
Insert
Delete
(Del)
Function
This key starts insert mode. The
cursor changes to a blinking
rectangle occupying a full character
position and indicates that you can
insert characters. Each character
inserted moves the following
characters in the field one position to
the right.
This key also ends insert mode (when
the keyboard is already in insert
mode), and changes the cursor to a
blinking rectangle occupying the
bottom half of a character position.
This key deletes the character in the
cursor position. The following
characters in that field are shifted
one position to the left.
2-23
Control Keys
A control key function is performed by pressing
the Control (Ctrl) key in combination with
another key. The following control keys are
supported by PC Support/36:
Control Key
Control
(Ctrl) and
Break
Control
(Ctrl) and
Left Arrow
(+-)
Control
(Ctrl) and
Right Arrow
(~)
Control
(Ctrl) and
End
2-24
Function
This key combination (pressing and
holding the Control key, then
pressing the Break key)
immediately cancels the currently
running program.
When there are arrows on the left
border of the display, this key
combination {pressing and holding
the Control key, then pressing the
Left Arrow key) moves the window
left one page at a time.
When there are arrows on the right
border of the display, this key
combination (pressing and holding
the Control key, then pressing the
Right Arrow key) moves the
window right one page at a time.
This key combination (pressing and
holding the Control key, then
pressing the End key), used in any
input area, replaces the input area
with blanks starting at the cursor
position.
Function Keys
The following function keys are supported by PC
Support/36:
Function Key Function
Displays help text.
Fl
F2
Displays a list.
For the transfer facility, this key
F3
runs a transfer request.
F4
For the transfer facility, presents a
display from which a transfer
request can be saved.
Selects an item from a list.
F9
Inserts an additional input line
FlO
when the cursor is located on the
FROM, SELECT, WHERE, JOIN
BY, or ORDER BY input line of a
System/36-to-personal computer
transfer request. This key is not
valid for a personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer
request.
2-25
A Few Words about Files
Personal Computer Files
A file is a collection of records referenced by a
single name. A file is like a drawer in a file
cabinet that contains folders of information
pertaining to one subject.
For example, a drawer containing information
about customers might be called the Customer
Master File. The drawer might contain one
folder (record) for each customer. Each folder, or
record, would contain the same type of
information, such as name, street, city, state, zip
code, and so forth. Each piece of information
within the record, such as name, is called a field.
Naming Personal Computer Files
Files require a unique identification. This
identification is provided by a file name. The file
name indicates how the computer refers to the
file in storage.
With few exceptions, you can give your personal
computer files any name you want. Your
personal computer diskette file names can be 1 to
8 characters in length, and can be followed by a
file name extension, which is an additional
identifier from 1 to 3 characters in length.
2-26
Valid characters you can use in file names are:
•
The letters A through Z
•
The numbers 0 through 9;
•
The following special characters: $, #, &, @,
!, %, (, ), - (hyphen), , (comma), ' (apostrophe),
_ (underscore), and' (left single quote)
File Name Format
The following shows the format in which
personal computer file names are specified:
[d:] [path]filename[.ext]
where:
d: specifies the drive where the file resides.
Type a letter followed by a colon to specify the
drive. If the drive is not specified, the default
drive is assumed.
path specifies a path of directory names. Type
the directory names, separated by backslashes
(\). The file name should be separated from the
last directory name by a backslash. For example,
\DIRl \DIR2\FILEl. The first backslash is
optional. If used, it tells DOS to begin with the
root directory.
The maximum length of the path is 63 characters.
If the path name is not specified, the current
directory is used.
2-27
filename specifies the name of the file. The file
name can be from 1 to 8 characters .
. ext specifies the file name extension. The
extension consists of a period and up to 3
characters. The extension must immediately
follow the file name. This entry is optional.
For example, the Customer Master File could be
named:
CUSTMAST.MST
where CUSTMAST is the file name and .MST is
the file name extension.
Some PC Support/36 programs automatically
supply a file name extension if you do not specify
one. It is recommended that you use the supplied
extensions, rather than your own.
For more information about naming personal
computer files, refer to the IBM Personal
Computer Disk Operating System manual.
System/36 Files and Libraries
The name of a System/36 file or library can be 1
to 8 characters in length. It must begin with an
alphabetic character (A through Z, #, $, or @),
followed by any combination of characters
(numeric, .alphabetic, and special, except comma
[,], apostrophe ['], and blank).
For more information about System/36 files and
libraries, refer to the IBM System/36 Concepts
and Programmer's Guide.
2-28
PC Support/36 Command Format
PC Support/36 commands must be entered in a
specific format. This format is the same as you
use for the DOS commands. You must follow
that format when you type any of these
commands. The rules to follow are:
•
A word in uppercase letters is a keyword and
must be typed as shown. You can, however,
type any combination of uppercase and
lowercase letters. Lowercase letters are
automatically converted to uppercase.
Note:
Lowercase letters are not automatically
converted to uppercase letters when you
are writing the message text for the
Message command.
•
Items within square brackets ([ ]) are
optional. If you want to include optional
information, you must not type the brackets.
Type only the information inside the
brackets.
•
You must supply any items in lowercase
italics (for example, you should enter the
name of your file when filename is shown in
the format).
•
Any punctuation (for example, a slash [f], a
period [.], or a colon [:D must be typed as
shown.
•
An or symbol (I) means that you can use
either the term on the right or on the left of
the or symbol, but not both.
2-29
For example, for the following command:
[d:]SETVDSK [Ix] [/y]
what you might actually type is:
a:setvdsk Im/s
where:
a is the value substituted for d, setvdsk, the
keyword, is typed as shown, m is the value
substituted for x, and s is the value substituted
for y.
2-30
Using the Correct Display
Attributes
The interactive PC Support/36 programs use
different display attributes, depending on what
monitor adapter card you are using. These
programs check whether you are using a
monochrome or color/graphics adapter card, then
choose the display attributes to use accordingly.
When the wrong display attributes are used, the
display is difficult to read.
The following adapters will all work properly
with PC Support/36:
•
•
•
•
IBM Monochrome Display and Printer
Adapter (MDPA)
Color Graphics Adapter (CGA)
Enhanced Graphics Adapter (EGA)
Professional Graphics Controller (PGC)
If the adapter is determined to be an MDPA or
EGA, PC Support/36 will automatically use high
speed display writing. All other adapters will be
set automatically to slow speed display writing.
However, your adapter and display combination
may be able to handle writing at the higher
speed. You can specify which display writing
speed you want to use by using /H or /S as
described on the following pages.
Note:
If you are using an adapter that is not
listed and you notice that there are random
dashes or snow appearing on your display,
you should specify slow speed display
writing.
2-31
To specify the display attributes, you do the
following:
•
Specifying the type of monitor
Type a /M or /C after the command you
use to start any of the interactive PC
Support/36 programs. Use /M if you are
using a monochrome monitor, or /C if you
are using a color monitor.
•
Specifying the writing speed of the display
Type a /H or /S after the command you
use to start any of the interactive PC
Support/36 programs. Use /H for high
speed display writing, or /S for slow speed
display writing.
Note:
2-32
M or C can be used in combination
with H or S (M, C, H, and S can be
either upper or lower case) when
entering the interactive PC Support/36
program commands.
For example, the following command tells the
SETVDSK program that you are using a
monochrome monitor attached to a
color/graphics adapter card and using slow
speed display writing:
SETVDSK IMIS
•
Use the DSPL parameter in the PC
Support/36 configuration file, CONFIG.S36,
instead of specifying a /M or /C, or a /H or /S
each time you start this program. Refer to
the PC Support/36 Technical Reference for
details.
Note:
If both the DSPL and either the /M, / C,
/H and/or /S parameters are used, the
corresponding DSPL parameter will be
ignored.
It is important to specify the type of monitor you
are using only if you are using a monochrome
monitor attached to a color/graphics adapter
card. (This is typically the case if you are using
the IBM 5155 Portable Personal Computer.) If
you are using a color monitor, you can use the
default (color). If you are using a Monochrome
Display and Printer Adapter card, this parameter
is ignored.
2-33
2-34
Chapter 3. Starting PC
Support/36
Contents
Introduction ......................
Running the PC Support/36 Programs ..
Summary of PC Support/36 Commands .
Virtual Disk Facility Commands .
Shared Folders Facility Commands
Virtual Printer Facility Commands
Transfer Facility Commands ....
Message Facility Commands ....
Miscellaneous PC Support/36
Commands ................
3-2
3-3
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-1
Introduction
Before you try to operate PC Support/36, you
should do the following:
•
Make sure the PC Support/36 programs were
installed on the System/36.
•
Make sure you have a personal computer
diskette containing the installation
procedure.
•
Run the installation procedure to install the
PC Support/36 PC programs on your personal
computer. See the installation chapter in the
PC Support/36 Technical Reference.
•
Find out how to access the PC Support/36
programs you want to use. If you are the
person responsible for installing PC
Support/36, refer to Chapter 1, "Installation"
in the PC Support/36 Technical Reference for
details on how to access the PC Support/a6
programs you require. You can also see your
Personal Computer Technical Coordinator.
If all of the previous conditions are met, you
should be able to use the PC Support/a6
programs you requIre.
3-2
Running the PC Support/36
Programs
You can now start the PC Support/36 program or
programs you wish to use (virtual disk, shared
folders, virtual printer, transfer facility
programs, organizer, Work Station Feature or
message facility). To do this:
1. Do one of the following:
•
If you have installed PC Support/36 on a
personal computer diskette, insert the
diskette in an available diskette drive.
•
If you installed PC Support/36 on your
fixed disk, change the directory to the
directory that contains the LINK36
programs.
2. Mter the DOS prompt, type LINK36. This
does one of the following:
•
If you are using the IBM Token-Ring
Network, LINK36 will:
Start the IBM Token-Ring Network PC
Adapter Support Interface (unless it
has/'already been started by your
AUTOEXEC.BAT)
Start the IBM Token-Ring Network PC
Support/36 Router
Assign the PC Support/36 program
virtual disk (#IWPCLD2) to drive I
3-3
•
If you are using one of the 5250 emulation
programs, LINK36 will:
Start the desired 5250 emulation
program (unless it has already been
started by your AUTOEXEC.BAT, or
your diskette does not contain the
Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program)
Start the 5250 Emulation PC
Support/36 Router
Assign the PC Support/36 program
virtual disk (#IWPCLD2) to drive I
For a summary of the commands and their
formats you can use the PC Support/36 Quick
Reference Card. For details on which command
to enter and the format of that command, refer to
the appropriate section of this manual. For
example, if you want to start the virtual disk
facility, refer to Chapter 5, "Using the PC
Support/36 Virtual Disk Facility."
3-4
Summary of PC Support/36
Commands
Virtual Disk Facility Commands
The following table shows the commands used
when operating the virtual disk facility. For
detailed information on these commands, refer to
Chapter 5, "Using the PC Support/36 Virtual
Disk Facility."
Command
SETVDSK
CFGVDSK
ISETVDSK
Purpose
Starts the interactive virtual disk
facility.
Starts the automatic virtual disk
facility.
Starts the router and the interactive
virtual disk facility.
3-5
Shared Folders Facility Commands
The following table shows the commands used
when operating the shared folders facility. For
detailed information on these commands, refer to
Chapter 6, "Using the PC Support/36 Shared
Folders Facility."
Command
FSPC [function]
HELP
FSPC ASSIGN [d:]
FSPC ASSIGN [d:]
path
FSPC ASSIGN [d:]
[path] / /System/36
name
FSPC RELEASE d:
FSPC RELEASE
FSPC [STATUS]
----',~
3-6
*
Purpose
Displays help text for the
FSPC command or function
(ASSIGN, RELEASE, or
STATUS), if specified.
Assigns a system drive to the
System/36.
Assigns a directory drive to
a shared folder or
subdirectory on the
System/36.
Assigns a system drive or
directory drive to the
System/36 specified.
Releases a system drive or a
directory drive assigned to
the System/36.
Releases all shared folder
drives assigned to the
System/36.
Displays the status of drives
·-'l'n~ llv slutred folders.
Virtual Printer Facility Commands
The following table shows the commands used
when operating the virtual printer facility. For
detailed information on these commands, refer to
Chapter 7, "Using the PC Support/36 Virtual
Printer Facility."
Command
VPRT
SETVPRT
CFGVPRT
ISETVPRT
Purpose
Loads the resident portion of the virtual
printer facility.
Starts the interactive virtual printer
facility.
Starts the automatic virtual printer
facility.
Starts the router and the interactive
virtual printer facility.
3-7
Transfer Facility Commands
The following table shows the commands used
when operating the transfer facility. For
detailed information on these commands, refer to
Chapter 9, "Transferring Data from the
System/36 to the Personal Computer" or
Chapter 10, "Transferring Data from the
Personal Computer to the System/36."
Purpose
Starts the resident source transfer
facility.
TOPC
Starts the router, STF, and the
interactive System/36-to-PC transfer
facility.
RTOPC
Starts the interactive System/36-to-PC
transfer facility, as long as it's not the
first time (see TOPC).
TOPCB
Starts the router, STF, and the
automatic System/36-to-PC transfer
facility.
RTOPCB
Starts the automatic System/36-to-PC
transfer facility, as long as it's not the
first time (see TOPCB).
FROMPC
Starts the router, STF, and the
interactive PC-to-System/36 transfer
facility.
RFROMPC Starts the interactive PC-to-System/36
transfer facility, as long as it's not the
first time (see FROMPC).
FROMPCB Starts the router, STF, and the
automatic PC-to-System/36 transfer
facility.
RFROMPCB Starts the automatic PC-to-System/36
transfer facility, as long as it's not the
first time (see FROMPCB).
Command
STF
3-8
~
Message Facility Commands
The following commands are used when
operating the message facility. For more detailed
information, refer to Chapter 11, "Using the PC
Support/36 Message Facility."
Command
STARTMSG
STOPMSG
MSG
RCVMSG
Purpose
Starts the message facility.
Stops the message facility.
Displays the message facility menu.
Sends and receives messages.
Stores messages in a specified file.
3-9
Miscellaneous PC Support/36
Commands
The following table shows the commands used for
miscellaneous PC Support/36 operations. For
detailed information on these commands, refer to
the PC Support/36 Technical Reference.
Command
LINK36
STARTRTR
STARTRTR
/D
STOPRTR
Purpose
Starts communication to the System/36
and assigns the PC program virtual disk
to drive I.
Starts the PC router and changes the
default connection environments.
Displays status of active connections.
Ends the PC router, inactivating PC
Support/36.
STARTMNU Starts the router, assigns a system drive
to the System/36, and displays the
Organizer menu on the System/36.
PCO
Displays the Organizer menu on the
System/36 again, after the first time it is
displayed using STARTMNU.
3-10
Command
PCU
Purpose
Starts the PC utility program. (This is a
System/36 command; it must be issued
from a System/36 session screen.) This
command:
•
Allows you to work with shared
folders and documents.
•
Copies the entire contents of a
virtual disk to a shared folder.
•
Copies a virtual disk file to another
virtual disk, System/36 file,
System/36 library member, or DW /36
document.
•
Copies a System/36 file and library
member to a virtual disk file.
•
Copies a DW /36 document to a
virtual disk file.
•
•
Creates and deletes virtual disks.
Installs 3278 Device Emulation on an
IBM personal computer.
•
TRTABLE
Modifies ASCII-to-EBCDIC and
EBCDIC-to-ASCII translation tables.
Starts the translation table utility.
3-11
Command
COPYVDSK
COPYVPRT
COPYTTO
COPYTFR
COPYMENU
COPYFSPC
COPYMSG
3-12
Purpose
Copies programs necessary to run
virtual disk facility.
Copies programs necessary to run
virtual printer facility.
Copies programs necessary to run
System/36-to-PC transfer facility.
Copies programs necessary to run
PC-to-System/36 transfer facility.
Copies programs necessary to run
PC Support/36 Organizer.
Copies programs necessary to run
,shared folders facility.
Copies programs necessary to run
message facility.
the
the
the
the
the
the
the
Chapter 4. Tutorial
Contents
Introduction ......................
Setting Up PC Support/36 ...........
Using the Virtual Disk Facility .......
Using the Virtual Printer Facility ....
Using the Message Facility .........
Using the Shared Folders Facility ....
Using the Transfer Facility .........
Transferring Data to the Personal
Computer ...................
Transferring Data to the System/36
Using the PC Utility ..............
4-2
4-3
4-7
4-13
4-17
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-30
4-37
4-1
Introduction
This chapter contains examples of how you might
use PC Support/36. You can use this chapter to
practice using PC Support/36, or as a guide when
you are using PC Support/36.
You are not required to follow all of the
examples in this chapter. You can choose those
best sui ted to your needs, and ignore the others.
The examples in this chapter assume that the PC
Support/36 LINK36 programs were installed on a
personal computer diskette or fixed disk for your
use.
If you do not have a personal computer diskette
or fixed disk containing the LINK36 support,
contact your Personal Computer Technical
Coordinator. If you are responsible for the
installation, refer to Chapter 1, "Installation" in
the PC Support/36 Technical Reference for
instructions.
The PC Support/36 programs you require may
have been copied from the System/36 to one or
more personal computer diskettes or a fixed disk.
If this is the case, you can skip the first section,
"Setting Up PC Support/36," and continv.e with
any of the examples later in this chapter that
help you learn to use the PC Support/36
programs you require. However, except for
"Using the PC Utility," the examples in this
chapter assume that you are accessing and
running the PC Support/36 programs from the
virtual drive I.
4-2
)
Setting Up PC Support/36
To use PC Support/36, you must establish a link
from your personal computer to the PC
Support/36 programs installed on the System/36.
To do this, you must load DOS then run the
LINK36 support.
The LINK36 support establishes your link, starts
the PC Support/36 router and assigns a virtual
disk, named #IWPCLD2, to your virtual drive I .
.This virtual disk contains all of the PC
Support/36 programs.
You can run .any of the PC Support/36 programs
directly from the I drive, or you can copy these
programs to personal computer diskettes or a
fixed disk. (Refer to Chapter 1, "Installation" in
the PC Support/36 Technical Reference for
instructions on how to copy the PC Support/36
programs.)
4-3
If you have not already done so, load DOS now.
After the DOS prompt, type the following
command and press the Enter key:
LINK36
LINK36 will do one of the following:
•
If you are using 5250 emulation, and you are
not signed on, then the System/36 sign-on
display appears:
Xi
SIGN ON
User ID
•
Optional-*
1 ______ _
Password •
User menu
Library
*
•
Procedure
*
-------- *
Help-Assistance tor sign on
COPYRIGHT 1985 IBM Corporation
S9097301-4
4-4
Sign on the System/36 by typing your user ID
and password (if any) and pressing the Enter
key you chose to use in 5250 emulation mode.
•
If you are using the IBM Token-Ring
Network you will be prompted for your user
ID and password. If password security is not
active on the System/36 you can press the
Enter key without entering a password.
Mter providing your user ID and password the
LINK36 procedure continues.
While the LINK36 support is running, you should
receive a message telling you that the virtual
disk #IWPCLD2 was successfully assigned to
drive I. The default drive is changed to I. When
the LINK36 support runs, it establishes a link
between your personal computer and the
System/36. You are now ready to run any of the
PC Support/36 programs.
If you want, you can display the directory
contents of the virtual disk in drive I. All of the
PC Support/36 programs are contained in this
directory. To do this, type:
DIR
and press the Enter key.
For more details on installing PC Support/36,
refer to Chapter 1, "Installation" in the PC
Support/36 Technical Reference.
4-5
When you want to end the PC Support/36 link
(for example, if you want to do the "Using the
PC Utility" example), you must remember to
release all virtual disks and virtual printers you
have assigned before you power off or restart
your personal computer, and end the PC
Support/36 link. (To release a virtual disk, enter
the SETVDSK command and select option 2. To
release a virtual printer, enter the SETVPRT
command and select option 2, or use the batch
file.)
If you want to do one or more of the examples in
this chapter, do not end the PC Support/36 link
at this time.
To end the PC Support/36 link, type:
STOPRTR
and press the Enter key.
4·6
Using the Virtual Disk Facility
This example shows you how to create a virtual
disk. You will use the interactive virtual disk
facility to assign one of these virtual disks to a
virtual drive.
The virtual disk you create is an example only,
and you should delete it after you complete the
examples in this chapter. You should record the
name of this virtual disk as a reminder. You
must use the interactive virtual disk facility
program to delete virtual disks.
Note:
Whenever you see Fl = Help on the display,
you can press the Fl key to display help
text about that display.
For more details on how to use the virtual disk
facility, refer to Chapter 5, "Using the PC
Support/36 Virtual Disk Facility."
This example assumes you have already started
your personal computer, loaded DOS and ran the
LINK36 support as described in "Setting Up PC
Support/36," earlier in this chapter.
4-7
After the I > prompt, type the following
command and press the Enter key:
SETVDSK
This command starts the interactive virtual disk
facility. The following display should appear:
, . - - - - -_ _ _ _ _ _ SET VIRTUAL DISKS-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-.
DRiVE
DISK NAME
ACCESS LEVEL
SIZE (KB)
DIR SIZE
G
H
I
#IWPCLD2
J
K
. .__________________
L
Read
1390
98
~PTIOm._____________________ .
H
Select one ot these options; press Enter.
1 Assign virtual dislcs
2 Release virtual disks
3 Create a new virtual disk
4 Delete an existing virtual disk
5 Exit
Select ===> 1
'--_E_sc_=_E_xi_t_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ version 04.00 (c)
IBM Corp. 1987
59088460-6
The virtual drive letters shown on your display
may differ.
4-8
The first thing you should do is create a virtual
disk to be used in this example. Type a 3 (Create
a new virtual disk) in the Select area or select
option 3 by using the Down Arrow key to
position the highlighting on option 3. Press the
Enter key. The following display appears:
r - - - - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL DISICS : C R E A T E - - - - - - - - - - - .
DRiVE
DISK NAME
ACCESS LEVEL
SIZE CD)
DIR SIZE
J!'
G
H
I
#IWPCLD2
Read
1380
88
J
K
L
Type in requested intormation, press Enter.
ITEK
CHOICE
Virtual D1Ble Name • •
Dlsk 8i.e • • • • • .
Dlrectory si.e • • •
Optional description
L-380
112
POSSIBLE CHOICES
Virtual disk to create
5-327'815 kilobytes
18-2048 entries
59088671-2
Do the following:
1. Type a name of your choice in the Virtual
disk name input area. This name must be 1
through 8 characters long, beginning with A
through Z, #, $, or @. The remaining
characters can be A through Z, 0 through 9,
or the characters #, $, @, and period (.), for
example:
SMPDK.#5
2. Press the Enter key if the virtual disk name
is 7 characters or less in length.
4-9
3. Leave the default disk size (360) and press the
Enter key.
4. Leave the directory size at the default value
(112) and press the Enter key.
5. Type a short description of your choice for
the virtual disk in the Optional description
input area. For example, you might type
Virtual disk created for sample. Press the
Enter key.
6. When you have completed the prompts on this
display, press the Enter key. You should
receive a message telling you that the virtual
disk was created.
You can now create another virtual disk, if you
wish.
4-10
Once you have created a virtual disk, you must
assign it to a virtual drive in order to use it. To
assign the virtual disk you created, do the
following:
1. Press the Escape key to return to the
OPTIONS menu.
2. Leave the default option (option 1, Assign
virtual disks), and press the Enter key.
The following display appears:
. - - - - - - - - - SET VIRTUAL DISKS : A S S I G N - - - - - - - - - - - ,
DISK NAME
DRiVE
SIZE (KBI
ACCESS LEVEL
DIR SIZE
P
G
H
I
J
#IWPCLD2
Read
1390
98
K
L
Type in requested information; press Enter.
ITEM
Dri ve letter
• • • • •
CHOICE
POSSIBLE CHOICES
I
EPGHI.rKL
Virtual disk name • • •
Access level
F1=Help
•••••
Virtual disk to assign
.1
1=ExclusivlI
3=Read
2=Read/Write
Esc=Exit to Options menu
59088451-2
3. For this example, assign the virtual disk to
the first available drive. The list of letters in
the POSSIBLE CHOICES column on the
display shows the drive letters available for
you to use.
4-11
4. To assign the virtual disk, do the following:
a. In the Drive letter input area, type the
first drive letter listed.
b. In the Virtual disk name input area, type
the name of the first virtual disk you
created. If you cannot remember the
name, you can press the F2 key for a list
of virtual disks. Once the list is displayed
you can use the F9 key to select a virtual
disk.
c. Leave your Access level as 1 (Exclusive).
5. When you have completed all of the prompts
on this display, press the Enter key . You
should receive a message telling you that the
disk was assigned to the specified drive. This
disk is now available for your use as a
personal computer disk.
6. Press the Escape key to return to the
OPTIONS menu. From this menu, you can
also release or delete any virtual disks you
create. When you have completed all of the
examples in this chapter, you should run the
SETVDSK program again, and choose option
2 to release the virtual disks, then option 4 to
delete the example virtual disks you created.
7. To end the SETVDSK program, select option
5 (Exit) on the OPTIONS menu and press the
Enter key, or press the Escape key. This
returns you to the DOS prompt.
4-12
Using the Virtual Printer Facility
This example assumes you have already started
your personal computer, loaded DOS and ran the
LINK36 support as described in "Setting Up PC
Support/36," earlier in this chapter.
This example shows you how to assign a printer
attached to the System/36 as a pp.rsonal computer
printer. In this example, you will practice using
the virtual printer facility by printing the
directory of the diskette in your default drive on
a System/36 printer.
For details on the virtual printer facility, refer to
Chapter 7, "Using the PC Support/36 Virtual
Printer Facility."
Note:
Whenever you see Fl = Help on the display,
you can press the Fl key to display help
text about that display.
4-13
1. To start the virtual printer facility, type the
following commands after the DOS prompt,
pressing the Enter key after each command:
VPRT
SETVPRT
This causes the following display to appear:
r - - - - - - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL P R I N T E R - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
Current Configuration
Syatem/38 printer ID
Printer type
Characters per line
Lines per inch
Page length
Lines per page
. .____________________
Number of copies
OPTIOI~________________________•
Select one of these options; press Enter.
1 Assign or change virtual printers
2 Release virtual printers
3 Close or view print file status
4 Advanced Options
5 Exit
Select ===> .1
Esc=Exit
'--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-"-_Version 04.00 (c) IBK Corp. 1987
89088707·4
4-14
2. Type or select option 1 (Assign or change
virtual printers) on the OPTIONS menu, and
press the Enter key. The following display
appears:
,...-_ _ _ _ _ SET VIRTUAL PRINTER: ASSIGN/CHANGE _ _ _ _ _ _ _---.
CUrrent Contisuration
Syateml38 printer ID
Printer t~e
Characters per line
Lines per inch
Pase lencth
Lines per pase
Number at copies
~e
in requested intormation) press Enter.
CHOICE
ITEM
PC printer • • • • • •
Syateml38 printer • • •
Characters per line •
Lines per inch • • • •
Page length
Lines per pase • • • •
Number at copi es • • •
F1=Help
~
POSSIBLE CHOICES
1=LPT1
2=LPT2
3=LPT3
Syateml38 printer ID
80
8
80. 132. 198
8. 8 linea
-88
8s
1
1-127 l1nes
1- Page lencth
1-255 copies
Esc=Exit to Options
59088452·0
3. Do the following:
a. Type a 2 for printer LPT2 in the PC
printer input area.
h. Press the F2 key to list the System/36
printers available for you to use. Select
any printer from the list, using the Up
Arrow and Down Arrow keys to highlight
the printer you want and press the F9 key.
Press the Enter key.
4-15
c. Leave the default values for the remaining
prompts on this display and press the End
key. This takes you to the last prompt on
the display.
d. Press the Enter key. The values for the
printer you just assigned as a virtual
printer are now displayed, and a message
is displayed, telling you that LPT2 was
assigned.
4. Now that you have assigned a virtual printer,
press the Escape key to return to the
OPTIONS menu, then press the Escape key
again (or select option 5) to end the virtual
printer facility.
5. To test the virtual printer, create a small
virtual print file to print. You can do this by
typing the following:
DIR >LPT2
6. Press the Enter key. The directory of the
diskette in the default drive is printed on the
virtual printer assigned as LPT2.
4-16
Using the Message Facility
This example shows you how to send a message.
You will use the interactive message facility.
This example assumes that you are connected to
an IBM Token-Ring Network and have started
your personal computer (loaded DOS and ran
LINK36 as described in "Setting Up PC
Support/36," earlier in this chapter).
To set up the message facility with the default
entries type:
STARTMSG
Since you have not specified a configuration file,
the message facility defaults will be used.
To send the message, type:
MSG
and then press the Enter key.
4-17
The Message Facility Main Menu appears:
, . - - - - - - - - - - H E S S A G E FACILITY MAIN H E N U - - - - - - - - - - . ,
SYS TEHI 38
S58
RECEIVE HODE
STATUS
Notify
Keasage Waiting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPTI~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
Select one
o~
these options; preas Enter.
1 Send a message
2: Display messages
3 Exit
Select ===> 1
Esc-Exit
S9097908-2
Select option 1 (Send a message).
4-18
The Send a Message display appears.
, -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ SEND A K E S S A G E - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
SYSTEKI38
S58
RECEIVE KODE
Notify
STATUS
Kessage 1Jai tins
Type in the requested intormationJ press Enter.
CHOICE
ITEM
Destination name • •
Destination address
POSSIBLE CHOICES
User ID~ Display ID~
PC Location~ Group~ ALL~
blank = System Console
User address
Kessage text • • • •
F1-Help
Esc=Exit to Options Kenu
59097910-3
Enter your User ID on the line after the
Destination name parameter and press the Enter
key. This moves the cursor to the next input
field.
Press the Enter key again (you will not use the
Destination address field on this example). This
moves the cursor to the next input field.
On the Message text line, enter: This is a test
message. Press the Enter key.
Note:
Message text cannot exceed 75 characters.
4-19
The following message appears on the display:
Message successfully sent.
Note:
This means that the System/36 has received
the message, not that the destination has
received the message.
As you are in notify mode, you will hear an
audible alarm (it may take up to a minute for the
alarm to sound). Press the Escape key to return
to the OPTIONS menu.
Select option 2, (Display messages).
The Display Message display appears showing
your test message. Press the Escape key to
return to the OPTIONS menu.
Select option 3, (Exit the message facility).
For more detail refer to Chapter 11, "Using the
PC Support/36 Message Facility."
4-20
Using the Shared Folders Facility
This example shows you how to assign a drive,
display status of personal computer drives, and
release drives used to access shared folders.
For more details on how to use the shared folders
facility, refer to Chapter 6, "Using the PC
Support/36 Shared Folders Facility."
This example assumes you have already started
your personal computer, loaded DOS, and ran the
LINK36 support as described in this chapter, in
"Setting Up PC Support/36."
When you type the following command, it assigns
drive L to the folder named DEPT42 and the
subdirectory REPORTS.
FSPC ASSIGN L: jDEPT42jREPORTS
Press the Enter key.
To display the status of all drives used to access
shared folders on the System/36, type the
following command.
FSPC STATUS
Press the Enter key.
Note:
If you do not specify a parameter on this
command STATUS is the default. For
example, you could have typed FSPC with
no parameter and you would display the
status of all the drives used to access
shared folders.
4-21
To release drive L that is assigned to the
System/36, type the following command.
FSPC RELEASE L:
Now if you type FSPC, drive L will not appear
on the status display.
U sing the Transfer Facility
This example assumes you have already started
your personal computer, loaded DOS and ran the
LINK36 support as described previously, in
"Setting Up PC Support/36."
For the transfer facility example, you can use a
System/36 file, named CUSTCDT that contains
information about customer accounts. If security
is active you should get read access to the file.
The file is defined by IDDU data definitions, and
is installed on the System/36 when the IDDU
online information is installed. You can find out
from your system operator if this information
was installed.
For details on the transfer facility, refer to
Chapter 8, "Using the PC Support/36 Transfer
Facility," Chapter 9, "Transferring Data from
the System/36 to the Personal Computer," and
Chapter 10, "Transferring Data from the
Personal Computer to the System/36."
Note:
4-22
Whenever you see Fl = Help on the display,
you can press the Fl key to display help
text about that display.
Transferring Data to the Personal
Computer
This example shows you how to transfer data
from a System/36 file to a file on your personal
computer. The System/36 file you will be using
in this example is already created and defined
using IDDU data definitions.
To transfer data from the System/36 to the
personal computer, you must use the
System/36-to-personal computer transfer facility.
1. To start, type the following command after
the I> prompt and press the Enter key:
Tope
The following display appears:
-- ----_.....------ -- -----.. - . . -...
.-
~
~
-~~
PC SUpport/38
Syateml38 - to - Personal Computer Transfer Faci11 ty
. . ._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
'O:PTIOI~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . . .
Select one of these optionaJ press Enter.
1 Create a transfer request
5 Recall a transfer request
8 Exit S/38-to-PC Transfer Facility
Select ===>
.!
' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - V e r s i o n 04.00 (c)
IBM Corp. 1987
89088601·5
4-23
2. Type or select option 1 on the OPTIONS
menu and press the Enter key. The following
display appears:
, - - - - - - - - - - - S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER : C R E A T E - - - - - - - - - - ,
S/38 lileCs) Dr library member name
Fmm
F1=Help
.~
____________- +________________
F2=List
F3=Run
F4=Save
F10=New Line
Esc=Options
59088667-2
3. Type the following System/36 file name after
the FROM prompt, and press the Enter key.
CUSTCDT
4. The SELECT prompt appears. The SELECT
prompt input area automatically contains an
asterisk (*). The asterisk is the default, and
means that you want to select all fields in the
file. Press the F2 key to list all of the fields
in the CUSTCDT file.
4-24
The following display appears:
. - - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - - - ,
F~
~~~e~i~~D~T--S~(~.-s-e~le-c~ts-a~ll~fi~e~l~~)------------
SEUCT
~.
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
. ._ _ _ _ _ _ _·tLTIST FOR SELECT_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- .
TYPE
LENGTH
DIGITS
DECIMALS
---0
INIT
STREET
CITY
STATE
ZIPCOD
CDTLKT
OHGCOD
BAI..DUE
CDTDtJE
C
C
C
C
C
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
8
3
13
8
0
0
0
0
0
5
4
i
8
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
FS-5elect
t," =Scroll
FIELD
CUSNiJM - Z - - 8 - - 8
LSTNAH
2
5
4
i
8
8
- --------------- - --------- - -
P1-Help
F3=Run
..
.
- -- ----- -- --- ----------- - ----- ------- - .
Ctrl_I_=Page
F4"'Save
.
TEXT
Customer number field
Last name field
First and middle initial field ..
Street address field
City field
State abbreviation field
Zip code field
Credit 11111it field
Charge code field
Balance due field
Credit due field
-
-
Esc-Exit List
-
Fl0=Mew Line
59088608-1
5. The CUSNUM field is highlighted. Press the
F9 key to select this field. You can now
position the highlighting to any other fields
you want to select; press the F9 key to select
each one. The fields you select are those you
want transferred to your personal computer.
6. When you press the Enter key, the WHERE
prompt appears. Type the following
information on the WHERE prompt line and
press the Enter key:
CUSNUM > 500000
4-25
7. This WHERE prompt limits the customer
records transferred to those with customer
numbers greater than 500000.
The following display appears:
/ ' " . - r - - - - - - - S / 3 S - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E : - - - - - - - - - - ,
FROM
CUSTCDT
SELECT
CUSNUH# LSTNAM# INI T # STREET # CITY #STATE# ZIPCOD
WHERE
CUSNUH> 50 00 00
Fieldnames to sort by (optional)
O~ER~
Fl"'Help
.~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _
F2"'List
F3"'Rtm
F4"'Save
Fl0"'New Line
Esc"'Options
59088673-1
8. Type CUSNUM on the ORDER BY prompt
line and press the Enter key. This causes the
records to be sorted by customer number in
ascending order.
4-26
9. On the next series of prompts, do the
following:
a. Type a 3 (Disk) for the Output device
prompt and press the Enter key.
h. Type A:CUFILE.S36 for the TO PC
filename prompt and press the Enter key.
Note:
This assumes you have a diskette in
drive A to receive the transferred
data. If you want the data to be
transferred to another diskette or
fixed disk drive, specify that drive
letter instead of A.
c. Leave the default of 2 (No) for the Replace
old file prompt and press the Enter key.
d. Type a 2 (to select a file type of DOS
random) for the PC file type prompt and
press the Enter key.
e. Leave the default of 3 (No) for the Show
format of transferred data prompt and
press the Enter key.
f.
Leave the default of 1 (Yes) for the PC file
description prompt and press the Enter
key.
g. Leave the default name, A:CUFILE.FDF,
in the PC file description name prompt.
Note:
The file description file
(A:CUFILE.FDF) you create in this
example will be used to transfer data to
the System/36 in the next example.
4-27
The following. display shows the options you
selected:
t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t
O~ERBY
=~~s=mm~
ITEM
OUtput device
____________________________________
CHOICE
••••
~
POSSIBLE CHOICES
l=Display 2=Printer
3=Disk
TO PC til ename • •
A:CUFlLE.S38
Replace old fUe? • • ~
PC filename
PC file
~
l=ASCII text
3=BASIC sequential
5=DIF( TM)
•
~
l=Yes(Display)
•
.!
1 =Yes (for PC-to-S/38 transfer)
t~e
•••••
Show format of
transferred data?
PC tile description
name • • • •
A:CUFlLE.FDF
Fl=Help
F3=Run
F4=Save
l=Yes
Z-No
2=DOS randDm
4=BASIC random
8=No conversion
2=Yes(Print)
3=No
2=No
EBc=Options
59088672-1
10. You can now press the Enter key to return to
the OPTIONS menu and select option 3 to run
the transfer request, or press the F3 key to
run the transfer request without returning to
the OPTIONS menu.
The selected data should be transferred from
the System/a6 file named CUSTCDT, and
stored in file A:CUFILE.S36 on a personal
computer diskette.
4-28
11. When the data is transferred, a status window
shows the number of records that were
transferred. Press the Escape key to return
to the OPTIONS menu.
12. If you want, you can select option 2 on the
OPTIONS menu and modify the transfer
request (for example, to transfer different
data or display the data rather than write it
to a diskette), then run the transfer request
again.
13. Type or select option 6 in the OPTIONS
menu, and press the Enter key to end the
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility.
4-29
Transferring Data to the System/36
This section shows you how to transfer data from
the personal computer to the System/a6. It uses
the data you previously transferred in
"Transferring Data to the Personal Computer,"
and assumes that you have completed that
portion of the example.
When transferring data to the System/a6, the
System/a6 file must already be created and linked
to a file definition in a data dictionary. To
create a System/a6 file to be used in this
example, do the following:
If you are using 5250 emulation:
1. Use the hot key sequence to enter 5250
emulation mode. The following PC
Support/a6 Router Hot Key Menu appears:
. . . - - - - - - - PC Support/38 Router : Hot Key Menu - - - - - _
The PC Support/38 Router has control at this elllUlation
session. The hot key sequence is not allowed tram this
session unless this screen is visible •
...---------oPTIONS:---------..
Hot Key to leave this session
or
Select one at the tollowing:
1 Display Systeml-38 Inquiry Options Menu
2 Enter Systeml38 Console Mode
Select ===> _
59097906-1
4-30
2. Select option 1 to interrupt the System/36
router and enter Inquiry mode on the
System/36.
3. Select option 1 from the Inquiry options
menu to display the System/36 command
display. Press the emulated Enter key
(usually the caps lock key). Then type the
following on this display:
BLDFILE TEMPCDT,S,RECORDS,12,60"T",NDFILE"O
4. Press the emulated Enter key. This
command creates an empty file named
TEMPCDT on the System/36, with space
for twelve 60-byte records.
5. When the System/36 command display
reappears, type the following command to
link the file TEMPCDT to the #IDDUSMP
dictionary:
IDDULINK LINK,TEMPCDT,#IDDUSMP,CUSTCDT
6. Press the emulated Enter key.
7. Press the emulated Command key 1
(usually the F2 key and the 1 key) to end
the System/36 command display and
restart the System/36 router. The PC
Support/36 Router display appears again.
8. Use the hot key sequence to return to
personal computer mode.
4-31
If you are using the IBM Token-Ring
Network, locate a personal computer that has
a type of 5250 emulation.
1. Sign on the System/36 by entering your
user ID and password (if needed) and press
fueEn~rk~.
2. From the System/36 command display
type:
BLDFILE TEMPCDT,S,RECORDS,12,60"T",NDFILE"O
Press the emulated Enter key. This
command creates an empty file named
TEMPCDT on the System/36, with space
for twelve 60-byte records.
3. When the System/36 command display
reappears, type the following command to
link the file TEMPCDT to the #IDDUSMP
dictionary:
IDDULINK LINK,TEMPCDT,#IDDUSMP,CUSTCDT
4. Press the emulated Enter key.
5. Sign off the System/36.
Now do the following:
1. After the I > prompt, type the following
command and press the Enter key:
FROMPC
2. This starts the personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility.
4-32
~
The following display appears:
....
--- ---- --.....,----_
-.
-.
~
.-
- . ..-
-..,...
PC Support/38
Personal Computer - to - System/38 Transter Facility
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ."OPTIOINQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Select one 01' these optionaJ pres. Enter.
1 Create a transter request
5
Recall a transter request
8 Exit PC-to-S/36 Transter Facility
Select -=> .J.
' - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Version 04.00 (c) IBM Corp. 1987
89088637-5
3. Select option 1, then press the Enter key.
The following display appears:
Fl=Help
.
~
. . . - - - - - - - - - - - P C - T O - S / 3 8 TRANSFER: CREAT'J!----------,
S/36
library
member
name
TO
_ _:t11e
_ _or
__
___
___
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
F2=Llst
F3=Run
F4=Save
Esc=Optlons Menu
89088638-1
4-33
4. After the TO prompt, type the following
System/36 file name and press the Enter key.
TEMPCDT
Notes:
a. The System/36 file must have already been
created and linked to a file definition before
the data can be transferred to the file. You
did this earlier in this example.
b. If the System/36 file contains any data, it
will be replaced by the file you will be
transferring. Make sure you use a
System/36 file designated for this use.
5. On the next series of prompts, type the
following options:
a. Type A:CUFILE.S36 as the FROM PC file
name and press the Enter key.
h. Type a 1 (Yes) for the Transfer data using
PC file description prompt and press the
Enter key.
c. Do not change the default for the personal
computer file description name
(A:CUFILE.FDF).
4-34
I
The following display shows the options you
selected:
r - - - - - - - - - P C - T O - S / 3 6 TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - - - - ,
TO
~T!=~~~~T
FROM PC til ename
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
•
PC tilename
A:CUP'ILE.S38
Transfer data uai:n,g
PC tile description? •
!.
PC tile description
name • • • • • • •
A:CUP'ILE.FDF
Fl=Help
F2=List
F3=Run
l=Yes
2=No
PC tilename
F4=Save
Esc=Options Menu
59088674-1
6. You can now press the Enter key to return to
the OPTIONS menu and select option 3 to run
the transfer request, or press the F3 key to
run the transfer request without returning to
the OPTIONS menu.
The data should be transferred from the personal
computer file to the System/36 file, TEMPCDT.
4-35
7. When the data is transferred, a status window
shows the number of records that were
transferred. Press the Escape key to return
to the OPTIONS menu.
8. If you want, you can select option 2 on the
OPTIONS menu and modify the transfer
request (for example, to transfer different
data), then run the transfer request again.
9. Select option 6 on the OPTIONS menu, and
press the Enter key to end the personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility.
Note:
4-36
After you have completed the examples in
this chapter, you may want to go back and
delete file TEMPCDT from your
System/36.
Using the PC Utility
This example shows you how to use the
System/36 PC utility to work with virtual disks
and diskettes on the System/36. In this example,
you will transfer data from a System/36 file to a
virtual disk. This chapter assumes you created a
virtual disk in the example "Using the Virtual
Disk Facility," earlier in this chapter.
You can use the PC utility from a personal
computer in 5250 emulation mode, or any
System/36 display station.
If you were previously using one of the PC
Support/36 programs, you should release any
virtual disks (SETVDSK), virtual printers
(SETVPRT) or shared folder drives you assigned.
Note:
You do not need to start PC Support/36
and establish a link to the virtual disk on
the System/36 to be able to use the PC
utility. It can be used like any other
System/36 procedure.
4-37
For details on using the PC utility, refer to
Chapter 10, "System/36 PC Utility," in the PC
Support/36 Technical Reference.
1. If you have not already done so, sign on the
System/36 by typing your user identification
and password (if any) on the System/36
sign-on display:
Xi
SIGN ON
Optional-*
1 ______ _
User ID
Password • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
User menu
Library
Procedure
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
*
*
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•• • • • • • • • • • • ••
________
*
Help-Assistance tor sign on
COPYRIGHT 1985 IBM Corporation
S9097301-4
2. Press the Enter key.
3. To start the PC utility, type the following
command on the System/36 command line:
PCU
and press the Enter key.
4-38
The following display appears:
PCKENU
Work with IBM Personal ColD.puters
Select one ot the tollowing:
1. Work with shared tolder utilities
2. Work with IBM PC virtual disk utilities
3. Install 3278 Device Emulation on an IBM PC
CIDd3- Previ OUB manu
CIIIdl5-Kain help m.enu
ClD47-End
Hom.e-Sisn on m.enu
Rea¢y tor option number or command
59097801·2
4. Choose option 2. The following display
appears:
WORK WITH IBM PC VIRTUAL DISK UTILITIES
T)ope clloice. press Enter.
1)
2)
Create a virtual disk
Delete a virtual disk
3)
Copy a virtual disk tile to another virtual disk
4)
6)
Copy a virtual disk tile to a S/38 tile
Copy a S/38 tile to a virtual disk tile
8)
7)
Copy a virtual disk tile to a S/38 library lD.elllber
Copy a S/38 library lD.elllber to a virtual disk tile
8)
9)
Copy a virtual disk tile to a OW/38 docUlD.l!lnt
Copy a OW/38 document to a virtual disk tile
Option:
Cllld7-End
I
(c) Copyright 18K Corp 1987
S9097101·3
4-39
5. To begin, select option 5 (Copy a S/36 file to a
virtual disk file), and press the Enter key~,
6. On the next series of displays, do the
following:
a. Type the name of the file you want to
copy to a virtual disk file (the TEMPCDT
file you created in "Transferring Data to
the Personal Computer," earlier in this
chapter, is suggested). Press the Tab key.
b. Type a file name and extension for the
virtual disk file (TEMPCDT .XMP is
suggested). Press the Tab key.
4-40
c. Type the name of an existing virtual disk
(SMPD K.#5, or the virtual disk you
created in the example "Using the Virtual
Disk Facility," earlier in this chapter, IS
recommended). Press the Tab key.
d. Leave the default values for the remaining
prompts.
The following display shows the options you
selected:
COPY S/38 FILE TO PC FILE
TYPe chOices. preas Enter.
ITEM
CHOICE
Systeml38 Input
File name • • • • • • • •
TEMPCDT_
Personal Computer OIltput
FUe name and extension.
Dillle or diskette name • • ••
SUbdirectory (access path).
POSSIBLE CHOICES
• TEMPCDT.XMP_
• SMPDK.#5
Blank tor list
Replace existill8 tUe • • • • • • 2
Mark til e as Read only. • • • • • 2
OIltput disk accesa leval. • •
• 1
Translate trom EBCDIC to ACSI I. . • 1
Stop on a translation error • • • 2
Error replacement character •
Cmd3-Go back
10
11-18
l=Yes
l=Yes
l=Exclual va
2=No
2=No
2=Share
1=Yes
l=Yea
2=No
2=No
A:ny character
Cmd7-End
SA
I<S
1M
II
S9088675·2
4-41
7. Press the Enter key.
8. After the copy is complete, press command
key 3 to end this function. You can now use
any of the other functions provided by the PC
utility by selecting any other option on the
display.
9. If you are finished using the PC utility, press
command key 7.
4-42
Chapter 5. U sing the PC
Support/36 Virtual Disk Facility
Contents
Introduction ......................
Installing the Virtual Disk Facility ....
Setting Up the CONFIG.SYS File ...
Processing the CONFIG.SYS File
Assigning Disk Drives ...........
The Virtual Disk Facility Programs ....
Running the Interactive Virtual Disk
Facility ......................
Creating a Virtual Disk .......
Assigning a Virtual Disk ......
Releasing Virtual Disk Drives ..
Deleting Virtual Disks or
Diskettes .................
Running the Automatic Virtual Disk
Facility .....................
Virtual Disk Considerations ........
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-12
5-15
5-20
5-21
5-24
5-29
\
5-1
Introduction
PC Support/36 allows you to use storage on the
System/36 by assigning one or more virtual disks
to virtual disk drives. A PC Support/36 virtual
disk is permanent storage on the System/36 that
you access the same way you access diskette or
fixed disk storage on your personal computer.
Data on a virtual disk is not lost when you
power off your personal computer.
~
~
Assigning a virtual disk is similar to inserting a
diskette in a designated diskette drive. The
difference is that you do not have to physically
handle the virtu~l disk - PC Support/36 handles
the virtual disk. 1
Virtual disks arJ accessed through virtual disk
drives. These drives are created by installing the
virtual disk device driver, VDSK.SYS, when you
power on or restart your personal computer.
This is done using a DEVICE entry in the
personal computer configuration file
(CONFIG.SYS). If you have used the INSTALL
command to create the LINK36 support and run
the LINK36 command to access the PC
Support/36 programs through the virtual I drive,
a CONFIG.SYS file has already been set up for
you.
If a CONFIG.SYS file already existed, the
INSTALL command will add any necessary
entries not found in the file. For more
information, refer to "Setting Up the
CONFIG.SYS File," later in this chapter.
5-2
f1
\~
You can create as many virtual disks as you
want on the System/36. However, you can assign
virtual disks to only eight virtual disk drives at
one time. Each virtual disk can be any size from
5K bytes to 32M bytes, in increments of 5K bytes.
Note:
Virtual diskettes created by the System/36
File Support Utility PRPQ can b~ used by
PC Support/36. However, virtual disks
created using PC Support/36 cannot be
accessed by the File Support Utility.
Installing the Virtual Disk
Facility
A configuration file contains configuration
commands. Each time you load DOS, DOS
searches the root directory of the drive from
which it was started for the configuration file
named CONFIG.SYS. If the CONFIG.SYS file is
found, DOS reads the file and interprets the
commands within the file. If the CONFIG.SYS
file is not found, DOS assigns default values for
the configuration commands.
Before you can use a virtual disk, you must have
a DEVICE entry for the virtual disk facility.
When the PC Support/36 link code is copied to
your personal computer diskette or fixed disk
during installation of the personal computer
portion of PC Support/36, a CONFIG.SYS file is
automatically set up for you with the
DEVICE = VDSK.SYS entry added.
5-3
The CONFIG.SYS file may have been created by
the INSTALL command. If a CONFIG.SYS file
already existed, the INSTALL command will add
any necessary entries not found in the file. For
more information, refer to Chapter 1,
"Installation," in the PC Support/36 Technical
Reference. However, if you do not have a
CONFIG.SYS file, you must create one before
you can use the PC Support/36 virtual disk
facility.
Setting Up the CONFIG.SYS File
To use the virtual disk facility, you must have a
CONFIG.SYS file containing a DEVICE entry.
To create a CONFIG.SYS file, type the following:
COpy CON CONFIG.SYS
To add the DEVICE entry to an existing
CONFIG.SYS file, type:
COPY CONFIG.SYS+CON CONFIG.SYS
The COPY commands tell DOS to copy the
information into the CONFIG.SYS file on the
default drive.
Press the Enter key and type the following:
DEVICE = [d:] [path]VDSK.SYS [n]
where:
d: specifies the disk or diskette drive. Type a
letter followed by a colon to specify the drive.
The drive is required only if VDSK.SYS is not in
the default drive from which DOS was loaded.
5-4
path specifies a path of directory names. Type
the directory names separated by backslashes (\).
The path information is required only if
VDSK.SYS is not in the same directory as
CONFIG.SYS.
VDSK.SYS specifies the name of the personal
computer file containing the device driver
program for the virtual disk facility.
n specifies the maximum number of virtual disk
drives you want to use. This can be any number
from one to eight. If you do not type a number,
eight drives are assumed.
When you finish typing the DEVICE entry, press
the Enter key.
You can type any other configuration commands
you want in the CONFIG.SYS file, pressing the
Enter key after each command. Refer to the
IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System
manual for information on other configuration
commands you can enter.
When you finish typing commands, do the
following:
1. Press the F6 key.
2. Press the Enter key again.
This ends the COPY command and saves the file.
You can also use a personal computer editor,
such as EDLIN, to add the entry to your
CONFIG.SYS file.
5-5
Processing the CONFIG.SYS File
The CONFIG.SYS file is processed when DOS is
started. This means that the CONFIG.SYS file
must be in the root directory of the disk or
diskette from which you power on or restart your
personal computer.
Note:
When you add or chang~ any of the
configuration file commands, the changes
are not in effect until the next time you
start DOS.
Assigning Disk Drives
Like all other drives, virtual drives are accessed
by a drive letter. DOS assigns drives starting
with the letter A. These letters are assigned first
to the configured physical drives, then to any
installed device drivers. Therefore, the letters
assigned depend on how many physical drives
there are, and how many DEVICE entries are
ahead of the DEVICE == VDSK.SYS entry in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
For example, assume you have two physical
diskette drives configured and one fixed disk
drive. If you specify that you want a maximum
of five virtual drives (using the parameter n on
the DEVICE command), the letters assigned to
the virtual drives would be D, E, F, G, and H.
5-6
"The Virtual Disk Facility
Programs
After DOS assigns virtual drive letters, you must
set up virtual disks to use with these drives. The
virtual disk facility provides two programs you
can use to do this.
•
The interactive virtual disk facility program,
SETVDSK, which prompts you, step-by-step,
through creating, deleting, assigning, or
releasing virtual disks.
•
The automatic virtual disk facility program,
CFGVDSK, uses entries in the CONFIG.S36
file or a VDSK setup file to assign and
release virtual disks. For details on the
CFGVDSK program, refer to Chapter 4, "The
Virtual Disk Facility" in the PC Support/36
Technical Reference.
Before you can use either of these programs,
DOS and PC Support/36 router must be started.
For information on how to load and run these
programs, refer to Chapter 3, "Starting PC
Support/36." VDSK.SYS must also be installed.
Running the Interactive Virtual Disk
Facility
The interactive virtual disk facility program
prompts you, step-by-step, through creating,
assigning, releasing, or deleting virtual disks.
The command to run this program is SETVDSK.
5-7
SETVDSK
Purpose: This command starts the interactive
virtual disk facility.
Format:
[d:]SETVDSK[/xH/y]
Remarks: d: specifies the name of the disk or
diskette drive, or virtual drive, where
SETVDSK.COM resides. Type a
letter followed by a colon to specify
the drive. (For example, A represents
the first drive, B represents the
second.) The drive is required only if
SETVDSK.COM is not in the default
drive.
Ix specifies the type of display you
are using. This parameter is optional;
it tells the program what attributes to
send to your display. Values you can
specify for x are an uppercase or .
lowercase M or C. For details on
what to specify for this parameter,
refer to Chapter 2, "What You
Should Know before Operating PC
Support/36. "
/y specifies the display writing speed.
This parameter is optional; it tells the
program what speed your display
should write at. Values you can
specify for yare an uppercase or
lowercase H or S. For details on
what to specify for this parameter,
refer to Chapter 2, "What You
Should Know before Operating PC
Support/36. "
5-8
Examples:
The following command starts the interactive
virtual disk facility from the default drive,
without specifying any parameters.
SETVDSK
The following command starts the interactive
virtual disk facility from drive A.
A monochrome display attached to a
Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter card and slow
speed display writing are being used.
A:SETVDSK 1MIS
5-9
When you are ready to start the interactive
virtual disk facility, type the SETVDSK
command and press the Enter key.
If you have not started the router you can use
the ISETVDSK command to start both the router
and the SETVDSK program. The format for both
the ISETVDSK and SETVDSK commands is the
same.
DOS loads the program into storage and a
display appears showing the virtual disk drive
letters, the disks assigned to those drives, their
access level, size in K-bytes (lK byte equals 1024
bytes), and directory size. For example:
SET VIRTUAL DISKS
DISK lIWm
.IllilllE
F
G
H
I
J
l(
ACCf.:SS 1 J:::llEl,.
SIZJ:: (KSl
TESTINFO
CUSTORDl
CUST1087
Read/Write
Exclusive
Read
lllR....S.lZE
32'785
20
380
2048
18
112
HFICTEMP
Exclusive
1040
338
L
M
ITEMINV
Read
535
128
. ._ _ _ _ _ _...._-:>.PTIOINSII_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . .
Select one ot these o~tiO:::~S Enter.
'_·mr4·EF~·'e.
2
3
4
5
Release virtual dislaJ
Create a new virtual disk
Delete an existing virtual disk
Exit
' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - V e r s i o n 04.00 (c)
IBM Corp. 1987
89088401-5
5-10
This display shows that the user has eight
available virtual drives named F through M.
The drives F, G, H, K, and M have virtual disks
assigned to them. Drives I, J, and L do not have
virtual disks assigned to them. This is similar to
a physical diskette drive that has no diskette in
it.
If this is the first time you ran SETVDSK.COM,
the disk name, access level, disk size, and
directory size fields would be blank except for
drive I, which was assigned if the LINK36
command was used.
The OPTIONS menu allows you to assign,
release, create, or delete virtual disks. You can
use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to select
an option, or you can type the option number in
the Select input area and press the Enter key.
While the OPTIONS menu is displayed, you can
end SETVDSK by pressing the Escape key, or by
selecting option 5.
5-11
Creating a Virtual Disk
To create a virtual disk, type a 3 on the
OPTIONS menu and press the Enter key. The
following display appears:
SET VIRTUAL DISI<S : CREATE
DRIVE
-F-
G
H
DISK NAME
TESTINP'O
CUS TORD 1
CUST1087
ACCESS LEVEL
Read/write
Exclusive
Read
SIZE (ICB)
32785
20
380
DIR SIZE
1040
358
535
128
---zo:iir
18
112
I
J
K
L
M
HFKTEKP
Exclusive
ITEMINV
Read
T;ype in requested intormation; press Enter.
ITEM
CHOICE
Virtual disk name • •
Disk size
Directory aize • • •
Optional description
_1_--32.
~
POSSIBLE CHOICES
Virtual disk to create
5-32785 kilobytes
18-2048 entries
S9088402-2
The top portion of this display shows
configuration information for any currently
assigned virtual disks. The bottom portion of the
display contains prompts for the information you
must enter to create a new virtual disk.
5-12
If you do not know what to enter for any of these
prompts, you can get help by pressing the F1 key.
Pressing the Escape key removes the help text
window.
Virtual disk name
You must type a name to identify the virtual
disk. The name must be 1 to 8 characters in
length, and must begin with a letter from A
through Z, #, $, or @. The remaining characters
in the name can be any of the previously listed
characters plus 0 through 9 or period (.). The
name must not include any commas or blanks.
Mter you complete the Virtual disk name
prompt, press the Enter key.
Disk size
This prompt allows you to specify the size you
want the virtual disk to be. You can enter a
number from 5K to 32,765K bytes, in increments
of 5K bytes. (1 K-byte equals 1,024 bytes.) If the
number you enter here is not an increment of
five, the number is automatically rounded to the
next largest increment of five.
When you complete the Disk size prompt, press
the Enter key.
5-13
Directory size
This prompt allows you to specify how many root
directory entries the disk can hold. This number
can be from 16 to 2,048 in increments of 16. If
the number you enter here is not an increment of
16, the number is automatically rounded to the \
next largest increment of 16. When you complete
the Directory size prompt, press the Enter key.
Note:
The default sizes shown on the display for
the Disk size and the Directory size
prompts are the sizes of a double density
5-1/4 inch diskette.
Optional description
This prompt allows you to enter a 40-character
description to help you remember what the
virtual disk contains before you assign or delete
it. This description is displayed when you
request a list of virtual disks to assign or delete.
You are not required to type a description; this
prompt is optional.
When you have completed all of the prompts,
press the Enter key. The system creates the
virtual disk for you. At this time, a message
appears at the bottom of the display indicating
that the system is processing your request.
When the request is complete, you will receive a
message indicating whether or not the create
request was successful.
You can now create another virtual disk or press
the Escape key to return to the OPTIONS menu.
5-14
Assigning a Virtual Disk
After you create a virtual disk, you need to
assign it to a drive letter in order to access it.
(Virtual diskettes created by the File Support
Utility can also be assigned to virtual disk
drives.)
To assign a virtual disk to a drive letter, type a 1
(Assign virtual disks) in the Select input area on
the OPTIONS menu and press the Enter key.
The following display appears:
SET VIRTUAL DISKS : ASSIGN
-,,-
DRIVE
ACCESS LEVEL
Read/Write
ExclWlive
Read
SIZE (n}
32785
20
380
DIR SIZE
1040
338
535
128
H
DISK HAKE
TESTINP'O
CUSTORDl
CUST1087
I
J
K
HFKTEMP
ExclWlive
ITEKINV
Read
G
~
18
112
L
K
TYPe in requested lntormationJ press Enter.
ITEM
Drive letter
• • • • • • •
CHOICE
POSSIBLE CHOICES
~
FGHIJKLK
Virtual disk to assign
Virtual diu name • • • • •
Tour Access level • • • • •
"1-Help
.!
l=ExclWlive
3=Read
2=Read/Write
Esc=Exit to Options menu
89088403·2
The top portion of this display shows the virtual
drives already assigned. The bottom portion of
this display shows prompts for changing the
virtual disk drive assignment.
You can get help text for assigning a virtual disk
or diskette at any time by pressing the· Fl key.
5-15
Drive letter
To assign a virtual disk or diskette, type the
letter of the virtual drive to which you want to
assign the virtual disk or diskette.
Virtual disk name
Next, you must enter the name of a previously
created virtual disk or diskette you want to
assign to this drive. You can assign the same
virtual disk or diskette to more than one drive at
a time.
If you do not know the name of the virtual disk,
you can use the F2 key to get a list of the virtual
disks you can use. This list appears in a window,
temporarily overlaying part of the existing
information on the display, as follows:
r - - - - - - - - - SET
. . ._
VIRTUAL DISKS : ASSIGN - - - - - - - - - - ,
........~-...._!_.IST OF VIRTUAL DIS.xs....._ _ _ _ _ _ _. .
DISK NAME
SIZE eKe)
DESCRIPTION
ITEMINV
1005
Item inventory disk
MGMTTOOL
380
Management tools
DISKNEWS
180
Area news
DEPT201A
535
Dept 201A shared disk
EDUCDISK
32000
Education records
PROJA
545
New project phase A
800
New project phase B
PROJB
PROGDISK
32000
Program disk (owner TLM)
F9=Select
t/~=Scroll
Esc=Exit List
F GH I J KL K
Drive
Virtual disk name • • •
•
Your access level • • • • •
Fl=Help
_1_ _
Virtual disk to assign
1
1=Exclus1ve
3=Read
2=Read/Write
F2=L1st
S9088404·2
5-16
You can limit the virtual disks listed by typing a
partial virtual disk name followed by an asterisk
(*) in the input area and pressing the F2 key.
For example, if you type 8M* in the input area
and press the F2 key, a list of all virtual disks
that begin with 8M will be displayed.
Notes:
1. The F2 key lists only the virtual disks created
using PC Support/36. Virtual diskettes
created using the File Support Utility are not
listed.
2. When System/36 resource security is active, the
F2 key does not list any virtual disks you are
not authorized to read. In addition, System/36
resource security may prevent you from writing
to one or more of the virtual disks listed. For
details on System/36 resource security see the
System Security Guide.
To select a virtual disk from this list, use the Up
Arrow and Down Arrow keys to highlight the
virtual disk you want, and select it by pressing
the F9 key. The disk name is automatically
copied into the Virtual disk name input area, and
the list is removed from the display.
If there are more names than will fit on the
window at one time, you can use the Page Up
and Page Down keys, or the Up Arrow and Down
Arrow keys to display the names. You can also
use the Home key to display the first name in the
list, or the End key to display the last name in
the list.
After you complete the Virtual disk name
prompt, press the Enter key.
5-17
Your access level
This prompt allows you to control what you can
do with the virtual disk, and how you share the
virtual disk with other users. You can enter one
of the following:
•
1 (Exclusive). This means that you can read
and write to the virtual disk, but no other
users, including yourself, can access the
virtual disk as long as you have it assigned.
You can assign the disk at this level only if
no one else has it assigned. No other users
can assign this disk until you release it.
•
2 (Read/Write). This means that you can read
and write to the virtual disk, but other users
can only read the disk. If another user has
the virtual disk assigned with an access level
of Exclusive or Read/Write, you cannot
assign it using an Exclusive or Read/Write
access level. This level of access should be
used with caution.
Note:
5-18
If one user is writing to the virtual disk
(read/write access) and other users are
reading the virtual disk (read access),
changes made by the person writing to
the virtual disk may not be seen by the
users who are reading it. This can
result in the users with read access
receiving incorrect data from the virtual
disk. For details on sharing virtual
disks, refer to Chapter 4, "The Virtual
Disk Facility," in the PC Support/36
Technical Reference.
•
3 (Read). This means that you can read the
virtual disk, but not write to it. Another user
can read and write to it. You would use this
access level if you want to read information
on a particular disk, but not accidentally
change the information. If another user has
the virtual disk assigned with an access level
of Exclusive, you cannot assign it using a
Read access level.
Type a 1, 2, or 3 and press the Enter key. The
SETVDSK program tries to assign the virtual
disk to the virtual drive.
You then receive a message telling you whether
or not the virtual disk or diskette was assigned.
If the virtual disk or diskette was assigned, the
new configuration appears on the top portion of
the display, as follows:
SET VIRTUAL DISKS : ASSIGN
DRIVE
-FG
H
I
J
K
L
M
D1SK S6HE
~Q.CESS
SIZE (ICB}
32785
20
380
1 EllEl..
TESTINFO
CUSTORDl
CUST1087
Read/Write
Exclusive
Read
NEWDSKl
HFKTEMP
Exclusive
Exclusive
ITEMINV
Read
DIR SIZE
~
18
112
380
1040
338
535
128
112
Type in requested information; press Enter.
ITEM
CHOICE
Drive letter
••••
Virtual disk Name •
Your Access level • •
POSSIBLE CHOICES
FGHIJKLM
Virtual disk to assign
1
l=Exclusive
3=Read
2=Read/Write
Fl=Help Esc=Exi t to Options menu
NEWDSKl was assigned to drive J. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '
89088676-3
You can now change another virtual disk
assignment or press the Escape key to return to
the OPTIONS menu.
5-19
Releasing Virtual Disk Drives
If you want to release a virtual disk and drive
that are already assigned, type a 2 in the Select
input area on the OPTIONS menu and press the
Enter key. The following display appears:
SET VIRTUAL DISKS: RELEASE
DRIVE
-FG
H
I
J
K
L
K
DISK NAME
TESTINFO
NEWDISK
CUST1087
ACCESS LEVEL
Read/Write
Exclusive
Read
HFKTEMP
Exclusive
DEPT201A
Read
SIZE (KB)
32785
20
DIR SIZE
---zo48
380
16
112
1040
336
535
128
Type in the drive letter to release; press Enter.
ITEM
CHOICE
Drive letter
F1=Help
• • • • • ••
I
POSSIBLE CHOICES
FGHKM
*=release all drives
Esc=Exi t to Options Menu
59088406·'
Drive letter
This prompt is required. Type the letter of the
virtual disk drive you want to release, or an
asterisk (*) to release all virtual drives. Press
the Enter key.
A message appears at the bottom of the display,
confirming that the specified virtual disk was
released. When the virtual disk is released, the
new configuration is shown in the top portion of
the display. You can now release another virtual
disk, or press the Escape key to return to the
OPTIONS menu.
5-20
Deleting Virtual Disks or Diskettes
Before you can delete a virtual disk or diskette
that is assigned to a virtual drive, you must
release it from the virtual drive. Refer to
"Releasing Virtual Disk Drives," earlier in this
chapter.
You cannot delete a virtual disk or diskette that
is currently assigned to another user.
Note:
When you delete a virtual disk, any data
stored on that virtual disk is permanently
destroyed.
To delete a virtual disk, type a 4 on the
OPTIONS menu and press the Enter key. This
will display the following:
SET VIRTUAL DISKS : DELETE
DRIVE
-F-
G
H
I
DISK HAKE
TESTINP'O
CUSTORD1
CUST1087
ACCESS LEVEL
Read/Write
Exclusive
Read
SIZE (KB)
32785
20
380
DIR SIZE
2""ii48
18
112
J
K
L
K
~e
HFKTEKP
Exclusive
ITEKINV
Read
1040
338
535
128
in requested information; pre•• Enter.
ITEM
Virtual disk name
Fl=Help
F2=List
• • • • • • • ••
Esc=Exi t
CHOICE
POSSIBLE CHOICES
_1_
V1rtual disk to delete
to Options menu
89088408-1
5-21
The top portion of the display shows the current
configuration for the virtual disks. The bottom
portion of the display contains the following
prompt:
Virtual disk name
Type the name of the virtual disk or diskette you
want to delete in the input area.
If you want a list of virtual disks, press the F2
key. You can use the Up Arrow and Down
Arrow keys or the Page Up and Page Down keys
to highlight the virtual disk name you want.
Pressing the Home key displays the first virtual
disk in the list, and pressing the End key
displays the last virtual disk in the list.
You can limit the virtual disks listed by typing a
partial virtual disk name followed by an asterisk
(*) in the input area and pressing the F2 key.
For example, if you type 8M* in the input area
and press the F2 key, a list of all virtual disks
that begin with 8M will be displayed.
When you find the virtual disk you want, select
it from the list by pressing the F9 key. The name
is automatically copied into the input area.
Notes:
1. The F2 key lists only the virtual disks created
using PC Support/36. Virtual diskettes
created using the File Support Utility are not
listed.
2. When System/36 resource security is active, the
F2 key does not list any virtual disks you are
not authorized to read. However, System/36
resource security may prevent you from deleting
one or more of the virtual disks listed.
5-22
When you complete this prompt, press the Enter
key. You will receive a warning message to
confirm whether you really want to delete the
virtual disk.
You can press the Escape key to cancel the
request. To continue, press the Enter key.
Note:
Resource security may be active on the
System/36 for the virtual disk or diskette
you want to delete. If so, you must have
authority on the System/36 to delete the
disk or diskette. Otherwise, it is not
deleted, and an error message is displayed.
While the disk is being deleted, you receive a
message that says the system is running. If an
error occurred and the disk was not deleted, a
message is displayed telling you why the virtual
disk was not deleted.
5-23
Running the Automatic Virtual Disk
Facility
You might want to have virtual disks
automatically assigned or released. For example,
you might always work with the same virtual
disk or disks, and have no need to create virtual
disks or change virtual disk assignments. You
can have virtual disks automatically assigned
and released using the automatic virtual disk
facility, CFGVDSK.
The CFGVDSK program uses entries in the PC
Support/36 configuration file, CONFIG.S36, or a
VDSK setup file to assign and release virtual
disks. For details, refer to Chapter 4, "The
Virtual Disk Facility" in the PC Support/36
Technical Reference.
The command to start the automatic virtual disk
facility is CFGVDSK.
5-24
C
~
CFGVDSK
Purpose: This command starts the automatic
virtual disk facility.
Format:
[d:]CFGVDSK [VDSK-setup-filename]
Remarks: d: specifies the disk or diskette drive
where CFGVDSK.COM resides. Type
a letter followed by a colon to specify
the drive. (For example, A represents
the first drive, B represents the
second.) The drive letter is required
only if CFGVDSK.COM is not in the
default drive.
VDSK-setup-filename specifies the
name of a file in which CFGDSK will
search for VDSK entries to process.
The VDSK-setup-filename is optional.
If you do not specify the
VDSK-setup-filename, CFGVDSK will
search the PC Support/36
configuration file, CONFIG.S36, for
VDSK entries.
The format of the
VDSK-setup-filename is:
[c:] [path]filename[.ext]
where:
c: specifies the drive where the file
containing the VDSK entries resides.
Type a letter followed by a colon to
specify the drive. If the drive is not
specified, the default drive is
assumed.
5-25
path specifies a path of directory
names. Type the directory names,
separated by backslashes (\). The file
name should be separated from the
last directory name by a backslash
(for example, \DIRI \DIR2\FILEl).
The first backslash is optional. If
used, it tells DOS to begin with the
root directory.
If the path .name is not specified, the
current directory is used.
filename specifies the name of the
file that contains the VDSK entries.
The filename can be from 1 to 8
characters .
. ext specifies the filename extension.
The extension consists of a period and
up to 3 characters. The extension
must immediately follow the filename.
This entry is optional.
CFGVDSK ignores any parameters
after the VDSK-setup-filename
parameter.
Example:
The following command starts the automatic
virtual disk facility.
CFGVDSK
In this example, the automatic virtual disk
facility program searches the CONFIG~S36
configuration file for virtual disk (VDSK) entries
to process. Each of these entries is treated as a
request to assign or release a virtual disk or
diskette.
5-26
If you need to change the configuration of your
virtual disks frequently, you may add the
VDSK-setup-filename parameter to the
CFGVDSK command. CFGVDSK will then look
in the VDSK-setup-file for VDSK entries to
process.
Note:
If you specify the VDSK-setup-file,
CFGVDSK will search only for VDSK
entries in the VDSK-setup-file. Other
entries, such as A2ET or E2AT, are
searched for in the CONFIG.S36 file. Any
VDSK entries in the CONFIG.S36 file are
ignored.
When you are ready to start the automatic
virtual disk facility, type the CFGVDSK
command and press the Enter key.
For information on how to place entries in the
CONFIG.S36 file, refer to Chapter 2, "The PC
Support/36 Configuration File" in the PC
Support/36 Technical Reference.
5-27
The format of the VDSK setup file is the same as
the CONFIG.S36 file format with the following
exceptions:
1. The VDSK setup file does not require the
header record (Support/36) although it is
recommended that you include the header
record as the first record of the VDSK setup
file.
2. Only VDSK entries in the VDSK setup file
are processed by CFGVDSK. All other
entries are ignored.
For details on how to place VDSK entries in the
VDSK setup file, refer to Chapter 2, "The PC
Support/36 Configuration file" in the PC
Support/36 Technical Reference.
5-28
Virtual Disk Considerations
To use the virtual disk facility, you must have at
least one physical disk or diskette drive. You
cannot power on or restart your personal
computer from a PC Support/36 virtual disk.
This is because the virtual disk support is
installed during the process of restarting your
personal computer.
Virtual disks are automatically formatted when
they are created. They cannot be formatted
using the DOS FORMAT command. A virtual
disk is formatted in much the same way as a hard
disk is formatted using a DOS 2.1 FDISK
command. If you are using a virtual disk that is
larger than 10 megabytes, you will not be able to
store as many files on the virtual disk as you
could on a hard disk of the same size formatted
using a DOS 3.X FDISK command.
The following DOS functions will not work for
virtual disks:
DISKCOPY
DISKCOMP
SYS
You cannot change virtual disks while a
personal computer application is running. All
virtual disks needed by a particular application
must be assigned before that application is
started.
5-29
5-30
Chapter 6. U sing the PC
Support/36 Shared Folders
Facility
Contents
Introduction ......................
Getting Ready to Use Shared Folders ..
Shared Folder Command ............
Using Help ......................
Accessing Shared Folders ..........
Directory Considerations ........
Using a Directory Drive .........
Using a System Drive ...........
Sharing Folder Members ...........
File Sharing Considerations .........
Securing Shared Folders ...........
Security Requirements ..........
6-2
6-6
6-8
6-11
6-12
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-20
6-1
Introduction
System/36 office products use folders to store
information such as text documents, mail, and
data. A folder is like a System/36 library, except
that it contains variable-length records instead of
only fixed-length records. Document folders are
frequently used on the System/36 to store text
documents.
These documents are stored electronically in the
folders on your System/36, just as you might
store documents in paper folders in a file cabinet.
When a document is stored in a folder, it
becomes a folder member. PC Support/36 allows
you to access and share members in document
folders on the System/36. It also allows you to
store personal computer files as members in
document folders.
The members you store in document folders are
in personal computer format, just like DOS files.
You access document folders as though you were
accessing a DOS drive or directory. You can
also access them on the System/36 using
DisplayWrite/36 or other System/36 office
products.
6-2
~
These folders are called shared folders because
they can be accessed and shared by System/36
and personal computer users.
JiDJi~
Peffional
Computer
-~
~\
3
Text
Documents
Personal
Computer
Programs
System/36
Work Station
ACC011-3
6-3
You can create and use subdirectories to
organize and secure information wi thin shared
folders. A subdirectory is like a folder within a
folder. You can have many subdirectories in the
same folder, and each subdirectory can, in turn,
contain several members or subdirectories.
MYTEXT
\.
\.
\.
\.,
Subdirectory
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
"\.\.
LUNCHES
\.
\.
MEETINGS
\.
MEMOS
Subdirectory
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
REPORTS
,
Subdirectory ...---,-,-_---,
\
\
May
\
\
S90887~
6-4
The concept of shared folders is very similar to
the concept of using virtual disks. Tha t is, your
information is stored on the System/36, but you
access and use the information the way you
would if you were using a personal computer
fixed disk. However, shared folders provide
several advantages over using virtual disks.
These advantages are:
•
You can directly access System/36 folders
from your personal computer.
•
You can access all shared folders from a
single personal computer drive. (You can
assign only one virtual disk at a time to a
personal computer drive.)
•
You can apply System/36 security to
individual directories or folder members.
Refer to "Securing Shared Folders" later in
this chapter for details on how to use security
for shared folders.
•
A shared folder can be accessed and updated
by several users at the same time.
•
A shared folder member can be shared by
several personal computer applications that
support file sharing.
•
A shared folder can be extended.
You can use the PC Utility to copy existing
virtual disk files to shared folders. Refer to
Chapter 8, "The Translation Table Utility" in the
PC Support/36 Technical Reference for
information on how to use the PC Utility.
6-5
Getting Ready to Use Shared
Folders
Before you can use shared folders, you must have
a CONFIG.SYS configuration file containing
~
DEVICE entries for shared folders. The
~
CONFIG.SYS file contains configuration
commands. These commands set the
configuration values that DOS will use when you
power on or restart your personal computer. The
CONFIG.SYS file must be in the root directory of
the drive from which you power on or restart
your personal computer.
Each time you load DOS, it searches the root
directory of the drive from which it is started for
the CONFIG.SYS file. If this file is found, DOS
reads the file and interprets the commands
within the file. If the CONFIG.SYS file is not
found, DOS assigns default values for the
configuration commands.
When you install the shared folders facility, PC
Support/36 looks for the required DEVICE
entries in the CONFIG.SYS file. If these entries
are not in your CONFIG.SYS file they are
automatically added for you when you run the
INSTALL or COPYFSPC command. If you do
not have a CONFIG.SYS file, it is automatically
created.
Note:
6-6
If you used the INSTALL command and
said you were using Shared Folders to
create the LINK36 support and run the
LINK36 command, a CONFIG.S36 file has
been set up for you.
The format of the DEVICE entries for shared
folders is as follows:
DEVICE = [d:] [path] FSDDX.SYS [F = ff] [D = dd]
DEVICE = [d:] [path] FSDD.SYS [B = bb]
where:
d specifies the name of the disk or diskette
drive, or virtual drive, where FSPC resides. Type
a letter followed by a colon (:) to specify the
drive. For example, A represents the first drive,
B represents the second. The drive is required
only if FSPC is not in the default drive.
path specifies a path of directory names that
tell where the shared folders device driver
resides. Type the directory names separated by
backslashes (\). You do not have to specify a
path if the device driver is in the root directory.
F=ff specifies the maximum number of files that
can be open at one time. You can specify any
number from 1 to 30. If you do not specify a
value for ff, 8 is assumed.
D = dd specifies the maximum number of drives
you want to have assigned at one time. The
value you specify for dd can be a number from 1
through 26. If you do not specify a value, 8 is
assumed. If you specify a value greater than the
number of drive ID's available, you will get the
maximum number of drive ID's available.
6-7
B=bb specifies the buffer size in K-bytes. You
can specify any number from OK bytes to 47K
bytes. If you do not specify a value, 0 is
assumed.
Note: Each open file requires 40 bytes of storage
on your personal computer.
Shared Folder Command
PC Support/36 provides a command, FSPC, which
allows you to work with shared folders. By
specifying certain values with the FSPC
command, you can work with shared folders or
members within those folders.
6-8
FSPC
Purpose:
This command allows you to assign,
release, and show status of personal
computer drives used to access
shared folders.
Format:
FSPC function (HELP I parameters)
Remarks:
FSPC is the command to assign,
release, and show status of personal
computer drives used to access
shared folders.
function specifies the shared
folder function you want to
perform. Values you can specify for
function are:
HELP, to display help text
describing how to use the FSPC
command.
ASSIGN, to assign a drive to a
System/36. You can specify a
path of directory names with
this parameter (for example,
ASSIGN E:/DIRa/DIRb/DIRc).
You can use either a forward
slash (/) or a backslash (\) to
separate the directory names.
6-9
RELEASE, to release a drive
that is assigned to a System/36
(for example, RELEASE E:).
STATUS, to display the status
of all drives used to access
shared folders on the System/36.
If you do not specify a function
on the FSPC command,
STATUS is assumed.
HELP displays help text
describing how to use the FSPC
command function you specified.
Examples:
The following command displays help text for the
FSPC command.
FSPC HELP
The following command assigns drive S to the
System/36.
FSPC ASSIGN S:
The following command assigns drive L to the
folder named DEPT42 and the subdirectory
REPORTS:
FSPC ASSIGN L: /DEPT42/REPORTS
6-10
Using Help
You can request help for the FSPC command or
for any of the shared folder functions. To
request help, type the parameter, HELP, after the
function for which you want help.
For example, if you type:
FSPC HELP
help text for the FSPC command appears. If you
type:
FSPC ASSIGN HELP
help text for the ASSIGN function appears.
6-11
Accessing Shared Folders
To access shared folders on the System/36, you
must assign a drive in one of the following ways:
•
As a directory drive, which allows you to
assign and use a specific directory you have
authority to use on the System/36. The
directory can be a shared folder or a
subdirectory within the shared folder.
For example, you could assign drive D to the
directory DEPT24. When you use a directory
drive, you must have a separate drive
assigned for each directory you want to
access.
•
6-12
As a system drive, which allows you to access
any number of directories you have authority
to use. For example, you could assign drive S
to the System/36. You can then use the DOS
change directory command CD to change
from one directory to another. The directory
may be a shared folder or a subdirectory
within a shared folder. You do not have to
end the application you are running to assign
the drive to a different directory.
(I
~
•
Once you have assigned a directory drive or a
system drive, you can use DOS commands to
work with the drive.
•
You cannot use the following DOS commands
with shared folders:
CHKDSK
DISKCOMP
DISKCOPY
FDISK
FORMAT
JOIN
LABEL
RECOVER
SUBST
SYS
Or any other command that does sector
input/output
•
There are restrictions on the use of the
following DOS commands with shared folders:
BACKUP
Files cannot be backed up
to a system drive unless a
folder named BACKUP
previously exists, a folder
cannot be created by this
command.
COpy
Files cannot be copied to
the first level directory
(root) of a shared folder
system drive. Only folders
(system drive
subdirectories) can exist on
the root level of a system.
6-13
6-14
MKDIR
Directories cannot be
created on the first level
directory of a shared folder
system drive.
RESTORE
Files backed up to a shared
folder can be used to
restore files on a personal
computer disk or diskette.
The files will be restored
from a folder or
subdirectory named
BACKUP. Files within a
shared folder can be
restored from a personal
computer disk or diskette.
RMDIR
Directories cannot be
removed from the first level
directory of a shared folder
system drive.
XCOpy
Files cannot be copied to
the first level (root) of a
shared folder system drive.
Only folders (system drive
subdirectories) can exist on
such a drive.
Directory Considerations
You should consider the following when using
shared folders:
•
Personal computer applications cannot open
files that are directories.
•
You cannot use the DOS make directory
(MKDIR) to create a shared folder. (In other
words, you cannot create a directory at the
root level of a system drive.) However, you
can use the MKDIR command to create a
subdirectory in an existing shared folder. To
create a shared folder, you must use the
TEXTFLDR procedure on the System/36.
•
You can use the remove directory command
(RMDIR) to remove only subdirectories
within a shared folder. You cannot use it to
remove a shared folder. To remove a shared
folder, you must use the TEXTFLDR
procedure on the System/36.
•
When you are using a system drive, you
cannot store information in the root
directory. The root directory provides only
directory information.
Note: If you are using a directory drive, you
can- store information in the root
directory.
•
You cannot have more than 239
subdirectories in anyone shared folder.
6-15
U sing a Directory Drive
A directory drive allows you to access one
directory. The directory can be a System/36
shared folder or a shared folder subdirectory you
are authorized to. Once assigned, you can access
any subdirectories or files you are authorized to
within the directory assigned.
To assign a directory drive, use the FSPC
command as follows:
FSPC ASSIGN [d:] path //System/36
where:
ASSIGN is the parameter that lets you assign a
drive.
d: is the letter of the drive you want to assign. If
you do not specify a drive letter, the next
available drive letter is used.
path is the path to the System/36 directory you
want to assign. The path must begin with a
folder name. For example:
FSPC ASSIGN M: /MONTHLY/JUNE
System/36 is the corresponding link-name from
the TRLI entry in the configuration file.
6-16
I
Once you have assigned a directory, you can use
DOS commands to work with the drive. For
example:
•
DIR lists the directory entries of the drive
you have assigned. The System/36 will not
allow you to access or list entries that you
are not authorized to use.
•
ERASE erases the files in the directory of the
assigned drive.
•
CD changes the directory of the assigned
drive.
U sing a System Drive
A system drive allows you to access any number
of directories from a single personal computer
drive. To assign a system drive, use the FSPC
command as follows:
FSPC ASSIGN [d:]
where:
ASSIGN is the parameter that lets you assign a
drive.
d: is the letter of the drive you want to assign. If
you do not assign a drive letter, the next
available drive is used.
6-17
For example, the following command assigns
drive L as a system drive:
FSPC ASSIGN L:
You can use the DOS commands DIR, ERASE,
and CD, as described in the preceding section
"Using a Directory Drive. " You can also use the
DOS COPY command. For example:
COpy a:\*.* L :\DEPT45
would copy all of the information in the root
directory of drive a to the directory DEPT45,
which is a System/36 shared folder.
Sharing Folder Members
If the personal computer program you are using
is designed for file sharing, you may use a shared (l
folder to store your shared files. See the
documentation for your program to find out if it
is designed for file sharing.
File sharing is only supported between personal
computer programs. Sharing with a System/36
user is not supported.
6-18
File Sharing Considerations
Shared folder will fully support the following
sharing modes:
•
•
•
Compatibility mode
Deny Write
Deny None
The sharing mode of Deny Read/Write
(Exclusive) mode is supported the same as
Compatibility mode.
The sharing mode of Deny Read is supported the
same as Deny None.
The DOS command SHARE is not required to
share files in a shared folder.
A file opened in Compatibility mode will not
allow any sharing with other personal computer
users.
The personal computer Byte Locking function is
supported by shared folder when a file is being
shared.
For more information on personal computer file
sharing, refer to Disk Operating System Technical
Reference.
6-19
Securing Shared Folders
When you use shared folders, you can take
advantage of System/36 resource security to
secure folders and subdirectories or members in
the folder. You must use System/36 resource
security procedures to secure the folders.
Once you have created a folder, you can use the
System/36 procedure SECEDIT to assign the
appropriate level of security. For example, from
a System/36 display, you can type:
SECEDIT RESFLDR
This displays a series of menus to step you
through resource security.
When you create subdirectories or members
within a folder, they are automatically given the
same level of security as the folder or
subdirectory in which they are created. You can
give a subdirectory or member within a folder a
different level of security using the System/36
procedure SECEDIT. For more information on
the System/36 procedure SECEDIT refer to the
IBM Systemj36 System Reference.
Security Requirements
The following are the System/36 resource
security levels that can be used to secure shared
folders, and their meanings. They are listed here
from the highest level of security (owner, which
gives the most authority) to the lowest level of
security (none). Resource security can be appiied
to the entire folder, folder members, and/or
subdirectories within the folder.
6-20
I
Owner
The owner of the folder can rename the
folder and perform security functions
for the folder. Only the owner can
change the security levels of all
subdirectories and members within the
folder.
Change The user can create, or delete
subdirectories within the folder.
Update The user can perform all
member-related functions. These
functions include update, create, delete,
rename, and change. The user cannot
perform these functions for
subdirectories within a folder.
Read
The user can read a member, do search
functions, and archive members in the
folder.
Run
The personal computer user can run a
program and do folder search functions.
None
The user has no access to subdirectories
in the folder.
Users most commonly have security levels of
change, read, and update.
Levels of security are hierarchical for members
within a folder. That is, a folder member cannot
have a higher level of security than the
subdirectory that contains it. However, security
is not hierarchical for subdirectories. A
subdirectory can have any level of security
independent of the security of the folder in which
it is located.
6-21
The following diagram will help you understand
how the different levels of security work when
applied to subdirectories and members within
shared folders.
Shared Folder
59088722-0
In this diagram, members A and B can have any
level of security less than or equal to
subdirectory 1. "If a user has read authority to
subdirectory 1, the user can have only read or
run authority to members A and B.
Since a subdirectory can have any level of
security, a user could have read authority to
subdirectories 1 and 2, but could have update
authority to subdirectory 3. If a user has update
authority to subdirectory 3, the user can have
update, read, or run authority to members D and
E.
6-22
Chapter 7. U sing the PC
Support/36 Virtual Printer
Facility
Contents
Introduction ......................
Starting the Virtual Printer Facility ...
Running the Interactive Virtual Printer
Facility Program .................
Assigning and Changing Virtual
Printer Configuration ..........
Releasing Virtual Printers .......
Closing a Print File or Displaying
Print File Status ..............
Advanced Options ..............
Specifying the Time-Out Value .
Changing the Defer Status
Changing Untranslatable
Characters ................
Setting Command Override Mode
Setting Printer Data Type .....
Selecting a Personal Computer
Printer Character Set .......
Ending Advanced Options .....
Running the Automatic Virtual Printer
Program .......................
Special Considerations .............
7-2
7-7
7-9
7-13
7-20
7-21
7-23
7-24
7-27
7-29
7-31
7-35
7-43
7-46
7-47
7-52
7-1
Introduction
The PC Support/36 virtual printer facility allows
you to use System/36 printers from your personal
computer in addition to a PC-attached personal
computer printer. This allows you to take
advantage of the faster speed and quality of the
larger System/36 printers. The term virtual
printer means that the printer is controlled using
nearly the same commands you use for your
personal computer printer, even though the
printer is actually attached to the System/36.
Note:
The virtual printer facility assumes that
the data to be printed is intended for the
IBM Personal Computer Matrix printer,
the IBM Personal Computer Graphics
printer, or other compatible personal
computer printers, unless an alternate
printer data type is specified. (Refer to
"Setting Printer Data Type," later in this
chapter, for details on the options
available.) Printer data intended for use
with other personal computer printers may
not be correctly converted to the
appropriate System/36 printer data stream
by the" virtual printer facility.
Using a personal computer printer differs from
using a virtual printer in that, for a virtual
printer, a print file is necessary. A print file
allows more than one program or user to share
the same printer.
7-2
Print files are not necessary for the personal
computer, because the personal computer printer
is intended for use by one person. However,
print files are necessary when you use a virtual
printer, because the output is actually printed on
a System/36 printer being shared by many
programs and users.
When you print on the virtual printer, a print
file is opened on the System/36. This file collects
all of the data to be printed. When the end of
the data is reached (all the data to be printed has
been collected), the print file is closed. The
complete contents of the print file can then be
printed. This leaves the System/36 printer
available for other users to share until your
complete file is ready to be printed.
For details on opening and closing print files,
refer to Chapter 5, "The Virtual Printer Facility"
in the PC Support/36 Technical Reference.
7-3
You can define up to three printers to be used
from your personal computer. These three
printers can all be local personal computer
printers, virtual printers, or any combination of
the two. All three printers can be active at the
same time.
Note:
The virtual printer facility should not be
used with any personal computer print
spoolers, such as the DOS PRINT
command.
However, it is recommended that the
System/36 Spool utility be active if you are
using a virtual printer. If the System/36
Spool utility is not active, and errors occur
when the virtual printer facility is
communicating with the System/36 printer,
unpredictable results will occur. These
unpredictable results can affect any other
PC Support/36 programs you are running,
including the virtual disk facility and the
transfer facility.
7-4
You can use any of the following System/36
printers as a virtual printer:
System/36
Printer
3262
4214
4224
4234
or
Description
High-speed printer
Medium-speed printer
IPDS printer
Medium-speed matrix
printer
Very high-speed
printer
Letter-quality printer
or
Matrix printer
or
Low/high speed
printer
IGC (Ideographic
Capable) printer
4245
5219
3812
5224
5225
5256
5262
5553
5557
or
Before you can use a virtual printer, you must
first start DOS, and the LINK36 support.. To do
this, refer to Chapter 3, "Starting PC
Support/36. "
7-5
To use a virtual printer, you must start these
programs:
•
LINK36, which sets up the link to the
System/36.
•
VPRT.COM, which sends print requests from
the personal computer to the System/36 when
a virtual printer is being used.
•
One of the following:
The interactive virtual printer facility
program, SETVPRT, which prompts you,
step-by-step, through defining the printers
you want to use as virtual printers.
The automatic virtual printer facility
program, CFGVPRT, which automatically
sets up the virtual printers for you using
VPRT entries in the PC Support/36
configuration file, CONFIG.S36, or in the
VPRT setup file you specified.
The ISETVPRT command will start the
interactive printer facility, SETVPRT.
ISETVPRT automatically loads and runs the PC
Support/36 router, VPRT.COM and SETVPRT.
7-6
Starting the Virtual Printer
Facility
To use the virtual printer facility, you must start
the VPRT.COM program. This program must be
started before you can use either the interactive
virtual printer facility program or the automatic
virtual printer facility program. VPRT.COM
sends print requests from the personal computer
to the System/36 when a virtual printer is being
used.
Note:
If you use the ISETVPRT command, the
VPRT.COM program and the PC
Support/36 router are automatically
started.
Once you run the VPRT.COM program, it
becomes a resident program. This means that
you need to run VPRT.COM when you power on
or restart your personal computer; you do not
need to run VPRT.COM every time you run
CFGVPRT or SETVPRT.
To start the VPRT.COM program, use the VPRT
command.
7-7
VPRT
Purpose: This command starts the virtual
printer facility.
Format:
[d:]VPRT
Remarks: d: is the drive containing program
VPRT.COM. You need to enter the
drive information only if the program
VPRT.COM is not in the default
drive. After you type the command,
press the Enter key.
Example:
The following command starts the virtual printer
facility:
VPRT
When you are ready to start the virtual printer
facility, type the VPRT command after the DOS
prompt and press the Enter key.
7-8
d
,
Running the Interactive Virtual
Printer Facility Program
The interactive virtual printer facility program
prompts you through defining the printers you
want to use as virtual printers and how the
printed output should look (for example, number
of lines per inch, forms length, and number of
copies). You can run this program whenever you
want to assign, release, or change virtual
printers. To start this program, use the
SETVPRT command.
7-9
SETVPRT
Purpose: This command starts the interactive
virtual printer facility.
Format:
[d:]SETVPRT [/x][fy]
Remarks: d: is the drive containing the
SETVPRT program. Type a letter
followed by a colon to specify the
drive. (For example, A represents the
first drive, B represents the second.)
The drive is required only if
SETVPRT is not in the default drive.
Ix specifies the type of display you
are using. This parameter is optional;
it tells the program what attributes to
send to your display. Values you can
specify for x are an uppercase or
lowercase M or C. For details on
what to specify for this parameter,
refer to Chapter 2, "What You
Should Know before Operating PC
Support/a6. "
Iy specifies the display writing speed.
This parameter is optional; it tells the
program what speed your display
should write at. Values you can
specify for yare an uppercase or
lowercase H or S. For details on
what to specify for this parameter,
refer to Chapter 2, "What You
Should Know before Operating PC
Support/a6."
7-10
('
\
Example:
Assume that you are using a monochrome display
attached to a Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter
card, you want to use slow speed display writing,
and the SETVPRT program is in the default
drive. You might enter:
SETVPRT IMIS
When you are ready to start the interactive
virtual printer facility program, type the
SETVPRT command after the DOS prompt and
press the Enter key.
If you have not started the router, but DOS and
the 5250 Emulation Program, or the IBM
Token-Ring Network, are started, you can use
the ISETVPRT command. This will start the
router, VPRT.COM, and the SETVPRT program.
The format for ISETVPRT is the same as for the
SETVPRT command.
The OPTIONS menu appears as follows:
. . - - - - - - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL P R I H T E R , . . - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
CUrrent Contiguration
SystelDl36 printer ID
Printer type
Characters per line
Lines per inch
Page length
Lines per page
Number ot copies
LPT2
Pi
5258/82
132
8
127
120
100
LPT3
""P4
5219
80
6
66
60
1
. . ._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _to:PTIOHs._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . . .
Select one ot these optionaJ press Enter.
1 Assign or chanBe virtual printers
2 Ralease virtual printers
3 Close or view print tile status
4 Advanced Options
5 Exit
Select - ..... > ..!
Esc=Exit
' -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Version 04.00 (0) IBM Corp. 1987
89088701-5
7-11
The top portion of the display shows how the
printers are currently assigned (when SETVPRT
or CFGVPRT was previously run). On the,
display shown, there are currently two virtual
printers assigned:
•
LPT2: Printer output sent to LPT2 is printed
on the System/36 printer named PI. This
printer is a 5256 or a 5262 Printer. The
output printed on LPT2 is to have 132
characters per line, 8 lines per inch, and 120
lines per page on a page length of 127 lines.
One hundred copies of each print file are to
be printed.
•
LPT3: Printer output sent to LPT3 is printed
on the System/36 printer named P4. This
printer is a 5219 Printer. Output printed on
LPT3 is to have 80 characters per line, 6 lines
per inch, and 60 lines per page on a page
length of 66 lines. One copy is to be printed.
LPT1 was not assigned as a virtual printer. This
means that any output sent to LPT1 is printed on
the personal computer printer, if one is attached.
From the OPTIONS menu, you can set up or
change the virtual printer configuration, release
a virtual printer, close or view the status of a
print file, select advanced options to perform, or
end the SETVPRT program.
Note:
7-12
If you change the printer values after a
print file is opened, the changes will not
take effect until after the print file is closed
and then opened again.
Assigning and Changing Virtual
Printer Configuration
If you want to change virtual printer
assignments or assign a new virtual printer,
select a 1 (Assign or change virtual printers) on
the OPTIONS menu and press the Enter key.
The following display appears:
,----_ _ _ _ _ SET VIRTUAL PRINTER : ASSIGN/CHANGE, _ _ _ _ _ _- - ,
CUrrent Configuration
SyateJDI38 printer ID
Printer type
Characters per line
Lines per inch
Page length
Lines per page
Humber of copies
~e
LPT2
LPT3
-pr
P4""
5258/82
132
5219
80
8
8
127
120
100
88
80
1
in requested information; press Enter.
CHOICE
ITEM
PC printer • • • • •
Systeml38 printer • •
Characters per line.
Lines per inch • • •
Page length
Lines per page • • •
Humber of copies . ,
F1=Help
POSSIBLE CHOICES
1=LPT1 2=LPT2 3=LPT3
SysteJDI38 pr1nter ID
80. 132. 198
8. 8 lines
1-127 lines
1-Page length
1-255 copies
Esc=Exi t to Options
59088702-2
The top portion of the display shows the current
virtual printer configuration. The bottom
portion of the display shows various prompts to
help you change the current configuration. The
default values automatically appear in the input
areas. To change a value, simply position the
cursor to the input area and type over the default
value.
If you need help, you can press the F1 key. You
can press the Escape key at any time to return to
the OPTIONS menu.
7-13
PC printer
The PC printer prompt allows you to specify the
printer for which you want to change the
configuration. This prompt is required. Type 1
for LPT1, 2 for LPT2, or 3 for LPT3 in the input
area, and press the Enter key.
If the printer you chose is currently assigned, the
current values for that printer are automatically
copied into the remaining prompts. If the printer
is not assigned, the default values for the
prompts continue to be displayed.
You can now change the values of any of the
following prompts.
7-14
~
System/36 printer
To assign a virtual printer, you must specify the
2-character identification of an existing
System/36 printer in the input area.
If you do not know the names of the System/36
printers, press the F2 key. This displays a list of
the System/36 printers as follows:
r - - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL PRINTER : ASSIGN/CHANGE-------,
. -_ _ _ _ _ _ LIST OF SYSTEK/38 PRINTERS _ _ _ _ _ _....
ID
~
P2
P4
P3
P5
TYPE
5258/62
5224/25
5219
3282
5224/25
F9=Select
t/+
=Scroll
DESCRIPTION
Low/high speed printer (syste~ printer)
Matrix printer
Letter quality pr1nter
High speed printer
Matrix printer
Esc=Ex1t List
PC printer • • • • • • •
Syste~36 printer. • • .
Characters per line • • •
Lines per inch • • • • •
Page length
Lines per page • • • • •
Number of copies • • •
F1=Help
1
•
8
80
-66
6s
1
1=LPT1 2=LPT2 3=LPT3
Syste~38 printer ID
80. 132. 198
8. 8 lines
1-127 lines
1 - Page 1 ength
1-255 copies
F2=List
89088703-3
The list of printers includes the printer
identification, printer type, and a short
description of each printer. You can use the Up
Arrow and Down Arrow keys to find the
identification of the printer you want, then press
the F9 key to select it. The printer identification
you select is automatically copied into the
System/36 printer input area. To end the list
without selecting a printer, press the Escape key.
When you complete the System/36 printer
prompt, press the Enter key.
7-15
Characters per line
This prompt allows you to specify the number of
characters per line to be printed. Values you can
specify are 80, 132, or 198. If you do not specify
the number of characters per line, the value
displayed for this prompt is used.
When you complete this prompt, press the Enter
key.
Note:
You cannot specify 198 characters per line
if a 3262, 4245, 5262, 5256, 5557, or 5553
Printer is being used. Printing 198
characters per line requires a character
density of 15 characters per inch. The
printers listed above do not support this
requirement.
Lines per inch
This prompt allows you to specify the number of
lines to be printed per inch. Values you can
specify are 6 and 8. If you do not specify the
number of lines per inch, the value displayed for
this prompt is used. When you complete this
prompt, press the Enter key.
7-16
~
Page length
This prompt allows you to specify the length of
the printed page. The number you enter here
depends on the forms size you are using. You
can enter any number from 1 through 127. If you
do not enter a page length, the value displayed
for this prompt is used.
To determine the page length in lines, multiply
the actual page length, in inches, by the number
of lines per inch. For example, if the page length
is 11 inches and the number of lines per inch is 6,
the page length in lines is 66.
When you complete this prompt, press the Enter
key.
Note:
An error message is sent to the system
console when a 5219 Printer is printing
your print file if you specify a page length
longer than the page length of the paper on
the printer.
7-17
Lines per page
This prompt allows you to specify the number of
lines to be printed on each page. The number
you can enter here depends on the forms size and
how many lines you want printed on each page.
You can specify any number from 1 through the
page length you specified in the Page length
prompt. If you do not enter the number of lines
per page, the value displayed for this prompt is
used. When you complete this prompt, press the
Enter key.
Note:
7-18
If the data to be printed is already
formatted (if it prints correctly on your
local personal computer printer), you
should specify the same value for the Page
length and Lines per page prompts.
Otherwise, extra form feeds may be added
causing blank pages to appear in your
printed output.
Number of copies
This prompt allows you to specify the number of
copies of each print file to be printed. You can
enter any number from 1 to 255. If you do not
enter the number of copies, the value displayed
for this prompt is used.
When you complete this prompt, press the Enter
key. A display appears showing the new printer
configuration information and an informational
message, as follows:
. . . - - - - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL PRINTER: ASSIGN/CHANGE----------,
Current Con1'iguration
Systeml38 printer ID
Printer type
Characters per line
Lines per inch
Page length
Lines per page
Number 01' copies
LPT2
LPT3
5258/82
5219
80
-"Pi
132
-p4,
8
8
127
120
100
88
80
1
Type in requested in1'ormation; press Enter.
ITEM
CHOICE
PC printer • • • • •
Systeml38 printer •
Characters per line •
Lines per inch • •
Page length
Lines per page • •
NulDber 01' copies •
I
POSSIBLE CHOICES
1=LPTl 2=LPT2 3=LPT3
Printer ID 01' Systeml38 printer
80# 132# 198
8# 8 lines
1-127 lines
I-Page length
1-255 copies
P1-Help Esc=Exi t to Options
LPT3 has been assigned with specified v a l u e s - - - - - - - - - - - '
S9088704-'
From this display, you can change another
printer assignment or press the Escape key to
return to the OPTIONS menu.
7-19
Releasing Virtual Printers
If you want to release a virtual printer, select a 2
(Release virtual printers) on the OPTIONS menu,
and press the Enter key. The following display
appears:
r - - - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL PRINTER: R E L E A S E - - - - - - - - - - .
CUrrent Configuration
System/38 printer ID
Printer type
Characters per 1 ine
Lines per inch
Page length
Lines per page
Number 0 f copi es
LPT2
~
LPT3
P4
5258182
5219
132
80
8
8
127
120
88
80
100
1
Type in the PC printer to release; press Enter.
ITEM
CHOICE
PC Printer to reI ease • • •
F1=Help
I
POSSIBLE CHOICES
2=LPT2 3=LPT3
*=reI ease all printers
Esc=Exi t to Options
89088677-2
PC Printer to release
Specify the printer you want to release in this
prompt. The possible choices depend on what
printers you have assigned, and are listed on the
display. If you want to release all printers, type
an asterisk (*). Press the Enter key.
You will receive a message confirming that the
specified printer was released. You can now
release another printer, or press the Escape key
to return to the OPTIONS menu.
7-20
Closing a Print File or Displaying
Print File Status
/
If you want to close a print file or display the
status of a print file, select a 3 (Close or view
print file status) on the OPTIONS menu and
press the Enter key. The following display
appears:
. - - - - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL PRINTER: CLOSE - - - - - - - - - - ,
Cw=ront P<mt1eurat1pn
L2l:1
LEn
P1
5258/82
132
8
127
120
100
Systeml38 printer In
Printer type
Characters per line
Lines per inoh
Page length
Lines per page
Number ot copies
Closed print ti les
Latest print tile status
Pages
untranslatable
characters
l..E.IiS
P4
5219
80
8
88
80
1
8
2
11
3
77
3
Indicate which print tile to close; press Enter.
CHOICE
ITEK
PC Printer
F1=Help
••••••
POSSIBLE CHOICES
2=LPT2
3=LPT3
Esc=Exi t to Options
59088706-3
The top portion of the display shows the current
virtual printer configuration and the total
number of print files closed for each printer. It
also shows the status of the latest print file (this
is the current status if the file is still opened, or
the final status if the file is closed), including the
number of pages sent to the latest print file and
the number of untranslatable characters found in
the file.
If you do not want to close a print file, press the
Escape key. This returns you to the OPTIONS
menu without closing any print files.
7-21
To close a print file, you must complete the PC
printer prompt on the bottom portion of the
display. If you need help, you can press the Fl
key. You can press the Escape key at any time
to return to the OPTIONS menu.
Select the print file you want to close by typing
one of the possible choices in the PC printer
input area. In this example, the possible choices
you could enter are 2 (printer LPT2) or 3 (printer
LPT3). If no print files are open, no choices are
listed.
When you have typed the number for the print
file you want to close, press the Enter key. A
message appears at the bottom of the display, as
follows:
r - - - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL PRINTER: C L O S E - - - - - - - - - - - ,
CUrrent Contiguration
SystelDl38 printer ID
Printer type
Characters per line
Lines per inch
Page length
Lines per page
Number 0 t cop! es
LPT2
~
52i5
80
8
88
80
132
8
127
120
100
Closed print tiles
Latest print til e status
Pages
Untranslatable
characters
LPT3
~
5258/82
1
7
2
11
3
77
3
Indicate which print tile to c lose; press Enter.
ITEM
CHOICE
PC Printer
• • • • ••
~
POSSIBLE CHOICES
3=LPT3
---------------------------------------------------------------------Fl=Help Esc=Exi t to Options
Print tile tor LPT2 has been closed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '
89088678·3
You can now close another print file or press the
Escape key to return to the OPTIONS menu.
7-22
Advanced Options
You can specify advanced options for the virtual
printer. These options are not necessary for
normal use of the virtual printer. These options
are intended only for users with special virtual
printer requirements.
If you want to specify the advanced options for
the virtual printer, select a 4 (Advanced options)
on the OPTIONS menu and press the Enter key.
The following ADVANCED OPTIONS menu
appears:
. . - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL PRINTER: ADVANCED O P T I O N S - - - - - - - ,
CUrrent Configuration
Systeml38 printer ID
Printer type
Time-out value
Defer until f'inished
Untranslatable character
Command override
Printer data type
PC printer character set
LPT1
LPT2
LPT3
5258/82
10
5219
FiI
---"P4
10
Yes
Yes
40
No
40
No
2
2
1
1
. . ._ _ _ _ _ _ _MD'VANCED OPTIO,m;._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . .
Select one ot these advanced options; press Enter.
1 Specity time-out value
2 Change defer status
3 Change untranslatable character
4 Set command override mode
5 set printer data type
8 Select PC printer character set
7 Exit to Main Options Menu
Select ===> J
Esc=Exi t to Main Options Menu
S9088708·4
The top portion of the display shows the current
virtual printer configuration and advanced
options specified. The bottom portion of the
display shows the ADVANCED OPTIONS menu,
from which you can select functions you want to
perform.
Select the option you want to use and press the
Enter key. You can press the Escape key at any
time to return to the OPTIONS menu.
7-23
Specifying the Time-Out Value
To specify the time-out value, type a 1 (Specify
time-out value) on the ADVANCED OPTIONS
menu and press the Enter key. The following
display appears:
r - - - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL PRINTER : TIME-OUT V A L U E - - - - - - - - ,
CUrrent Configuration
Syatem/36 printer ID
Printer type
Tillie-out value
Deter until finished
Untranslatable character
Col!llllllnd override
Printer data type
PC printer character set
LPT1
LPT2
-pt
5256/62
30
Yes
40
No
2
1
LPT3
~
5219
10
Yes
40
No
2
1
Type in requested information; press Enter.
ITEM
CHOICE
PC printer
••
Tillie-out value
F1=Help
POSSIBLE CHOICES
2=LPT2
3=LPT3
1-255 seconds
O=Dlsable tillie-out
Eac=Exi t to Advanced Options
59088709-3
The time-out value tells the virtual printer
facility to automatically close an open print file
after a specified amount of time. The value you
specify for the time-out prompt is the number of
seconds you want the print file to remain open
after the last character is sent to the virtual
printer. If you do not change the time-out value,
the value displayed for this prompt is used.
7-24
You can use this display to change the amount of
time that a print file will remain open, or you
can use it to keep the print file open until you
close it using the SETVPRT program (option 3).
Note:
If there is an existing print file for a
virtual printer, changing the time-out value
for this printer will not affect the current
print file. This file will be closed based on
the time-out value in effect when the print
file was opened.
You can press the Fl key to display help text for
this prompt.
PC Printer
The PC Printer prompt allows you to select the
printer for which you want to change the
time-out value. This prompt is required.
Type one of the possible choices in the PC
Printer input area and press the Enter key. In
this example, the possible choices you could
enter are 2 (printer LPT2) or 3 (printer LPT3).
7-25
Time-out value
Specify the number of seconds you want the print
file to remain open in the Time-out value input
area. You can specify any number from 0 to 255.
If you want to specify that the print file should
not be automatically closed, specify a zero.
Note:
If you specify zero for the time-out value,
you must explicitly close the print file (for
example, by using option 3, Close or view
print file status, on the OPTIONS menu).
Refer to Chapter 5, "The Virtual Printer
Facility" in the PC Support/36 Technical
Reference for details on various ways to
close a print file.
Mter you type a value in the Time-out value
input area, press the Enter key. A message is
displayed confirming that the time-out value is
set for the specified printer. You can now either
set the time-out value for another printer, or
press the Escape key to return to the
ADVANCED OPTIONS menu.
7-26
Changing the Defer Status
To specify the defer status, type a 2 (Change
defer status) on the ADVANCED OPTIONS menu
and press the Enter key. The following display
appears:
. . . - - - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL PRINTER: DEFER STATUS------.......,
CUrrent Contisuration
Systeml38 printer ID
Printer type
Time-out value
Deter until tinished
Untranslatable character
CoIllllllUld override
Printer data type
PC printer character set
LPT2
LPT1
LPT3
--pr
~
5256/82
30
Yes
40
No
2
1
5219
10
Yes
40
No
2
1
Type in requested intormationJ press Enter.
ITEM
CHOICE
•••••••
I
Deter printing until
print tile closed? • •
1
PC Printer
Fl-Help
POSSIBLE CHOICES
2=LPT2
3=LPT3
Esc=Exi t to Advanced Options
59088710·5
The defer status for the virtual printer tells you
whether or not printing is to be deferred, or not
printed, until the print file is closed.
Note:
The defer status is only used if the
System/36 Spool utility is active.
For example, if printing is deferred, the printer
waits until it receives the entire document before
starting to print it. This gives others more
opportunities to use the same printer. If you
specify that printing is not to be deferred,
printing begins immediately and no other file can
be printed until the file being printed is closed.
Your document may be printed sooner, but could
cause delays for others who want to use that
printer.
7-27
If you do not change the defer status, printing is
deferred.
PC Printer
The PC Printer prompt allows you to select the
printer for which you want to change the defer
status. This prompt is required. Type one of the
possible choices in the PC Printer input area and
press the Enter key. For example, the possible
choices on the display shown are 2 (printer
LPT2) or 3 (printer LPT3).
Defer printing until print file closed?
This prompt allows you to specify whether or not
you want printing to be deferred (not printed)
until the print file is closed. Type a 1 (Yes) or a
2 (No) and press the Enter key. The default is
the value displayed for this prompt.
Note:
It is recommended that you do not specify 2
(No) for this prompt if you have disabled
(specified zero for) the time-out value. This
could cause the System/36 printer to be
allocated to you for an unlimited period of
time (if you do not explicitly close the print
file), and prevent others from using the
printer. However, some. text editors, such
as DW3 Vl.l, close the print file for you.
After you type a value for this prompt, press the
Enter key. A message is displayed confirming
that the defer status was set for the specified
printer. You can now change the defer status for
another printer, or press the Escape key to
return to the ADVANCED OPTIONS menu.
7-28
!
Changing Untranslatable
Characters
To change the character printed when an
untranslatable character is found, type a 3
(Change untranslatable character) on the
ADVANCED OPTIONS menu and press the
Enter key. The following display appears:
, . - - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL PRINTER: UNTRANSLATABLE CHARACTER.-----,
~
Current Configuration
syshiiil38 printer ID
Printer type
Time-out value
Defer until finished
Untran.latable character
Colllllland override
Printer data type
PC printer character set
LPT2
LPT3
-pr
--"P4
5258/82
5219
10
Yes
40
No
2
1
30
Yes
40
No
2
1
Type in requested information; press Enter.
ITEM
CHOICE
PC Printer
• • • •
Untranslatable
character • • • •
F1-Help
•
POSSIBLE CHOICES
2=LPT2
3 m LPT3
hex value of EBCDIC character
Eso-Exit to Advanced Options
59088711-3
Because. personal computers print ASCII data
and System/36 printers accept only EBCDIC
data, the virtual printer must translate each
character sent from the personal computer from
ASCII to EBCDIC. However, some characters
cannot be translated.
When an untranslatable character is found, the
virtual printer substitutes a printable EBCDIC
character. The default character used is an
EBCDIC blank. (For details on the EBCDIC
character set, refer to Chapter 7, "The Transfer
Facility" in the PC Support/36 Technical
Reference. )
7-29
To change the character printed for
untranslatable characters, you must specify the
following:
PC Printer
The PC Printer prompt allows you to select the
printer for which you want to change the
untranslatable character. This prompt is
required. Type one of the possible choices in the
PC Printer input area and press the Enter key.
For example, the possible choices on the display
shown are 2 (printer LPT2) or 3 (printer LPT3).
Untranslatable character
This prompt allows you to specify the character
to be printed in place of an untranslatable
character. Refer to the PC Support/36 Technical
Reference for information about ASCII to
EBCDIC conversion tables.
The value you enter in this prompt must be a
2-byte hexadecimal value representing the
EBCDIC code for the character you want to be
substituted for any untranslatable character.
The value you' enter must be hexadecimal 40 or
greater; values below hexadecimal 40 are
unprintable on System/36 printers.
After you type a value for the Untranslatable
character prompt, press the Enter key. The new
value for the untranslatable character appears
on the top portion of the display, and a message
appears, confirming that the untranslatable
replacement value was set for the specified
printer.
7-30
~
You can now change the untranslatable
character for another printer, or press the Escape
key to return to the ADVANCED OPTIONS
menu.
Notes:
1. You can change the ASCII to EBCDIC
translation table using the translation table
utility. Refer to Chapter 8, "The Translation
Table Utility" in the PC Support/36
Technical Reference for details.
2. You should make sure that the character you
specify for the untranslatable character is a
printable character on the specific System/36
printer you are using. If not, unpredictable
results can occur.
Setting Command Override Mode
Personal computer printer data streams normally
have character strings imbedded within them to
set and change printer values, such as lines per
inch and characters per line. The Set command
override mode option allows you to specify
whether or not the personal computer printer
data stream should override the values for the
virtual printer previously specified using the
SETVPRT or CFGVPRT program.
7-31
You can use the Set command override mode
option to override the following parameters on
the printer commands. If you override any of
these parameters before you send a printable
character to the virtual printer, the override
takes effect.
After the current print file is closed, the
parameters you previously specified using the
SETVPRT or CFGVPRT programs are used.
You must specify the parameters you want to
override in each of the files in which you want
the overrides to take effect.
7-32
•
Lines per inch: You can specify either 6 or 8
lines per inch.
•
Characters per line: You can specify either
compress off for 80 characters per line or
compress on for 132 characters per line.
However, if your Characters per line
parameter is set to 198, then the compress on
and compress off commands will be ignored
by the virtual printer facility.
•
Page length: You can specify any number
from 1 through 127 lines.
•
Lines per page: You can specify any number
from 1 through the maximum number of lines
that will fit on a page.
~
To set command override mode, type a 4 (Set
command override mode) on the ADVANCED
OPTIONS menu and press the Enter key. The
following display appears:
. . . . - - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL PRINTER : COMHAND OVERRIDE----------,
Current Configuration
Syatem/38 printer ID
Printer type
Time-out value
Defer until finished
Untranslatable character
Collllllal'ld override
Printer data type
PC printer character set
LPT1
LPT2
LPT3
30
Yes
40
No
2
1
6219
10
Yes
40
No
2
1
----pf
6268/82
~
Type in requested information; press Enter.
ITEK
CHOICE
POSSIBLE CHOICES
• • • • ••
I
2=LPT1
3=LPT3
Command override! • • •
!
l=Yes
2=No
PC Printer
Fl=Help
Eso=Exlt to Advanoed OptiOns
59088712·3
PC Printer
The PC Printer prompt allows you to select the
printer for which you want to set the command
override mode. This prompt is required. Type
one of the possible choices in the PC Printer
input area and press the Enter key. For example,
the possible choices on the display shown are 2
(printer LPT2) or 3 (printer LPT3).
Command override?
This prompt allows you to specify whether or not
the personal computer printer data stream should
override the values previously specified for the
printer. Type a 1 (Yes) or a 2 (No) and press the
Enter key. If you do not type a value for this
prompt, the value displayed for this prompt is
used.
7-33
If you specify 1 (Yes) for the Command override
parameter, any Characters per line, Lines per
inch, Page length, and Lines per page parameters
specified in the printer data stream override
those values previously specified using
SETVPRT, those in the CONFIG.S36 file, or
those in the VPRT setup file you specified for the ~
current print file. This assumes the override
commands are received before a printable
character is received for the current print file.
When the current prinf'file is closed, the virtual
printer continues to use the values you
previously specified using the SETVPRT or
CFGVPRT programs.
Note: If you use printer commands before the
first print character of a print file to
change any of the assigned values (lines
per inch, characters per line, page length,
lines per page), the values are changed only
for that print file.
If you close the print file and open a new
one, the original values set for the virtual
printer remain in effect for the next print
file. You can change the values again by
sending printer commands before the first
print character, or by running the
SETVPRT or CFGVPRT program and
changing the values for that printer.
7-34
~
If you specify 2 (No) for the Command override
parameter, the values you specified when you
created the CONFIG.S36, the VPRT setup file, or
when you set or changed the virtual printer
configuration using SETVPRT are used.
After you type a value for this prompt, press the
Enter key. A message is displayed confirming
that command override was set for the specified
printer. You can now set the command override
mode for another printer, or press the Escape key
to return to the ADVANCED OPTIONS menu.
Setting Printer Data Type
CAUTION
You should exercise caution when changing
the printer data type. An incorrect choice of
data type can cause unpredictable results on
the printer you are sending data to. You
should not attempt to change the default
setting for the printer data type unless you
are certain that the data is in a format that
is usable by the intended printer. The
default setting for the printer data type is 2
(Convert PC data to 8/36). The options
available for setting printer data type are
described on the following pages.
7-35
The virtual printer allows a personal computer
printer data stream to be converted to a printer
data stream that can be used by a System/36
printer. However, certain functions of the
System/36 printers are not available through the
virtual printer. These functions have no
personal computer equivalent. For information
on these functions, refer to the IBM System/36
Functions Reference and the IBM PC Support/36
Technical Reference.
~
The use of the printer data type options allow
the user to take advantage of printer features
that are not otherwise available. A typical use
of the printer data type options would be to copy
a document file created in final form by
DisplayWrite 3 to a 5219 Printer attached to the
System/36. To do this, you would type a 3 (Final
form text) for the Printer data type prompt on
the display.
Note: For the example to work properly, the 5219
Printer must be set up as a virtual printer.
7-36
~
To set the printer data type, type a 5 (Set printer
data type) on the ADVANCED OPTIONS menu
and press the Enter key. The following display
appears:
, - - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL PRINTER: PRINTER DATA T Y P E - - - - - - - - ,
Current Cont1gyratipn
S;yate1l1l38 printer ID
Printer type
Tillie-out value
Deter unti 1 tinillhed
Untranslatable character
Command. override
Printer data type
PC printer character lIet
LPTl
t.fI2.
P1
5258/82
30
Yell
40
No
2
1
~
P4
5215
10
Yell
40
No
2
1
Type in requested intormation} preas Enter.
ITEM
CHOICE
PC Printer
•••••
Printer data type •
Fl=Help
POSSIBLE CHOICES
I
2=LPT2
.2
1=S/38 printer data
2=Convert PC data to S/38
3=Flnal torm text
4=PC printer data
3=LPT3
Ellc=Exi t to Advanced Options
59088713·4
PC Printer
The PC Printer prompt allows you to select the
virtual printer for which you want to change the
printer data type. This prompt is required. Type
one of the possible choices in the PC Printer
input area and press the Enter key. For example,
the possible choices on the display shown are 2
(printer LPT2) or 3 (printer LPT3).
7-37
Printer data type
This prompt allows you to specify which printer
data type option you want to use. Four options
are available, option 2 is the default setting.
1. S/36 printer data
Use this option to send a System/36 printer
data stream, unchanged, from the personal
computer to a System/36 printer. The printer
data stream must be formatted for the specific
printer you are sending data to. This option
allows the use of System/36 printer features
that are not used when the default setting,
option 2 is used.
Notes:
a. If the printer data stream is not correctly
set up by your program, unpredictable
results may occur.
b. This was formerly Transparent mode =
yes.
7-38
2. Convert PC data to 8/36
This option is the default when a virtual
printer is assigned. Use this option to send
data normally sent to an IBM Matrix, IBM
Graphics, or other compatible personal
computer printer to a System/36 printer. The
data will be converted to a printer data
stream that can be used by the System/36
printer.
Notes:
a. Only a subset of the capabilities of the
Matrix, Graphics, or other compatible
personal computer printer data streams are
supported. Refer to the IBM PC
Support/86 Technical Reference for more
information.
b. This was formerly Transparent mode = no.
7-39
3. Final form text
Use this option to send final form text to a
printer that supports final form text. The
printer data stream for the final form text
will be modified to take advantage of features
of the printer that are not available when the
default setting, option 2 is used. For example,
the simulated bold print and restart
capability features.
Notes:
a. The document must be created in final form
text to use this option. If not, unpredictable
results may occur.
b. This was formerly Transparent mode =
yes.
c. This option is also allowed on a IPDS
printer. However, the following commands
are not supported:
7-40
•
Tab
•
Set a Character Set
•
Justify
•
Bell
•
Set Printer Setup
4. PC printer data
Use this option to send a personal computer
printer data stream to a personal computer
printer. The ASCII printer data stream is
sent to the personal computer printer without
any changes. This option allows the use of
features on a personal computer printer
which is emulating a System/36 printer that
are not used when the default setting, option
2 is used and may not be available with
option 3.
Note:
For this option to work properly, the
personal computer attached to the
personal computer printer emulating a
System/36 printer must have one of the
following environments:
The Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program
Version 2.1 Service Updates, the
Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program,
and the Enhanced 5250 Emulation
adapter card. The Enhanced 5250
Emulation Program Version 2.1 Service
Updates Program is available if you
have version 2.1 of the Enhanced 5250
Emulation Program and release 5.0 of
the System/36 SSP. If you already
updated your Enhanced 5250 Emulation
Program earlier, you do not have to do
it again.
IBM Token-Ring Network and PC
Support/36 Workstation Feature.
7-41
To select the option you would like to use,
type a 1,2,3, or 4. If you do not type a value,
the value currently displayed for this prompt
is used. After you have made your selection,
press the Enter key. The new value for
printer data type appears in the top portion of
the display and a message appears confirming
that the printer data type was set for the
specified printer. You can now set the printer
data type for another printer, or press the
Escape key to return to the ADVANCED
OPTIONS menu.
Note:
7-42
When the alternate options for printer
data type are used (options 1, 3, or 4),
the printer data stream dictates the
printer configuration and the current
virtual printer configuration is ignored.
Selecting a Personal Computer
Printer Character Set
There are two printer character sets available
for the IBM Personal Computer Graphics
Printer. The character sets are identified as
Graphics Printer Character Set 1 or Graphics
Printer Character Set 2 in the PC Support/36
Technical Reference.
For character set 1, ASCII codes hexadecimal
80 through 9F are interpreted by the IBM
Personal Computer Graphics Printer as
printer commands. For character set 2,
hexadecimal 80 through 9F are interpreted as
printable characters.
Note:
ASCII values hexadecimal 80 through
9F are interpreted by the IBM Personal
Computer Matrix Printer as printer
commands.
7-43
Virtual printers default to character set 1.
This means that ASCII codes 80 through 9F
are converted to the appropriate printer
commands needed for a System/36 printer. If
your application is designed for an IBM
Personal Computer Graphics printer using
character set 2, you should change the virtual
printer from character set 1 to character set
2. ASCII codes 80 through 9F are then
converted to the appropriate EBCDIC
character set representation.
Note: It is also possible to select a character
set by sending a command to the
printer. To select character set 1, use
ESC 7. To select character set 2, use
ESC 6.
For example, in character set 1, hexadecimal
9B would be interpreted as the beginning of
the string of characters used as a command to
the printer. The 9B would normally be
followed by other characters, which would
define some action to be performed by the
printer. For example, 9B followed by 36
(Escape 6) would change the printer to
character set 2. When the virtual printer
detects the 9B, it waits for the next character
or characters to determine what command is
to be performed.
In character set 2, hexadecimal 9B is
interpreted as a character to be printed, and
the virtual printer translates the 9B to the
appropriate EBCDIC code.
7-44
~
To select character set 1 or 2, type a 6 (Select
PC printer character set) on the ADVANCED
OPTIONS menu and press the Enter key. The
following display appears:
, . . - - - - - - S E T VIRTUAL PRINTER: PC PRINTER CHARACTER
CUrrent Configuration
Systeml38 printer ID
Printer type
Time-out value
Defer unt11 f1nished
Untranslatable character
CoJllllland override
Printer data type
PC printer character set
LPTl
LPTZ
SET~-------,
---pf
5258/82
30
Yes
40
No
Z
1
LPT3
"""""'P4
5219
10
Yes
40
No
Z
1
Type in requested information; press Enter.
CHOICE
ITEM
PC Printer • • • •
PC printer
character set
P1-Help
POSSIBLE CHOICES
~
Z=LPTZ
1
1=character set 1
Z=character set 2
3=LPT3
Esc-Exit to Advanced Options
59088715-4
PC Printer
The PC Printer prompt allows you to specify
the virtual printer for which you want to
select the character set. This prompt is
required. Type one of the possible choices in
the PC Printer input area and press the Enter
key. For example, the possible choices on the
display shown are 2 (printer LPT2) or 3
(printer LPT3).
7-45
PC printer character set
This prompt allows you to specify whether
character set 1 or character set 2 is to be
used. Type a 1 (character set 1) or a 2
(character set 2) and press the Enter key. If
you do not type a value for this prompt, the
value displayed for this prompt is used.
After you press the Enter key, the new value
for the PC character set appears in the top
portion of the display, and a message appears
confirming the character set you selected for
the specified printer. You can now select the
character set for another printer, or press the
Escape key to return to the ADVANCED
OPTIONS menu.
Ending Advanced Options
To end the advanced options, type a 7 in the
ADVANCED OPTIONS menu and press the
Enter key, or press the Escape key. This
returns you to the OPTIONS menu. You can
then select other virtual printer options, or
select option 5"to end SETVPRT.
Note:
7-46
The changes take effect as soon as you
end the SETVPRT program.
~
Running the Automatic Virtual
Printer Program
If you want to use the same virtual printer
configuration every time you run a particular
application, you can have your virtual
printers automatically set up using the
automatic virtual printer program,
CFGVPRT. This prevents you from having to
step through the prompting sequence
described under "Running the Interactive
Virtual Printer Facility Program" earlier in
this chapter.
If you want to use the same virtual printer
configuration every time you power on or
restart your personal computer, you can
include the CFGVPRT command in a batch
file, such as an AUTOEXEC.BAT. For details
on creating an AUTOEXEC.BAT file to use
with PC Support/36, refer to the PC
Support/36 Technical Reference.
When the CFGVPRT program runs, it
searches for entries in the PC Support/36
configuration file, CONFIG.S36, or in a VPRT
setup file. For details on how to use the
CFGVPRT program, refer to Chapter 5, "The
Virtual Printer Facility" in the PC
Support/36 Technical Reference.
7-47
CFGVPRT
Purpose: This command starts the
automatic virtual printer facility.
Format:
[d:]CFGVPRT
[VPRT-setup-filename]
Remarks: d: specifies the name of the disk
or diskette drive where
CFGVPRT.COM resides. Type a
letter followed by a colon to
specify the drive. You need to
type the drive letter only if
CFGVPRT.COM is not in the
default drive.
VPRT -setup-filename specifies
the name of a file in which
CFGVPRT will search for VPRT
entries to process. The
VPRT-setup- filename is optional.
If not specified, CFGVPRT will
search the PC Support/36
configuration file, CONFIG.S36,
for VPRT entries.
~
The format of the
VPRT-setup-filename is:
[c:] [path] filename[. ext]
where:
c: specifies the drive where the
file containing the VPRT entries
resides. Type a letter followed by
a colon to specify the drive. If the ~
drive is not specified, the default
,
drive is assumed.
7-48
path specifies a path of directory
names. Type the directory names,
separated by backslashes (\). The
filename should be separated from
the last directory name by a
backslash (for example,
\DIRl \DIR2\FILEl). The first
backslash is optional. If used, it
tells DOS to begin with the root
directory.
If the path name is not specified,
the current directory is used.
filename specifies the name of the
file that contains the VPRT
entries. The filename can be from
1 to 8 characters .
. ext specifies the filename
extension. The extension consists
of a period and up to 3 characters.
The extension must immediately
follow the filename. This entry is
optional.
CFGVPRT ignores any parameters
after the VPRT-setup-filename
parameter.
Example:
The following command starts the
automatic virtual printer facility:
CFGVPRT
7-49
When you are ready to start the
automatic virtual printer facility,
type the CFGVPRT command and
press the Enter key.
When you press the Enter key, the
automatic virtual printer facility
program searches the CONFIG.S36
configuration file for virtual
printer (VPRT) entries to process.
Each of these entries is treated as
a request to assign or release a
virtual printer.
If you need to change the
configuration of your virtual
printer frequently, rather than
resetting the PC Support/36
configuration file (CONFIG.S36)
each time, you may add the
VPRT-setup-filename parameter to
the CFGVPRT command.
CFGVPRT will then look in the
VPRT-setup-file for VPRT entries
to process.
Note:
7-50
If you specify the
VPRT-setup-file,
CFGVPRT will search only
for VPRT entries in the
VP RT-setup-file.
CFGVPRT searches for any
other entries, such as A2ET
or E2AT, in the
CONFIG.S36 file. Any
VPRT entries in the
CONFIG.S36 file are
ignored.
For more information, refer to Chapter 5,
"The Virtual Printer Facility"in the PC
Support/36 Technical Reference.
The format of the VPRT setup file is the same
as the CONFIG.S36 file format with the
following exceptions:
1. The VPRT setup file does not require the
header record (Support/36) although it is
recommended that you include the header
record as the first record of the VPRT
setup file.
2. The only entries in the VPRT setup file
processed by CFGVPRT are VPRT entries.
Any other entries in the VPRT setup file
are ignored.
For details on how to place VPRT entries in
the VPRT setup file, refer to Chapter 2, "The
PC Support/36 Configuration File" in the PC
Support/36 Technical Reference.
7-51
Special Considerations
Although you can use a virtual printer as you
would use a personal computer printer, there
are some differences you should be aware of:
•
If you specify 198 for the Characters per
line parameter, then the following occurs.
Printing is done using 15 characters
per inch (cpi). Only certain System/36
printers, which support 15 cpi, allow
the use of the 198 Characters per line
option. You cannot specify 198
characters per line if a 3262, 4245, 5262,
5256, 5557, or 5553 Printer is being
used.
The compress on and compress off
printer commands will be ignored, even
if the command override option is
specified.
7-52
•
Compressed printing is done differently on
a virtual printer than on a personal
computer printer.
For the personal computer printer,
compress mode means that 132
characters per line should be printed,
rather than the normal 80 characters
per line. The personal computer
printer uses forms that are 8 inches
wide in either case.
For the virtual printer, compress mode
also means that 132 characters per line
should be printed, rather than the
normal 80 characters per line.
However, printing is done using 10
characters per inch in either case.
This means that wider forms must be
used on the System/36 printer for the
virtual printer when compress mode is
specified; otherwise, an entire print
line cannot be printed.
•
Most System/36 printers do not support
the emphasized printing available on a
personal computer printer. If emphasized
printing is specified for a virtual printer,
the printing is done using double strike.
•
Most System/36 printers do not support
the double width printing available on a
personal computer printer. If double
width printing is specified for a virtual
printer, the printing is expanded by
placing a blank after each character so
that the spacing is correct.
7-53
7-54
•
Most System/36 printers do not support
the superscript and subscript printing
available on the personal computer
printer. If either of these modes are
specified for a virtual printer, they are
ignored.
•
When you are using the default printer
data type (option 2, Convert PC data to
S/36), only data intended for the IBM
Matrix, IBM Graphics, or other
compatible personal computer printers
should be printed on a virtual printer.
Otherwise, unpredictable results could
occur.
•
You cannot change the font size within a
print file for a virtual printer, as you can
for a personal computer printer.
•
Using personal computer spoolers, such as
the DOS PRINT command, will cause
unpredictable results on a virtual printer.
•
If the System/a6 Spool utility is active on
the System/a6 and you specified yes for
Defer status for a virtual printer, your
output is not printed until the print file is
closed. If print spooling is not active on
the System/a6, or if you specified no for
Defer status, printing is started shortly
after your print file is opened, and the
System/a6 printer cannot be used by other
users until your print file is closed.
It is recommended that the System/a6
Spool utility be active when you use the
virtual printer facility.
•
The System/a6 COPYPRT procedure
cannot copy spool file entries that were
created by the virtual printer facility.
7-55
7-56
Chapter 8. Using the PC
Support/36 Transfer Facility
Contents
Introduction ...................... 8-2
Transfer Requests ................. 8-3
Transfer Facility Programs .......... 8-4
Transferring Data ................. 8-5
Using System/36 Files Defined by
IDDU Data Definitions .......... 8-6
Transferring Data Back to the
System/36 .................. 8-6
System/36 Files Not Defined by IDDU
Da ta Definitions or Library
Members ................... .8-10
Reserved Words .................. 8-13
8-1
Introd uction
The PC Support/36 transfer facility is a set of
programs that allow you to transfer data to or
from the personal computer. This chapter
~I
describes how to use these programs.
\.
Before you can operate the transfer facility,
you must start PC Support/36 following the
steps in Chapter 3, "Starting PC Support/36."
If you have not completed those steps, turn to
that chapter and follow the instructions.
8-2
Transfer Requests
To transfer data from or to the System/36, you
must create a transfer request. A transfer
request provides the necessary information
about the data you want to transfer.
When you create a transfer request, you
provide answers to such questions as the
following:
•
Where is the data located?
•
How much of the data is to be transferred?
•
How should the data be sorted?
•
Where do you want the data to be
transferred?
The transfer facility allows you to save a
transfer request so that the same information
can be used the next time you want to
transfer data. If you save a transfer request,
you can recall and modify or run it again.
8-3
Transfer Facility Programs
Transferring data from the System/36 to the
personal computer and from the personal
computer to the System/36 requires separate
sets of programs. There are interactive and
automatic programs to transfer data to the
personal computer, and interactive and
automatic programs to transfer data from the
personal computer.
~
The interactive transfer facility programs
prompt you, step-by-step, through creating,
recalling, modifying, or running a transfer
request. You can save the transfer request so
that it can later be recalled and used again.
The automatic transfer facility programs
automatically run a transfer request without
prompting. You must have previously created
and saved the transfer request using one of
the interactive transfer facility programs.
You are not prompted for information; the
program uses the information provided in the
previously created transfer request.
ff_.,
~
These programs are described in
Chapter 9, "Transferring Data from the
System/36 to the Personal Computer" and
Chapter 10, "Transferring Data from the
Personal Computer to the System/36."
c
8-4
Transferring Data
On the personal computer, data can be in
diskette or fixed disk files in one of six
formats, suitable for the specific personal
computer applications you are using. These
formats are:
•
ASCII text
•
DOS random
•
BASIC sequential
•
BASIC random
•
DIF
•
No conversion
On the System/a6, data can be in any of the
following:
•
Files that are defined by IDDU data
definitions
•
Files that are not defined by IDDU data
defini tions
•
Library source or procedure members
8-5
Using System/36 Files Defined by
IDDU Data Definitions
A System/36 file defined by IDDU data
definitions consists of records, which are
r4
comprised of fields. When you transfer data ~
from a file defined by IDDU data definitions
to the personal computer, you can select
which records and fields you want to transfer.
This means that, in most cases, only a subset
of the data in the System/36 file will be
transferred to your personal computer.
Transferring Data Back to the
System/36
This section contains information you should
be aware of if you plan to use data from
System/36 files defined by IDDU data
definitions in your personal computer
applications, and then transfer the data back
to the System/36.
If you transfer data from more than one
System/36 file to the personal computer using
a join function to the personal computer, you
may have to update the names of the fields in
the file description file. The name of a field
must not specify a file qualifier. If it does,
the name of the field must be changed to
match the IDDU data definition on the
System/36.
(
8-6
When you transfer the data from the
System/36 to the personal computer, you
should specify that you want to save the PC
file description. The PC file description
describes the data to be transferred to the
personal computer. This description serves
the same purpose on the personal computer as
an IDDU data definition does on the
System/36. The file description is saved in a
personal computer file to be used later when
you transfer the data back to the System/36.
When you transfer data back to the
System/36, you must transfer it to a System/36
file that already exists and is defined by
IDDU data definitions. It is recommended
that you do not transfer the data to the
System/36 file from which you originally
transferred the data, because this data
overlays the original data in the file. (The
data being transferred may be only a subset of
the original data.)
Instead, you should transfer the data to a
temporary System/36 file and run a System/36
application to incorporate the transferred
data into the original file. To ensure that no
transfer facility users transfer data to a
specific System/36 file, you should use
System/36 resource security.
The temporary System/36 file must be defined
by IDDU data definitions, containing field
definitions for each field being transferred.
You can link the temporary System/36 file to
the same IDDU file definition that the
original System/36 file is linked to, even if
that file definition contains more fields than
are being transferred.
8-7
The data is transferred to the appropriate
fields in the System/36 file. If the file
definition contains more fields than are being
transferred, the extra fields will contain
default values (zeros for numeric and
hexadecimal data, and blanks for character
data).
~
When using your personal computer
applications to work with data transferred
from a System/36 file defined by IDDU data
definitions, you must be careful not to
rearrange the data in'that file. For example,
if you transferred the System/36 data into an
ASCII text file, each field of data is located in
a specific column. If, while you are editing
the ASCII text file, you accidentally shift
data by one or more columns, the data cannot
be correctly transferred to the System/36.
You can add or delete records in your
personal computer file, but you should be
careful when adding new fields. Adding a
new field between two existing fields changes
the structure of the file.
To transfer the file to the System/36, you
must:
•
8-8
Use a personal computer editor to update
the file description file for the data file
you are using. The personal computer file
description file contains an ordered list of
all the fields in your personal computer
file. You must insert an entry for your
new field, so the transfer facility can
interpret the data in your personal
computer file correctly.
..
('II
~
Refer to Chapter 7, "The Transfer
Facility," in the PC Support/36 Technical
Reference for details on the personal
computer file description file.
•
You must make sure that the System/36
file to receive the transferred data has the
new field defined in the IDDU data
definition. If you add a new field to the
end of each record in the personal
computer file, you should consider the
following:
If your personal computer file is an
ASCII text, BASIC sequential, or DIF
file, you can transfer the original fields
to the System/36 file. However, the
new field will not be transferred unless
you define it in your personal
computer file description file, and in
the IDDU data definitions for the
System/36 file.
If your personal computer file is a DOS
random, BASIC random, or No
conversion file, you must define the
new field in the personal computer file
description file, and in the IDDU data
definition, just as if you added the new
field between two existing fields.
8-9
System/36 Files Not Defined by
/ IDDU Data Definitions or Library
Members
This section contains information you should
be aware of if you plan to transfer data to
and from System/36 files that are not defined
by IDDU data definitions or from library
members.
A System/36 file not defined by IDDU data
definitions or a library member can be viewed
as a file consisting of fixed-length records of
character data. There are no fields.
When you transfer data from such a file or
library member to the personal computer, you
must transfer entire records. You must also
transfer all of the records. The file on the
personal computer will be exactly the same as
the original System/36 file or library member.
8-10
~
If you plan to use your personal computer
applications to work with the data from a
System/36 file not defined by IDDU data
definitions or from a System/36 library
member, and then transfer the data back to
the System/36, you should consider the
following:
•
A System/36 file or library member has a
specific record length. If you change the
record length while working with the data
on the personal computer, you may have
to change the record length -of the
System/36 file or library member to
receive the transferred data. This is true
if your data is in a personal computer
DOS random, BASIC random, or No
conversion file.
However, ASCII text, BASIC sequential,
and DIF files support variable-length
records, and the transfer facility tries to
fit each record into the record length of
the System/36 file or library member. If
the personal computer data record is too
short, the data is padded with blanks. If
the record is too long, it is truncated.
8-11
•
•
If you are transferring data to a System/36
library member, and the library member
does not exist, the transfer facility creates
the member. The record length will be
assumed to be 96 for a source library
member and 120 for a procedure member.
If you want a different record length, you
must create the member yourself before
you transfer the data.
The decimal point used by the transfer
facility to display and print numbers and
to store numbers in ASCII text files is
obtained from DOS through a DOS
function call. Therefore, the decimal
point used by the transfer facility depends
on the version of DOS you are using.
If you are using DOS 3.0 or later, you can
change the decimal point by specifying a
COUNTRY command in the CONFIG.SYS
file. Refer to your IBM Personal
Computer Disk Operating System User's
Guide for more information.
8-12
C
rf,
~
Reserved Words
The following keywords cannot appear in a
file name or be used as field names in a
transfer request:
SELECT
FROM
WHERE
ORDER
BY
AND
OR
ASC
DESC
LIKE
EXTRACT
TABLES
COLUMNS
REPLACE
INTO
8-13
8-14
Chapter 9. Transferring Data
from the System/36 to the
Personal Computer
Contents
Introduction ......................
Running the Interactive
System/36-to-Personal Computer
Transfer Facility .................
Creating a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request ......
Specifying a System/36 File ....
Specifying a System/36 Library
Member ..................
Constants .................
Tests .....................
Specifying the Output Device to
Receive Transferred Data
Sending Output to the Display .
Sending Output to the Printer ..
Sending Output to a Disk .....
Joining Records from More Than
One System/36 File ............
File Qualifiers ..............
Joining More Than Two
System/36 Files ............
Transferring Data from More
Than One System/36 File .....
Modifying a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request ......
Running a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request ......
9-3
9-4
9-12
9-14
9-17
9-25
9-27
9-35
9-37
9-38
9-47
9-57
9-60
9-61
9-64
9-73
9-74
9-1
Displaying or Printing the
Format of Transferred Data
9-82
Saving the Personal Computer
File Description ........... . 9-86
Writing Transferred Records .. . 9-87
Saving a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request ..... . 9-89 ~
Recalling a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request ..... . 9-96
Name of Transfer Request to be Recalled 9-97
Erasing a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request ..... 9-101
Ending the System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Facility ...... . 9-101
Running the Automatic
System/36-to-Personal Computer
Transfer Facility .............. . 9-102
Error Messages .............. . 9-110
Incompatibilities from the Transfer
Facility PRPQ ................ . 9-111
9-2
Introduction
This chapter explains how to run the
interactive and automatic
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility programs, and how they can be used
to transfer data to the personal computer.
Before you can operate the transfer facility,
you must start PC Support/36 by following
the steps in Chapter 3, "Starting PC
Support/36." If you have not completed those
steps, turn to that chapter and follow the
instructions.
9-3
Running the Interactive
Systemf36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Facility
The interactive System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility program prompts
you, step-by-step, to supply information about
the data you want to transfer. The
information you supply is used to create a
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
request.
There are two commands you can use to start
the interactive System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility. These are TOPC
and RTOPC. Both commands have the same
format.
The TOPC command uses the IBM-supplied
batch file, TOPC.BAT, to start the PC
Support/36 programs required to transfer data
from the System/36 to the personal computer.
You should use the TOPC command to start
the System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility if you are starting it for the first time
since you powered on or restarted your
personal computer.
You can use the RTOPC command to start
the interactive System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility if you are not
starting it for the first time. The RTOPC
command assumes that the other programs
required to run the System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility have already been
started (using the TOPC command). The
RTOPC command runs faster than the TOPC
command.
9-4
Tope
Purpose: This command starts the
interactive System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility.
Format:
TOPC [transfer-request-filename]
[/x] [/y]
Remarks: transfer-request-filename
specifies the name of a transfer
request that was previously
created and saved using this
program (TOPC). The
transfer-request-filename is
optional.
If you specify a
transfer-request-filename, it is
automatically recalled so that you
can modify and/or run it. If you
do not specify the
transfer-request-filename, the
transfer facility assumes you want
to create a new transfer request.
The format of the
transfer-request-filename is:
[d:] [path] filename. [.ext]
where:
d: specifies the drive where the
file containing the transfer request
resides. Type a letter followed by
a colon to specify the drive. If the
drive is not specified, the default
drive is assumed.
9-5
path specifies a path of directory
names. Type the directory names,
separated by backslashes (\).
The file name should be separated
from the last directory name by a
backslash (for example,
\DIRI \DIR2\FILEl). The first
backslash is optional. If used, it
tells DOS to begin with the root
directory. The maximum length of
the path is 63 characters.
If the path name is not specified,
the current directory is used.
filename specifies the name of
the file that contains the transfer
request. The file name can be
from 1 to 8 characters .
.ext specifies the file name
extension. The extension consists
of a period and up to 3 characters.
The extension must immediately
follow the file name. This entry is
optional. If you do not specify an
extension, a default extension of
.TTO (transfer to) is used. If you
specify only a period (.) with no
characters following it, no
extension is used. It is
recommended that you use the
default extension, .TTO.
9-6
Ix specifies the type of display
you are using. This parameter is
optional; it tells the program what
attributes to send to your display.
Values you can specify for x are
an uppercase or lowercase M or C.
For details on what to specify for
this parameter, refer to
Chapter 2, "What You Should
Know before Operating PC
Support/36. "
Iy specifies the display writing
speed. This parameter is optional;
it tells the program what speed
your display should write at.
Values you can specify for yare
an uppercase or lowercase H or S.
For details on what to specify for
this parameter, refer to
Chapter 2, "What You Should
Know before Operating PC
Support/36. "
9-7
Examples:
The following command starts the interactive
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility without specifying any parameters.
TOPC
The following command starts the interactive
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility and automatically recalls the transfer
request in file CUSTREQ. TTO located in
drive A. A monochrome display attached to a
Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter card using
slow speed display writing is being used.
TOPC A:CUSTREQ/M/S
9-8
If you want to start the System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility with no parameters
specified, type:
Tope
then press the Enter key. The following
display appears:
_
.....
-- -.....
--------- - - -_.
... -- ..
-
...-
-~-
PC Support/38
SystemJ38 - to - Personal Computer Transfer Facility
. ._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-oPTIOINSII_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . .
Select one of these options; press Enter.
1 Create a transfer request
5 Recall a transfer request
8 Exit S/38-to-PC Transfer Facility
Select ==>
.!
' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - V e r s i o n 04.00 (0)
IBM Corp. 1987
59088601-5
This display allows you to create or recall a
transfer request, or exit the
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility.
9-9
For details on how to create or recall a
transfer request, refer to "Creating a
System/36-to-Personal Computer Transfer
Request" and "Recalling a
System/36-to-Personal Computer Transfer
Request," later in this chapter. For examples
of how you can transfer data from the
System/36 to the personal computer, refer to
Chapter 4, "Tutorial."
If you want to start the System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility and work with an
existing transfer request, type the TOPC
command followed by the
Transfer-request-filename parameter, then
press the Enter key. The following display
appears:
-....
....
_
.....
---.....,---- -- -- -..,
-,...,_-.
.-
~
-..a.
...
-~
PC Support/36
System/36 - to - Personal Computer
Trans~er
Facility
. . .- - - -_ _ _ _ _ _ OPTIOINSII_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. .
Select one ot these options; press Enter.
1 Create a trans~er request
2 Modi~ the current trans~er request
3 Run the current trans~er request
5 Recall a trans~er request
6 Exit S/36-to-PC Trans~er Facility
Select ===> ..2
Version 04.00 (c) IBM Corp. 1987---
~-------------------------------
S9088602-5
9-10
The transfer request you specified on the
TOPC command is automatically recalled and
ready for you to use. From this display, you
can create a new transfer request, modify or
run the specified transfer request, or you can
recall another transfer request.
For details, refer to "Creating a
System/36-to-Personal Computer Transfer
Request," "Modifying a
System/36-to-Personal Computer Transfer
Request," "Running a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request," and "Recalling
a System/36-to-Personal Computer Transfer
Request," later in this chapter.
For examples of how you can transfer data
from the System/36 to the personal computer,
refer to Chapter 4, "Tutorial."
9-11
Creating a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request
This section describes how to create a
transfer request to transfer data from the
System/36 to the personal computer. The
transfer requests described in this section
transfer data from only one System/36 file.
For additional information about transferring
data from more than one System/36 file, refer
to "Joining Records from More Than One
System/36 File" later in this chapter.
Mter you create a transfer request, you can
use the OPTIONS menu to modify, save, or
run it.
The transfer request you create remains the
current transfer request until you specify 1
(Create a transfer request), 5 (Recall a
transfer request), or 6 (Exit
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility).
Note:
9-12
If you want to save the current transfer
request, you must save it before you
create or recall another transfer request
or end the transfer facility. Otherwise,
the current transfer request is deleted.
If you specify 1 (Create a new transfer
request) from the OPTIONS menu, the
following FROM prompt appears:
Fl=Help
~
.
K
~
F
. - - - - - - - - - - S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER : C R E A T ' E - - - - - - - - - - - ,
S/38 1'11e(lI) or library member nam.e
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
F2=Lll1t
F3=Run
F4=Save
F10=New Line
Ellc=Optlorus
89088667-2
FROM
This prompt is required. It identifies the
name of the System/a6 file(s) or library
member from which records are to be
transferred. From this display you can:
•
Press the F1 key to display help text
•
Press the F2 key to display a list of items
for the FROM, SELECT, WHERE, JOIN
BY, or ORDER BY prompt
•
Press the Fa key to run the transfer
request
9-13
•
Press the F4 key to save the transfer
request
•
Press the Escape key to return to the
OPTIONS menu
Specifying a System/36 File
If you want to specify a System/36 file in the
FR,OM prompt, the format of this prompt
depends on whether or not the file is defined
by IDDU (interactive data definition utility)
data definitions.
Specifying a File Defined by IDDU
Data Definitions
If the file is defined by IDDU data definitions,
you must specify the file name as follows:
file-label [/format-name]
where:
file-label is the name of the file defined by a
file definition. The file-label is required.
format-name is the name of a format
definition that defines the records in the file.
The format name is needed only if there is
more than one format definition for the file.
If you specify the format name, you must
separate it from the file label with a slash (J).
If you do not specify the format name, and
there is more than one format definition for
the file, PC Support/36 uses the first format
definition in the IDDU file definition.
9-14
If you do not know the file label, you can
press the F2 key while the FROM prompt is
blank to display a list of all of the file labels
for all System/a6 files defined by IDDU data
definitions. This list appears as follows:
r - - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - ,
S/38 f'11e or library melDber name
FROM
•
FILE
PAYROLL
CUSTKAST
INVENT01
INVENT02
ITEKKST
SUPPLY01
SUPPLY02
SUPPLY03
CUSTCDT
F9=Select
Fl=Help
LIST FOR FRO
TEXT
Department Payro 11 Fi 1 e
Kaster Customer List
Inventory t11e #1
Inventory t11 e #2
Item Kaster File
Supplier t11e #1
SUpplier f'11e #2
Supplier f'lle #3
Customer charse ti 1 e
t/~
F2=L1st
=Scroll
F3=Run
RECL
0140
0098
1140
1140
0540
0120
0120
0120
0080
Esc=Exi t List
F4=Save
Fl0=New L1ne
89088604-1
Note:
The list you display will not look
exactly like the one shown here. The
actual file labels listed depend on the
files defined on your System/36.
You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys or the Page Up and Page Down keys to
find the desired file label, then press the F9
key to select it. This automatically copies the
file label from the list to the FROM input
area.
9-15
If you do not know what format name to
specify, you can press the F2 key when the
FROM prompt contains a file label. The
cursor should be positioned immediately after
the file label. This displays a list of all the
format names for the file. You can select a
format name from the list the same way you
selected a file label. This automatically
copies the format name to the FROM input
area and separates it from the file label by a
slash (f).
To end the list without selecting an item,
press the Escape key.
For information about using the IDDU, refer
to the System/36 manual Getting Started with
the Interactive Data Definition Utility .
Specifying a File Not Defined by IDDU
Data Definitions
If the file is not defined by IDDU data
definitions, the file must be specified in the
FROM prompt as follows:
file-label
where file-label is the name of the file on the
System/36. The file label is required.
You cannot use the F2 key to list files that
are not defined by IDDU data definitions.
Pressing the F2 key lists file labels only for
System/36 files defined by IDDU data
definitions.
9-16
Specifying a System/36 Library
Member
You can specify a System/a6 library member
name in the FROM prompt. The library
member name must be specified as follows:
library-name/member-type/member-name
where:
library-name is the name of the System/a6
library.
member-type is the type of System/a6
member. You can enter either S for source or
P for procedure. The member type is
required, and must be separated from the
library name by a slash (/).
member-name is the name of a member in
the specified library. The member name is
required, and must be separated from the
member type by a slash (/).
When you are transferring data from a
System/a6 library member, you must type the
name of the library in the FROM prompt.
You cannot use the F2 key to list library
names.
After you type the library name, you can use
the F2 key to list all of the member types and
member names of all source and procedure
members in the library.
9-17
Pressing the F2 key after you type the library
name and member type displays a list of the
member names in the library having the
specified member type.
You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys or the Page Up and Page Down keys to
position the highlighting on a member type
and/ or member name, and press the F9 key to
select it. This copies the information from
the list to the FROM input area and
automatically separates the items by slashes
(/).
Note:
You can use the FROM prompt to
specify more than one System/36 file.
Refer to "Joining Records from More
Than One System/36 File" later in this
chapter for more information.
After you complete the FROM prompt, press
the Enter key.
If you specified the name of a file that is not
defined by IDDU data definitions, or if you
specified the name of a System/36 library
member, you cannot specify the SELECT,
WHERE, JOIN BY, and ORDER BY prompts
described in the following sections. Simply
press the Enter key to skip these prompts.
Then refer to "Specifying the Output Device
to Receive Transferred Data" later in this
section.
9-18
If you specified the name of a file defined by
IDDU data definitions, the FROM prompt
remains on the display and the SELECT
prompt appears as follows:
...--_ _ _ _ _ _ S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER: CREATE--_ _ _ _-.
P~K
~~~ei~~~T~8~(*~8e~le=ot=8~a~1l~t=1=el~~~)----------
SELECT .:,.*_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
P1-Help
F2=List
P3=Run
P4=Save
P10=New Line
Esc=Optlons
S9088605-1
SELECT
This prompt is required if you chose a file
defined by IDDU data definitions. It
identifies which fields in the record to
transfer. The fields you specify must be
defined in the file definition. If the file
definition contains more than one record
format, the fields in the record you want to
transfer must be defined by the format you
previously selected in the FROM prompt.
You can specify the same field more than
once, if desired. However, the maximum
number of fields that you can select is 60.
9-19
If you want to transfer all the fields in the
record, press the Enter key. The default
value, asterisk (*), is assumed. (The asterisk
specifies to transfer all the fields in the
record.)
Note:
You can only transfer up to 60 fields.
If there are more than 60 fields defined
for the file, you cannot specify the
asterisk. You must specify the names of
the fields you want to transfer.
If you want to transfer selected fields in the
record, type the names of the fields in the
order that you want them arranged. One or
more blanks can be added between the names
of the fields to improve readability of the
SELECT prompt. However, the names must
be separated by commas, as follows:
ITEMNO, QOHAND, PRICE
or
ITEMNO,QOHAND,PRICE
9-20
If all the names of the fields do not fit on one
SELECT input area line, the transfer facility
automatically creates another line, or you
can create another line by pressing the FlO
key. When continuing the SELECT prompt
on another input area line, a field name must
be typed entirely on one input line. A field
name cannot be split between two input area
lines.
If you do not know the names of the fields
you want, you can press the F2 key when the
cursor is in the SELECT input area to display
a list of all the names of the fields in the
record. For example:
. - - - - - - - - - S / 3 S - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - - ,
F~
SEUCT
~~~e7i~~D~T~s~(~.-s-e71e-c~ts-a~ll~~i~e71~~)------------~.
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
. ._ _ _ _ _ _ _.t.IST FOR,SELECT' _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . .
~~ _TY_P~
LSTNAH
INIT
STREET
CITY
STATE
ZIPCOD
CDTLKT
CHGCOD
BALDUE
CDTDUE
_LENG_TH_
s
_DI_G_IT_:
8
3
13
S
2
5
4
1
S
S
0
0
0
0
0
5
4
1
S
8
C
C
C
C
C
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
D_E_CI_KALS_
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
:::.:~:;::x~io~m~er:::-:':':numb=-:-:er:--=ti;-:::e.-:ld:;--Last name tield
First and middle initial tield
Street address tield
City tield
State abbreviation tield
Zip code tield
Credit limit tield
Charge code ~leld
Balance due ~ield
Credi t due ti eld
---------------------------------------------------------------------
F9=Select t/.=Scroll
Fl=Help
F3=Run
Ctrl_I_=Page
F4=Save
~
~
Esc=Exlt List
Fl0=New Line
59088608-1
9-21
This display contains the following
informa tion:
FIELD
TYPE
This column contains the
names of the fields in the
records to be transferred.
These names are listed in the
order in which they appear in
the record.
This column contains a
character code that
corresponds to the type of
System/36 data.
The following are System/36
data codes and their
corresponding data types:
9-22
B
Binary
C
EBCDIC character
H
Hexadecimal
P
Packed decimal in
EBCDIC format
Z
Zoned decimal in
EBCDIC format
~
LENGTH
This column contains the
length (in bytes) of the fields
on the System/36.
DIGITS
This column contains the
maximum number of digits that
the field can contain. The
number of digits can be from 1
through 15. The sign and
decimal point are not included.
DECIMALS This column contains the
number of decimal positions for
binary, EBCDIC zoned, or
EBCDIC packed data. The
number of decimal positions
can be from 0 through 9.
TEXT
This column contains a
description of the field for your
information only.
You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys or the Page Up and Page Down keys to
position the highlighting on the desired name,
then press the F9 key to select it. This copies
the name you select from the list to the .
SELECT input area. You can repeat this
procedure to copy additional names. The
names are copied to the SELECT prompt and
automatically separated by commas.
9-23
After you complete the SELECT prompt, press
the Enter key. The SELECT prompt remains
on the display and the WHERE prompt
appears, as follows:
. - - - -_ _ _ _ S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER: CREATE _ _ _ _ _----,
F~K
SELECT
~~==TC=DT~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
~NUK.LSTNAK.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
aona1tlon(s) to be met (optIonal)
MmRE
F1=Help
.~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
F2=L1st
F3=Run
F4=Save
F10=New Line
Esc=Options
59088607-1
WHERE
This prompt is optional. It identifies which
records are to be transferred. You can use
this prompt to specify one or more conditions
that must be met by the record in order for it
to be transferred.
A condition specifies a test against which the
records in the file are to be applied. All of
the records in the file are tested against the
conditions you specify, and only the records
that pass the test are transferred.
If you do not specify the WHERE prompt, all
of the records matching the IDDU format
definition for the file are transferred.
9-24
The format of a condition is:
fieldname test value
where:
fieldname must be the name of a field
defined in the IDDU data definition.
test is the type of comparison to be applied to
the field. Refer to "Tests," later in this
chapter, for a list of tests you can use.
value can be the name of a field or a
constant. The constant can be either a
number or a character string enclosed in
single quotes. Numbers should not include
commas.
If you specify a character field for the field
name, value must be the name of a character
field or a character string constant. If the
lengths of the field and value are not equal,
blanks are added to the rightmost end of the
shorter field.
If a numeric field is specified for the field
name, value must be the name of a numeric
field or a numeric constant. The transfer
facility compares numeric fields by aligning
the fields on the decimal point. Zeros are
added where digits are missing.
Constants
You can specify a character string or a
number as a constant.
9-25
Character Strings
A character string must be enclosed in single
quotes. For example:
'JOHN'
To represent an apostrophe within a
character string, use two single quotes. For
example:
'JOHN"S'
Note:
Although the personal computer
keyboard has a left quote (') and a right
quote (,), only the right quote (') is
supported by the transfer facility.
If the character string is shorter than the
specified field, blanks are added to the
rightmost end of the string. If the character
string is longer than the specified field, an
error occurs. A search is made for the exact
characters you specify. That is, if you specify
only uppercase characters, a search is made
only for uppercase letters. If you specify only
lowercase characters, a search is made only
for lowercase letters.
A character string can also be specified in
hexadecimal notation by typing the EBCDIC
hexadecimal representation of the character
string enclosed in quotes, preceded by the
character, X. For example:
X'DID6C8D5'
You can use hexadecimal representation
when the character string contains
nondisplayable characters.
9-26
Numbers
A number may include an optional sign (+ or
-) and/or an optional decimal point. The
following are examples:
5
-.05
1000.00
+5.00
Numeric fields are compared by aligning the
fields on the decimal point. Zeros are added
where digits are missing.
Tests
The following tests are supported and can be
preceded or followed by one or more blanks:
<>or><
>
>=
<
<=
LIKE
Equal
Not equal (see note 1)
Greater than
Greater than or equal
Less than
Less than or equal
Field like the one specified
Notes:
1. The personal computer keyboard does not
support the NOT sign (-,) for not equal
(-, =). Instead, you must type the less than
and greater than symbols together
> or
> <).
«
2. All tests use the EBCDIC collating
sequence.
9-27
The LIKE test searches the field you specified
in fieldname for the character pattern you
specified in value. The specified field must
be a character field.
Value must be a character string constant.
The string may contain any character. The
percent (0/0) character represents any'
character string of zero or more characters.
The underline (_) character represents any
single character.
The following examples illustrate the use of
the LIKE test:
NAME LIKE '%ANNE%'
searches for any name that contains the
character string ANNE, such as SUZANNE,
ANNETTE, ANNE.
NAME LIKE' ANNE 0/0'
searches for any name that starts with the
character string ANNE, such as ANNETTE.
NAME LIKE '%ANNE'
searches for any name that ends with the
character string ANNE, such as ANNE, or
SUZANNE.
NAME LIKE '_AO/o'
searches for any name that has a second
letter equal to A.
9-28
~
If the pattern does not include the percent
character (%), the length of the character
string must equal the field length.
Note:
A search is made for the exact
characters you specify. That is, if you
specify uppercase characters, a search is
made only for uppercase letters. If you
specify lowercase characters, a search is
made only for lowercase letters.
Tests can be connected with a logical AND or
OR. When both AND and OR are specified,
AND comparisons are made first. For
example:
MONTH=2 AND LOC='MIAMI' OR
LOC = 'CHICAGO'
means that each record selected must satisfy
the test:
MONTH=2 AND LOC='MIAMI'
or
LOC = 'CHICAGO'
You can use parentheses to change the order
of the operation. For example:
MONTH = 2 AND (LOC='MIAMI' OR
LOC = 'CHICAGO')
means that each record selected must satisfy
the test:
MONTH = 2
and
LOC = 'MIAMI' OR LOC = 'CHICAGO'
9-29
If you do not know the names of the fields in
the record definition, you can press the F2
key. This displays a list of all the names of
the fields in the record definition. For
example:
,..--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER: CREATE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--,
FROM
SELECT
CUSTCDT
Fieldnalnes (. selects all fields)
•
rndition(B)
to be lIlet (optional)
WHERE
LIST FOR WHERE
FIELD
CUSNUH
LSTNAK
INIT
STREET
CITY
STATE
ZIPCOD
TYPE
-Z
C
C
C
C
C
Z
LENGTH
--8
8
3
13
8
2
5
DIGITS
--8
0
°
°0
:°1
DECIMALS
0
°°°
°
°°
TEXT
Customer number field
Last name field
First and middle initial field
Street address field
City field
State abbrev1ation field
Zip code field
~
f
~
~_ _ ~_ _ _ _~_ _ _ _~ _ _ _ _ _ ~ _ g~:~:f~fr ___________..
F9=Select
F1=Help
Ctrl_I-+=Page
F3=Run
F4=Save
Esc=Exit List
I
FI0=New Line
59088610-1
You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys or the Page Up and Page Down keys to
find the desired field name, then press the F9
key to select it. This copies the name of the
field from the list to the WHERE input area.
When value is a field name, you can select
value from the list in the same way you
selected the field name, or you can type the
value and the test on the WHERE input area
line. You must type any desired AND, OR, or
parentheses.
9-30
If the entire condition does not fit on one
WHERE input area line, the transfer facility
automatically creates another input area line,
or you can create another line by pressing the
FlO key.
A comparison can begin on one line and end
on the next line. However, the field name
cannot begin on one line and end on the next
line. The field name must be all on one line.
If the value is a character string enclosed in
quotes, it can begin on one line and end on
another.
Mter you complete the WHERE prompt, press
the Enter key. The WHERE prompt remains
on the display and the ORDER BY prompt
appears, as follows:
'~r-------S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - - ,
FROM
CUSTCDT
SELECT
WHERE
O~ERM
Fl-Help
CUSNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
F1eldna2lles to sort by ( optional)
~.
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
F2-Llst
F3-Run
F4=Save
Fl0=New Line
Esc=Options
S9088609-1
9-31
ORDER BY
This prompt is optional. It identifies the
order in which the records you request are to
be sorted. Up to five fields can be specified in
the ORDER BY prompt.
The records are sorted in the order they
would be on the System/36 (EBCDIC order).
This means that lowercase characters would
appear before upperc)tS€'characters, and
characters before numbers.
If you do not specify the ORDER BY prompt,
the records are transferred in no special
order. The order might vary each time you
run the transfer request.
Records are sorted according to the first field
specified. Records with duplicate values of
the first field specified are, in turn, sorted by
the second field specified, and so forth.
For example:
DEPT ,NAME,PHONE
specifies that the records are to be sorted first
by DEPT. Next, the records with the same
DEPT are sorted by NAME. The records
with the same NAME are then sorted by
PHONE.
9-32
The names of fields specified in the ORDER
BY prompt must also be specified in the
SELECT prompt, or SELECT * must be
specified.
Each field can be sorted in ascending or
descending order. To do this, type the field
name followed by a blank, then ASC or
DESC. ASC is the default value. For
example:
DEPT DESC,NAME ASC
means to sort by DEPT in descending order
first, then by NAME in ascending (or
alphabetical) order.
Pressing the F2 key displays a list of all the
fields that you specified in the SELECT
prompt. For example:
r - - - - - - - - s / 3 8 - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - . . .
F~K
SELECT
WHERE
O~ERM
~~~S~re~D~T
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
~NUK~LSTNAK~STREET,CITY.STATE,ZIPCOD.BALDUE
~>100000
AND BALDUE>100
Fieldnames
sort
by_
(optional)
_1
_ _ _ _ to
__
__
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
. -_ _ _ _ _ _ _.-LIST FOR SELECT
l:llUJI
~
LSTNAK
STREET
CITY
STATE
ZIPCOD
BALDUE
TYPE
Z
C
C
C
C
Z
Z
LENGTH
--8
8
13
8
2
5
8
DIGITS
8
0
0
0
DECIMALS
----0
0
0
0
Or
0
5
0
8
2
TEXT
CuatolD."r nulD.ber tield
Last nalD.e field
Street address field
City tield
Stat" abbreviation tield
Zip code tield
Balance due field
;;:;~~ ~~~- -~~;~:.~ =::;~~ --;~~:;:~ ~ -~~~~-
Fl=Help
F3=Run
F4=Save
tr
I
__
-----------------------------i
FI0=New Line
59088628-1
9-33
You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys or the Page Up and Page Down keys to
find the desired field name, then press the F9
key to select it. The name is copied from the
list to the ORDER BY input area. You can
repeat this procedure to copy additional
names. The names are copied to the ORDER ~
BY input area and automatically separated by ~
commas.
If all the names of the fields do not fit on one
line, the transfer facility automatically
creates another line, or you can create
another line by pressing the FlO key. When
continuing the ORDER BY prompt on
another line, a field name must be typed
entirely on one line. A field name cannot be
split between two input lines.
If you want descending order, you must type a
blank and DESe after the name of the field.
Otherwise, the default value, ASe, is
assumed. If you are continuing the ORDER
BY prompt on another line, remember that
the entire name of the field must be typed on
one line. Likewise, ASe and DESe must be
typed entirely on one line.
9-34
Specifying the Output Device to
Receive Transferred Data
After you complete the FROM, SELECT,
WHERE, and ORDER BY prompts, press the
Enter key. The following display appears:
, - - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - ,
F~M
SELECT
WHERE
O~ERM
=am==Tc=D~T
amNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
~am==NUK~
ITEM
Output device • •
F1=Help
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
amNUK,LSTNAK,STREET,CITY,STATE,ZIPCOD,BALDUE
F3=Run
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
CHOICE
• • l.
F4=Save
POSSIBLE CHOICES
1-Display 2-Printer
3-Dlsk
Esc=Options
59088611·1
9-35
Output device
When this display appears, you must specify
the output device that you want to receive
the transferred data. You can specify any of
the following:
•
1 (Display) specifies that the personal
computer display is to receive the output.
•
2 (Printer) specifies that a personal
computer printer or a virtual printer is to
receive the output.
•
3 (Disk) specifies that a personal computer
disk, diskette, or a virtual disk is to
receive the output.
1 (Display) is the default value.
After you type a number for the output
device, press the Enter key.
9-36
Sending Output to the Display
If you specify 1 (Display) for the output
device and press the Enter key the transfer
request is created and the following
OPTIONS menu appears:
, - - - - - - - - - - S/38-TO-PC T R A N S F E R _ - - - - - - - - - - - ,
F~K
~~~T=~~T~
SELECT
WHERE
O~ERBY
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
CUSHUH.LSTKAK.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
CUSHUH> 100000 AND BALDUE> 100
~~==mm~
_______________________
lTEK
CHOICE
POSSIBLE CHOICES
Output device • •
1-Display :a-Printer 3-D111k
. !
. .- - - - - - - - - I O : P T I O : N S :_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. .
Select one of these optionsJ press Enter.
1 Create a transfer request
2 Modi ty the current transfer request
3 Run the current tranafer request
4 Save the current transfer request
5 Recall a transfer request
8 Exit S/38-to-PC Transfer Facil1ty
Select =>
~
59088612·1
To display the output, select option 3 (Run
the current transfer request), then press the
Enter key. The transfer request runs, and the
output appears on your personal computer
display.
9-37
Sending Output to the Printer
You can send transferred data to a personal
computer printer or to a virtual printer. The
following prompts allow you to specify how
you want the printed output to look. If you
are printing the data, on a virtual printer, you
should consider the fQllowing when you
respond to the promp~s:
•
You should always set the virtual printer
to six lines per inch when running
transfer requests.
•
If you specified no for the command
override for a virtual printer (refer to
section "Setting Command Override
Mode" in Chapter 7, "Using the PC
Support/36 Virtual Printer Facility"):
The value you enter for the Line
length prompt should be the same as
the characters per line you specified
for the virtual printer.
The value you enter for the Page
length prompt should be the same as
the page length and the number of
lines per page you specified for the
virtual printer. The page length and
number of lines per page must be equal
to each other for the virtual printer.
9-38
•
If yes is specified for command override:
When the print file is initially opened,
it is set to the characters per line and
the page length that you specified in
the transfer request.
If the print file remains open between
running transfer requests, all requests
are printed using the values for the
first request.
If the print file is closed by a time-out
after a transfer request runs, the next
file that is opened will have the same
values as specified for the current
transfer request being run.
This ensures that the output is printed on the
virtual printer just as if you had printed it on
the personal computer printer.
9-39
When you specify 2 (Printer) for the Output
device pro~pt and press the Enter key, the
following display appears:
. - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - - ,
F~K
SELECT
WHERE
O~ER~
~am==TC=D~T
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
amNUK,LSTNAK,STREET,CITY,STATE,ZIPCOD,BALDUE
amNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
=am=NUK==_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
ITEK
OUtput device
CHOICE
••
Printer device • •
F1=Help
F3=Run
••
~
...!
F4=Save
POSSIBLE CHOICES
l=Display 2=Prlnter
1=LPTl
2=LPT2
3=Dlsk
3=LPT3
Esc=Options
59088613-1
Printer device
This prompt is required. It allows you to
specify which of the three available printers
should receive the output. One of the
following must be specified:
1 (printer LPTl)
2 (printer LPT2)
3 (printer LPT3)
1 (LPTl) is the default value.
9-40
Refer to the IBM Personal Computer Disk
Operating System manual for a description of
LPTl, LPT2, and LPT3. If you are using the
PC Support/36 virtual printer facility, refer to
Chapter 7, "Using the PC Support/36 Virtual
Printer Facility," for information on how to
define printers LPTl, LPT2, and LPT3.
After you complete the Printer device prompt,
press the Enter key. The Line length prompt
appears, as follows:
. - - - - - - - - - S / 3 6 - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - . . . .
FROM
=CU=S..:.;:TC=DT=---_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
SELECT
CUSNUH.LSTNAH.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
WHERE
O~ER~
CUSNUH>100000 AND BALDUE>100
=CUS=NUH==_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
ITEM
Output device
••
Printer device •
Line 1 ength
F1=Help
.
• .1
• • • • • •
F3=Run
CHOICE
~
F4=Save
POSSIBLE CHOICES
1=Display 2=Printer
1 =LPT1
~
2=LPT2
3=Disk
3=LPT3
80. 132 characters
Esc=Options
59088655-2
9-41
Line length
This prompt is required. It specifies the
length of the print line, in characters. One of
the following must be specified:
80 characters per line
132 characters per line
The default value is 80 characters per line.
After you complete the Line length prompt,
press the Enter key. The Truncate records
prompt appears, as follows:
. - - - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P C TRA1I1SFER : C R E A T E - - - - - - - - - - .
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
F~M
=mm==TC=D~T
SELECT
CUSNUK.LSTNAK.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
WHERE
CUSNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
O~ERBY
=mm==NUK~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
ITEM
CHOICE
outpt.tt device
·~
•
POSSIBLE CHOICES
1=Display 2=Pr1nter
Printer device • •
• .1
l-LPTl
Line 1 ength
.~
80. 132 characters
• .1
l=Yes
• •
Truncate recorda?
F1=Help
F3=Run
F4=Save
2-LPT2
3=D1slc
3-LPT3
2=No
Esc=OptlonB
S9088656-0
9-42
Truncate records?
This prompt is required. A transferred record
may require more print positions than are
available on one print line.
This prompt allows you to specify whether
you want to print as much of the record as
possible on one line and truncate the
remaining information, or whether you want
to print the record on more than one line.
One of the following must be specified:
1 (Yes), if you want as much of the record
as possible to print on one line, including
partial fields, and have the remaining data
in the record truncated
2 (No), if you want to print the entire
record on multiple lines
The default value is 1 (Yes).
Note:
If you specify 2 (No) and a field would
not fit on the current line, the entire
field is printed at the beginning of the
next line. However, if the field length
is greater than the length of the print
line, the field is printed starting on the
current line and continued across as
many lines as required.
9-43
After you complete the Truncate records
prompt, press the Enter key. The Headings
prompt appears as follows:
. - - - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P C TRANSFER: CREATE------------,
FROM
CUSTCDT
SELECT
CUSNUK.LSTNAK.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
WHERE
ORDER BY
CUSNUK>lOOOOO AND BALDUE>lOO
~CUS==NUK~~
ITEM
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
.
Output device
CHOICE
POSSIBLE CHOICES
~
l=Display
2=Printer
Printer device •
•• .1
l=LPTl
Line lensth
..
80. 132 characters
••
Headings. • • • •
Fl=Help
F3=Rtln
~
• .1
Truncate records?
• • .!
F4=Save
l=Yes
2=LPT2
3=Disk
3=LPT3
2=No
l=Qn all pages
2=Firat page only
Esc=Options
59088657·1
9-44
Headings
This prompt is required. It specifies whether
column headings are to be printed. Column
headings are the field names you specified in
the SELECT prompt.
One of the following must be specified:
1 (On all pages), if you want headings
printed on all pages
2 (First page only), if you want a heading
only on the first page
The default value is 1 (On all pages).
After you complete the Headings prompt,
press the Enter key. The Page length prompt
appears, as follows:
. - - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - - - ,
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
F~M
~~~TC=D~T
SELECT
CUSNUM.LSTNAK.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
WHERE
~NtJM>100000
O~ERBY
~~==NtJM~
ITEM
OUtput device
AND BALDUE>100
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
CHOICE
••
••
~
POSSIBLE CHOICES
l=Dlsplay 2=Prlnter
Printer device • •
...!
1 =LPT1
Line length
••
80. 132 characters
• ••
~
2=LPT2
Truncate records?
• .!
1=Yes
Headinss • • • • •
• ..!
1=On all pages
Page length
Fl=Help
• ••
F3=Run
••
F4=Save
~
3=Dlsk
3=LPT3
2=No
2=First page only
1-127 lines
Esc=Opt1ons
59088658-1
9-45
Page length
This prompt is required. It specifies the
number of lines on one printed page. The
page length can be from 1 to 127 lines,
depending on the size of the paper.
Six lines are printed per inch. To determine
the page length in lines, multiply the page
length (from perforation to perforation) in
inches by six. For example, if the length of a
page measures 11 inches and you multiply by
six, the page length is 66.
Specify a number from 1 to 127; 66 is the
default value. After you complete the Page
length prompt, press the Enter key.
The transfer request is created and the
following OPTIONS menu appears:
S/38-TO-PC TRANSFE
FROM
CUSTCDT
SELECT
CUSNUM. LSTNAH. STREET. CITY. STATE. ZIPCOD. BALDUE
WHERE
CUSNUM>100000 AND BALDUE>100
ORDER BY
CUSNUM
ITEM
OUtput device
CHOICE
E
POSSIBLE CHOICES
l=D1splay a=Pr1nter
3=D1sk
OPTIO
Select one of these options. press Enter.
1 Create a transfer request
a Modify the current transfer request
3 Run the current transfer request
4
Save the current transfer request
5
Recall a transfer request
S Exit S/38-to-PC Transfer Facility
Select ===>
E
S9088614-1
9-46
To send output to the printer, select option 3
(Run the current transfer request), then press
the Enter key. The transfer request runs and
the output is printed on the printer you
specified.
Sending Output to a Disk
If you specify 3 (Disk) for the output device,
and press the Enter key, the following display
appears:
Fr~-------S/38-TO-PC
TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - - - - ,
FROM
CUSTCDT
SELECT
CUSNUK. LSTNAK. STREET. CI TY. STATE. ZIPOOD. BALDUE
WHERE
ommR~
CUSNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
~CUSNUK==~
ITEM
CHOICE
Output device
••• •
TO PC til enaJDII
•
•
•
Fl=Help
F3-RIm
••
POSSIBLE CHOICES
1-Dll1play
2-Prlnter
3-DlI1Jc
PC tilename
•
B:
Replace old tile?
!:!
!
F4=Save
Ellc=Optionll
59088615-1
TO PC filename
This prompt is required. It identifies the
name of the personal computer disk or
diskette file to receive the transferred
records.
9-47
Specify the file name using the following
format:
[d:] [path]filename [.ext]
For details on how to specify the file name,
refer to "File Name Format" in
Chapter 2, "What You Should Know before
Operating PC Support/36."
After you complete the TO PC filename
prompt, press the Enter key. The cursor
moves to the Replace old file prompt.
Replace old file?
This prompt is required. It specifies whether
or not you want the file specified in the TO
PC filename prompt replaced with the
transferred records. Specify one of the
following:
1 (Yes), if the file should be replaced (if it
exists)
2 (No), if the file should not be replaced
The default is 2 (No). If you specify 2 and the
file exists, you are given a chance to cancel
the transfer request or continue replacing the
file when the transfer request is run.
If you are creating the file (it does not
already exist), you should specify 1 (Yes).
You might want to run this transfer request
more than once. The next time you run the
transfer request, the file will already exist.
9-48
Mter you complete the Replace old file
prompt, press the Enter key. The following
display appears:
, r . - - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E : - - - - - - - - - - - " ,
F~M
~am~T~CD~T~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
SELECT
CUSNUM.LSTNAM,STREET,CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
WHERE
CUSNUH>100000 AND BALDl1E>100
O~ERBY
~gm~mm~
ITEM
OUtput device
________________________
CHOICE
••
~
POSSIBLE CHOICES
1=Dlaplay 2=Prlnter
TO PC tilename • •
B: CUSTOMER. REPORT\ MASTER. XPC
Replace old tile? • •
PC tilename
PC tile type • • • • • .1
1=ASCII text
3=BASIC sequential
5=DIF(TH)
a
F1=Help
F3=Run
F4=Save
1-Yes
3=Dlsk
2-No
2=DOS random
4=BASIC random
8=No conversion
Esc=Options
59088679-1
PC file type
This prompt is required. It identifies the type
of personal computer disk or diskette file to
receive the transferred records.
9-49
One of the following must be specified:
1 (ASCII text), where all data is converted
to ASCII characters.
2 (DOS random), where data is converted
to a personal computer format suitable for
many data base applications.
3 (BASIC sequential), where data is
converted to character and numeric
BASIC fields for sequential processing by
a BASIC program.
4 (BASIC random), where all data is
converted to character string,
hexadecimal, integer, single-precision, or
double-precision numeric BASIC fields for
random processing by a BASIC program.
5 (DIF), where all data is converted to a
format used for data interchange between
spreadsheet programs and other
application programs.
6 (No conversion), where no data is
converted. The data is transferred exactly
as it is stored on the System/36.
ASCII text is the default value.
Refer to Chapter 6, "The Transfer Facility" in
the PC Support/36 Technical Reference for a
detailed description of each file type.
9-50
After you complete the PC file type prompt,
press the Enter key. The Show format of
transferred data prompt appears, as follows:
/ / i " , r - - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - i \ .
FROM
CUSTCDT
SELECT
CUSNUK,LSTHAK,STREET,CITY,STATE,ZIPCOD,BALDUE
WHERE
CUSNUM>100000
ORDER BY
CUSNUM
ITEM
AND
BALIlUE>100
CHOICE
output device
••••
~
TO PC t i l ename • • • •
B:CUSTOHE~ REPOR'l\HASTER.XPC
Replace old tile! • • ~
PC tUe type • • • • •
Show tormat
1
3=Dislc
PC t11 ename
1-Yes
2-No
1=ASCII text
3=BASIC sequential
5=DIF(TH)
2=DOS random
4=BASIC random
8=No conversion
ot
transterred data! • • 1
F1-Help
POSSIBLE CHOICES
1=Display 2=Printer
F3=Run
F4=Save
l=Yes(Display)
2=Yes(Print)
3=No
Esc=Options
59088617-1
Show format of transferred data?
This prompt is required. It specifies whether
or not you want to see the detailed format of
the data records to be transferred and, if so,
whether you want to see it on the personal
computer display or the personal computer
printer.
9-51
You must specify one of the following:
1 (Display), if you want to see the format
of a transferred data record on the
personal computer display
2 (Printer), if you want to see the format
of a transferred data record on the
personal computer printer
3 (No), if you do not want to see the
format of a transferred data record
The default is 3 (No).
The format of a transferred data record shows
the name of each field in the record, and the
data type, size in bytes, number of digits, and
number of decimal positions on the System/36
and on the personal computer. This
information can be used to help you write a
personal computer program to process the
data in the personal computer file.
9-52
You need only display or print the format of
transferred data once for each transfer
request. If you change the FROM or
SELECT prompt for the transfer request, you
must get a new copy of the format of
transferred data by specifying 1 (Display) or 2
(Printer).
If you specify 2 (Printer), the format of
transferred data is printed on printer LPTl.
Mter you complete the Show format of
transferred data prompt, press the Enter key.
The Save PC file description prompt appears,
as follows:
t - t - t - t - S / 3 B - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E - t - t - t - t
WHERE
CUSNUH>100000 AND BALDUE>100
ORDER BY
_CUSNUH
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
ITEM
Output device
CHOICB
••••
~
TO PC filename • • • •
B: CUSTOHER\ REPOR'l\ KASTER.XPC
Repiace old file' . . !
POSSIBLE CHOICES
l~Display
2=Printer
1=Yes
z..RO
• • • •
.!
l E ASCII text
3=BASIC sequential
5"DIF( TK)
transferred data!. •
.!
l=Yes(Display)
Save PC fUe
description? • • • •
.!
PC file type •
snow format of
Fl-Help
F3-Run
F4=Save
3=Disk
PC filename
Z=DOS random
4=BASIC random
B-No conversion
2=Yes(Print)
3=No
l"Yes (for PC-to-S/3B transter)
2=No
Bsc=Optlons
59088618·1
9-53
Save PC file description?
This prompt is required. It specifies whether
or not you want to save the personal
computer file description in a personal
computer file. The file description describes
the transferred data, and may be needed later
if you transfer the data back to the System/a6.
You can specify one of the following:
•
1 (Yes), if you are transferring data from a
System/a6 file that is defined by IDDU
data definitions. This will create a
personal computer file description file
when the transfer request runs.
You need to create a personal computer
file description file only once for each
transfer request. After you have run the
transfer request and created the file
description file, you can change this value
to a 2 (No). However, if you change the
FROM, SELECT, or PC file type prompt,
you must again specify 1 (Yes) to create a
new file description file for the transfer
request.
•
2 (No), if you are transferring data from a
System/a6 file that is not defined by IDDU
data definitions, or from a library member.
The default is 1 (Yes).
9-54
If you do not plan to transfer the data back to
the System/36, specify 2 (No). If you specified
1 (Yes) for this prompt, the PC file description
name prompt appears, as follows:
t - t - t - t - S / 3 S - T O - P C TRANSFER: C R E A T E - t - t - t - t
O~ER~
=am==mm~
ITEM
OUtput device
_________________________________
CHOICE
••••
~
POSSIBLE CHOICES
1=Display 2=Printer
TO PC tilename • • • •
B:ClJSTOKER\ REPORT\ KASTER.XPC
Replace old tile! • • AI
PC tilename
PC til e type • • • • • .!
i =ASCI I text
3-BASIC sequential
6=DIF(TK)
Sbow tormat 0
1-Yes
3=Dlsk
2=No
2=DOS random.
4-BASIC random.
S=No conversion
t
transterred data! • • .1
1-Yes(Display)
2-Yes(Print)
3-No
Save PC tile
description! • • • • .!
1=Yes (tor PC-to-S/3S transter)
PC tile description
name • • • • • • • • •
B'CUSTOHEa 8RPOBT\ MASTER FDF
PC tilename
F1=Help
F3-aun
F4=Save
2=No
Esc=Options
89088659-1
PC file description name
This prompt is required. It appears only if
you specified 1 (Yes) for the Save PC file
description prompt~ The PC file description
name prompt specifies the name of the
personal computer disk or diskette file to
receive the file description.
This prompt automatically contains the
recommended file name, which is the same
name you specified in the TO filename
prompt, except that the extension .FDF has
been added. The extension .FDF identifies
the file as a file description file. To use the
recommended file name, press the Enter key.
9-55
If you want to use your own file name, it is
recommended that you use the default
extension, .FDF. The file name for this
prompt is specified using the same format that
was used in the TO PC filename prompt,
which is:
[d:] [path]filename[ .ext]
Refer to Chapter 2, "What You Should Know
before Operating PC Support/36" for details
on how to enter a file name.
After you specify 2 (No) for the Save PC file
description prompt, or after you specify the
PC file description name prompt, press the
Enter key. The transfer request is created
and the following OPTIONS menu appears:
S/38-TO-PC TRANSFEn
FROM
CUSTCDT
SELECT
CUSNUH.LSTNAH.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
WHERE
CUSNUH>100000 AND BALDUE>100
ORDER BY
CUSNUH
ITEM
Output device
CHOICE
• 3
POSSIBLE CHOICES
1=Display 2=Pr1nter
3=Disk
OPTIO
Select one o£ these options; press Enter.
1
Create a trans£er request
2 Modi~ the current transfer request
3 Run the current transfer request
4
Save the current transfer request
5
Recall a transfer request
8 Exit S/38-to-PC Transfer Facility
Select ====> 2
89088619-1
9-56
From this display, you can modify, save, or
run the transfer request you just created. To
run the current transfer request, type or
select a 3 (Run the current transfer request),
then press the Enter key.
Note:
If you want to save the current transfer
request, you must save it before you
create or recall another transfer request
or end the System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility. Otherwise,
the current transfer request is deleted.
Joining Records from More Than
One System/a6 File
Sometimes the data that you want to transfer
is split among more than one System/36 file.
There might be relationships between these
files that you can use to link or join them
together as if the data were all in one file.
Once the files have been joined together, they
can be transferred to the personal computer.
The System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility allows you to perform this
join-and-transfer function in one step.
For example, suppose you have two System/36
files, INVENTORY and SUPPLIERS.
Records in both files contain a part number
field. The INVENTORY file contains
inventory information for each part, while the
SUPPLIERS file contains information used in
purchasing and ordering each part.
9-57
Assume you want to transfer information
about the parts you can order from supplier
51, including the part number, part
description, and part price. The fields that
you want to transfer are PARTNO (from file
SUPPLIERS), DESCRIPTION (from file
INVENTORY), and PRICE (from file
SUPPLIERS).
The data contained in the INVENTORY and
SUPPLIERS files, shows that supplier 51
supplies part numbers 221 and 231, and that
these parts have a description of BOLT and
NUT and a price of 30 cents and 10 cents
respectively. The following summarizes this
information:
PARTNO
Fields:
Record 1:
2:
221
231
DESCRIPTION
BOLT
NUT
PRICE
.30
.10
You can use the System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility to join the data
from these two files and obtain this same
result. To accomplish this, you need to
specify both files (INVENTORY and
SUPPLIERS) in the FROM prompt. In the
SELECT prompt, you specify the fields you
want transferred (PARTNO, DESCRIPTION,
and PRICE). In the WHERE prompt, you
specify which records you want transferred
(records where SUPPNO = 51).
9-58
~
A new prompt, JOIN BY, specifies the
relationship between the two files. When you
worked out the result above, you first noticed
by examining the SUPPLIERS file, that part
number 221 was supplied by supplier 51 for a
price of 30 cents. However, to determine the
part description, you had to examine the
INVENTORY file to find part number 221 and
its description. Notice that you joined data
from a record in the SUPPLIERS file and a
record in the INVENTORY file, and that both
records had the same part number. Thus, in
order to join two records in these files, the
part numbers must be equal.
In summary, specify the following to obtain
the information described previously:
SUPPLIERS, INVENTORY for the FROM
prompt
PARTNO
prompt
=
PARTNUM for the JOIN BY
PARTNO, DESCRIPTION, PRICE for the
SELECT prompt
SUPPNO
=
51 for the WHERE prompt
PARTNO for the ORDER BY prompt
9-59
File
Qualifie~s
When joining rec9rds from more than one
System/36 file, you may find that the same
field name may be used in more than one file.
~I~
For example, suppose that P ARTNO is the
name of the part number field in both the
INVENTORY file and the SUPPLIERS file.
Whenever the P ARTNO field is specified, you
must identify which file contains the specific
part number field you want to use. You do
this using something called a file qualifier.
A file qualifier is an upper or lowercase T,
followed by a I-digit number, and separated
from the field name by a period (.). In the
previous join example, the PART NO field
names must be qualified with TI. and T2.
Tl. refers to the first file specified in the
FROM prompt, and T2. refers to the second
file specified in the FROM prompt.
9-60
To obtain the same information as described
in the previous example, specify the
following:
SUPPLIERS, INVENTORY for the FROM
prompt
T1.PARTNO = T2.PARTNO for the JOIN
BY prompt
T1.PARTNO, DESCRIPTION, PRICE for
the SELECT prompt
SUPPNO = 51 for the WHERE prompt
T1.PARTNO for the ORDER BY prompt
T1.PARTNO refers to the PARTNO field in
SUPPLIERS, and T2.PARTNO refers to the
PART NO field in INVENTORY.
The DESCRIPTION, PRICE, and SUPPNO
field names do not have to be qualified
because they are only found in one of the
files. However, for clarity, they could also be
qualified as follows: T2.DESCRIPTION,
T1.PRICE, T1.SUPPNO
Joining More Than Two
System/36 Files
The next section on joining two to five
System/36 files covers more advanced
techniques. At this point, you have enough
knowledge of joining files to proceed. If you
wish to learn more about joins, continue with
the next section.
9-61
Joining Records with Records in the
Same File
It is possible to join records with records in
the same file, that is, the files that are
specified in the FROM prompt can be the
same. This can be used, for example, to
compare information in the records of a file.
For example, in the SUPPLIERS file, there
are several suppliers of the same part. You
may want to know which supplier has set a
price higher than another supplier for the
same part. To transfer the desired
information to the personal computer, you
could specify the following:
SUPPLIERS, SUPPLIERS for the FROM
prompt
T1.PARTNO
BY prompt
=
T2.PARTNO for the JOIN
T1.PARTNO, T1.SUPPNO, T1.PRICE,
T2.SUPPNO, T2.PRICE for the SELECT
prompt
T1.PRICE > T2.PRICE for the WHERE
prompt
T1.PARTNO for the ORDER BY prompt
9-62
~
~
The same file has been specified twice in the
FROM prompt. The JOIN BY prompt specifies to
join records having the same part number. This
will produce joined records containing
information about two suppliers of the same part.
These joined records can be tested to identify
those where one supplier's price is higher than
that of the other supplier.
One record in the SUPPLIERS file is compared
to every record (including itself) in the
SUPPLIERS file. When the part numbers match,
the two records are joined. This occurs for each
record in the SUPPLIERS file.
The price of the first supplier is compared with
the price of the second supplier in each record.
Only records where the price of the first supplier
is higher than the price of the second supplier
are kept.
The final result is the following:
Fields: Tl.PARTNO
~ecord
1
2
3
4
--------221
231
241
241
Tl. SUPPNO
Tl.PRICE
T2.SUPPNO
T2.PRICE
54
53
61
.30
.10
.08
.05
57
54
54
.10
.04
.02
.02
--------51
--------
--------54
--------
9-63
Transferring Data from More
Than One System/36 File
This section describes the prompts used for
transferring data from more than one
System/36 file to the personal computer.
Before you read this section, you should be
familiar with the concepts of transferring
records from more than one System/36 file.
For more information, refer to the section
"Joining Records from More Than One
System/36 File" earlier in this chapter.
~
~
Following is a summary of the prompts used
for creating a transfer request that transfers
data from more than one System/36 file:
9-64
•
Use the FROM prompt to specify the
names of all the files from which data is
transferred.
•
Use the JOIN BY prompt to specify how
data from the files are joined or combined.
~
FROM
Use the FROM prompt to specify the
System/36 files from which you want to
transfer data. Separate the file names by
commas, in the following form:
file-namel/format-name],file-namel/format-uame] ,
file-namel/format-name], ...
You- can specify up to five files. For more
detailed information about specifying a file
name, see "Creating a System/36-to-Per~onal
Computer Transfer Request" earlier in this
chapter.
If the name of a file does not fit on one
FROM input area line, the transfer facility
automatically creates another input line, or
you can create another line by pressing t~
FlO key. When continuing the FROM prompt
on another input area line, the name of the .
file must be typed entirely on one input line ..
The name of a file cannot be split between
two input area lines.
Note:
When joining files, all files specified on
the FROM prompt must be externally
defined by IDDU.
9-65
The following is an example of specifying two
files using the FROM prompt:
. . . - - - - - - - - S/3S-TO-PC TRANSFER: CREATE - - - - - - - - - - ,
S/38 ~l1ename(s)
FROM
I TEHKAST. I TEKTEMP
Fl=Help
F2=Liat
F3=Run
F4=Save
Fl0=New Line
Eao-Options
S9088718-0
When transferring records from more than
one file, you can use the F2 key to show lists
of available files and record formats, just as
you can when you transfer records from only
one file. You 'should, however, be aware of
the following:
•
9-66
If you specify a file name and a format
name for the FROM prompt and press the
F2 key, a list of available files appears.
The transfer facility assumes you have
specified a complete filename and want to
specify another filename. If you select a
file from the list using the F9 key, it is
copied to the FROM prompt, and is
separated by a comma from the previously
specified filename. You can then continue
using the F2 key to help you complete the
next filename.
After you complete the FROM prompt
(specifying at least two files from which data
is to be transferred) and press the Enter key,
the JOIN BY prompt appears as follows:
, - - - - - - - - S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER: CREATE - - - - - - - - ,
S/38 filename(s)
FRO!!
JOIN BY
lTEMKAST.ITEMTEHP
Condition(s)
to _
Join
-_
_ _ _ to
_be
_used
__
_tilee
_ _ _ _ _ _ __
F1-Help F2=Ll.t F3=Run F4=Save
FS-Group FunctiOns F10=New Line Esc-Options Menu
59088720-0
JOIN BY
The JOIN BY prompt is required if you
specify more than one file name in the FROM
prompt. It appears after you complete the
FROM prompt and press the Enter key. If
you specify only one file name in the FROM
prompt, the JOIN BY prompt is not displayed.
The JOIN BY prompt identifies how to
combine or join records from the files
specified in the FROM prompt. Each file
specified in the FROM prompt must be joined
to at least one other file in the FROM
prompt.
9-67
Use the JOIN BY prompt to specify one or
more join conditions. A join condition
identifies how two files are alike and
therefore which records are to be joined from
the two files.
The number of join conditions specified must
be one less than the number of files being
joined. For example, if you are joining five
files, you must specify four join conditions.
The format of a join condition is:
fieldname test fieldname
1*
where:
fieldname is the name of a field defined in a
record format specified in the FROM prompt.
In a join condition you must specify two field
names, one field from each file that is joined.
test is the type of comparison to be applied
to the field.
< > or > <
>
> =
<
< =
Note:
Equal
Not equal (see note)
Greater than
Greater than or equal
Less than
Less than or equal
The LIKE test is not valid for JOIN
BY.
* joins all the files specified in the FROM
prompt together. The data will consist of all
the possible combinations of records from the
joined files.
9-68
~
In the following example, two files,
ITEMMAST and ITEMTEMP, are joined
using the item number fields ITEMNO and
ITEMNUM with the equal test:
ITEMNO = ITEMNUM
Field ITEMNO is in file ITEMMAST and
field ITEMNUM is in file ITEMTEMP. In
the previous example, whenever the contents
of field ITEMNO equals the contents of field
ITEMNUM, data is transferred from either or
both records depending on the fields specified
in the SELECT prompt.
The fields you specify in the JOIN BY prompt
must follow these rules:
•
A numeric field must be joined to a
numeric field. The field lengths or types
do not have to be the same.
•
A character field must be joined to a
character field. The lengths do not have
to be the same.
9-69
If a field name you specify is defined in more
than one of the record formats specified in
the FROM prompt, the field name must be
preceded by a file qualifier every time you use
the field in any of the following prompts:
•
JOIN BY
•
SELECT
•
WHERE
•
ORDER BY
A file qualifier is the character T (upper or
lowercase) followed by a I-digit number. Use
TI for fields defined by the first record file,
T2 for the fields defined by the second record
file, and so on. The file qualifier and the
field name are separated by a period (.).
For example, assume you want to join the
files ITEMMAST and ITEMTEMP according
to the contents of each file's item description
field. In this case, the item description field
in both files is named ITEMDESC. You must
specify a file qualifier whenever you use the
field ITEMDESC, like this:
Tl.ITEMDESC = T2.ITEMDESC
9-70
~
~
If you do not know the names of the fields in
the files specified in the FROM prompt, press
the F2 key when the cursor is in the JOIN BY
input area. A list of the file qualifiers and
field names for each file appears as follows:
r - - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P C TRANSFER : C R E A T E - - - - - - - - - - - ,
PROM
JOIN BY
ITEKKAST. ITEMTEKP
Condltlon(a) to be used to Joln tlles
_=-_________________________
___
LIST FOR JOIN BY
T1-ITEKKAST
FIELD
Tl.ITEMNO
Tl. ITEKDESC
T1.QUANITY
T2. I TEMNUH
T2.ITEKDESC
T2.QUANITY
F9=Select
P1-Help
IUL
ZONED
CHAR
ZONED
ZONED
CHAR
ZONED
t,~
F2-List
LENG'm
5
40
8
5
40
8
=Scroll
F4-Save
DIGITS
--5
0
8
5
0
8
~
Ctrl .... ' ..=Page
Fl0=New Line
0
0
0
0
0
0
TEXT
ITEM NUKBER
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QUANI TY ON HAND
ITEM NUKBER
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QUANI TY ON HAND
Esc=Exlt Llst
Esc=OptlonB
59088719·1
The first line of the list heading identifies the
file qualifier and file name for the field
currently highlighted.
9-71
You can use the Ctrl-Page Up and Ctrl-Page
Down keys to position the highlighting on the
first field of the previous file or the first field
of the next file. For additional information
on using lists, refer to the SELECT prompt in
"Creating a System/36-to-Personal Computer
Transfer Request" in this chapter.
~
You must use more than one join condition if
you want to join more than two files. If you
need to specify more than one join condition,
the conditions must be connected with AND.
For example:
Tl.EMPNO
=
T2.EMPNO AND T2.EMPNO
=
T3.EMPNO
means that records with the same value for
EMPNO are joined from the first file and the
second file specified in the FROM prompt,
and then from the second and third files
specified in the FROM prompt.
You can specify a maximum of four join
conditions. If all of the join conditions do
not fit on one input line, the transfer facility
automatically creates another line, or you
can create another line by pressing the FlO
key. When continuing the JOIN BY prompt
on another line, a field name must be typed
entirely on one line. A field name cannot be
split between two lines.
Mter you complete the JOIN BY prompt and
press the Enter key, you can complete the
SELECT, WHERE, and ORDER BY prompts
as described in the previous section.
Remember that if you reference a field name
that is defined- in more than one file, the field
must be preceded by a file qualifier.
9-72
~
Modifying a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request
This section describes how to modify the
current transfer request. The current transfer
request is one that you previously created or
recalled, and is currently on the display.
Mter you modify a transfer request, you can
use the OPTIONS menu to save or run it.
Specify a 2 (Modify the current transfer
request) on the OPTIONS menu, and press the
Enter key. You can modify the transfer
request by moving the cursor to any field and
typing the changes you want to make. Refer
to "Creating a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request" earlier in this
chapter for details on what you can enter.
You can:
•
Press the Fl key to display help text.
•
Press the F2 key to display a list of items
for the FROM, SELECT, WHERE, JOIN
BY, or ORDER BY prompt.
•
Press the F3 key to run the transfer
request.
•
Press the F4 key to save the transfer
request.
•
Press the Escape key to return to the
OPTIONS menu.
9-73
Running a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request
This section describes how to run a
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
request. Before you run a transfer request,
~
you must have previously created, recalled, or ~
modified the transfer request.
To.run a transfer request, specify 3 (Run the
current transfer request) on the OPTIONS
menu, and press the Enter key. If the
OPTIONS menu is not on the display, you can
run a transfer request by pressing the F3
(Run) key. The following window appears
while the transfer request is running:
~------S/36-TO-PC
F~M
CU==ST=~=T~
TRANSFER:
RUN----------,
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
SELECT
CUSNUK~LSTNAH~STREET~CITY~STATE~ZIPCOD~BALDUE
WHERE
CUSNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
O~ER~
CU==SNUK~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
ITEM
Output device
CHOICE
•••••
1.
POSSIBLE CHOICES
1=Display
2=Printer
3=D1sk
...._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ STArus._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...
Your transfer request is running
Please wait
~----------------------~i
59088629-1
9-74
If the transfer request runs successfully, one
of the following occurs:
•
If you specified 1 (Display) as the output
device, the transferred records are
displayed.
•
If you specified 2 (Printer) as the output
device, the transferred records are printed.
•
If you specified 3 (Disk) as the output
device, the format of the transferred data
(if requested) is sent to the output device
(display or printer) you specified for the
Show format of transferred data prompt.
The personal computer file description file
(if requested in the Save PC file
description prompt) is written to a
personal computer disk or diskette file,
and the transferred records are written to
a personal computer disk or diskette file.
You can press the Escape key to cancel
running the current transfer request at any
time (except while the file description is being
written to a disk or diskette). Any records
remaining to be transferred are ignored. If
data is being written to a personal computer
disk or diskette file, the file is closed.
9-75
If you specified 1 (Display) for the Output
device prompt when you created or modified
the current transfer request, the transferred
records are sent to the display. The records
appear, one record per line, inside a window
on the display.
The output is in column format. Column
headings are the SELECT field names. The
following shows displayed records:
S/36-TO-PC TRANSFER :
RUN
FROM
CUSTCDT
SELECT
CUSNUK.LSTNAM.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
WHERE
CUSNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
ORDER BY
CUSNUK
ITEM
Output device
CUSNUK
192837
392859
475938
583990
938485
LSTNAM
Lee
Vine
Doe
Abrahaln
Johnson
CHOICE
1
POSSIBLE CHOICES
l=Display 2=Printer
RANSFERRED DATA
STREET
CITY
5963 Oak St
Hector
PO Box 79
Broton
59 Archer Rd Sutter
392 Mill St
Isle
3 Alpine Way Helen
STATE
NY
VT
CA .
KN
GA
3=Disk
ZIPCOD
BALDUE
14841
489.50
5046
439.00
250.00
95685\
56342
500.00
30545 3987.50
-----------------------------------------------------------------Esc-Exit Run
S9088630·1
9-76
Each field of a transferred record is converted
from the System/36 data type to personal
computer ASCII. If a field cannot be
converted, the field is displayed and the
character positions that could not be
converted are highlighted.
Note:
The personal computer receives records
from the System/36 sequentially, and
stores as many of them in personal
computer storage as possible. If you try
to page backward past the first record
displayed, the transfer request. may be
resubmitted by the transfer facility in
order to display previous records. This
may impact performance.
9-77
You can press the Escape key to stop
displaying the records. The display then
shows the total number of records that were
displayed and the number of displayed records
that had data that could not be converted, as
follows:
. - - - - - - - - - - S / 3 S - T O - P C TRANSFER: RUN - - - - - - - - - - , : ' \
F~ru
~=S~TC=D~T
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
SELECT
ruSNUH.LSTNAK.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
WHERE
ruSNUH>100000 AND BALDUE>100
O~ERBYrus
===NUH~
ITEM
_____________________________
CHOICE
Output device
••
• 1.
POSSIBLE CHOICES
l=Display
2=Printer
3=D1sJc
. .__________________ suru·~____________________•
5 record(s) displayed
o record(s) had data that could not be translated
Esc=Exi t Run
~-------------------------------~i
89088680-1
You can press the Escape key again to
display the OPTIONS menu. The transfer
request stops running.
9-78
If you specified 2 (Printer) for the Output
device prompt when you created or modified
the current transfer request, the transferred
records are sent to the printer. The printer is
set according to the values that were
specified in the transfer request.
The output is in column format. Column
headings are the SELECT field names. The
following window appears:
/1~--------S/38-TO-PC
FROM
TRANSFER: R U N . - - - - - - - - - ,
CUSTCDT
SELECT
CUSHUK,LSTHAH.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD,BALDUE
WHERE
CUSNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
ORDER BY
ITEM
Ou.tput device
•••• •
CHOICE
POSSIBLE CHOICES
~
1=Display
Printer device • • • • • .!
1=LPT1
2=Printer
2=LPT2
3=Disk
3=LPT3
Line length
80. 132 characters
. ._ _ _ _ _ _ _.~
_ _ STATU·~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. .
Retrieved data records are being printed
Please wait
Esc=Exit Print
~-
_________________________
~i~
59088631-1
Each field of a transferred record is converted
from the System/36 data type to personal
computer ASCII. If a field cannot be
converted, the field is printed with rectangles
occupying the character positions that could
not be converted.
9-79
If you want to stop printing the transferred
records before all of the records are printed,
you can pressJthe Escape key. The display
then shows the total number of records
printed and the number of printed records
that had data that could not be converted, as
follows:
~
, / " , . - - - - - - - - S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER: R U N - - - - - - - - - - - .
FROM
CUSTCDT
SELECT
CUSNUH.LSTNAK.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
WHERE
CUSNUH>100000 AND BALDUE>100
ORDER BY
CUSNUH
ITEM
Output device
••
••
CHOICE
POSSIBLE CHOICES
~
l=Display
2=Printer
3=Disk
l=LPTl 2=LPT2 3=LPT3
1
.Line
.__________________
...
80. __________________
132 characters
length • • • •
...1ll? snru·~
Printer device • • • • •
5 record(s) pr1nted
o record(s) had data that could not bs translated
Esc=Exi t Run
~----------------------Rtmni
59088661-1
If you are printing on a personal computer
printer (not a virtual printer), the transfer
facility resets the printer to print 80
characters per line, 66 lines per page, 6 lines
per inch, and no double strike, after printing
the transferred records.
9-80
If you are using a virtual printer:
•
If the print file remains open between
requests, the values specified for the first
request are retained.
•
When the print file is closed, the virtual
printer uses the values initially specified
for the virtual printer.
You can press the Escape key again to
display the OPTIONS menu. The transfer
request stops running.
If you specified 3 (Disk) for the Output device
prompt when you created or modified the
current transfer request, the following steps
occur:
1. The format of the transferred data is
displayed or printed, as requested in the
Show format of transferred data prompt.
(If you specified 3 [No] for the Show
format of transferred data prompt, this
does not take place.)
2. The personal computer file description is
written to a personal computer disk or
diskette file, as requested in the Save PC
file description prompt. (If you specified 2
[No] for the Save PC file description
prompt, this step does not take place.)
3. The transferred records are written to a
personal computer disk or diskette file.
9-81
Displaying or Printing the
Format of Transferred Data
If you requested that the format of the
transferred data be displayed, the following
display appears:
. . . - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P c TRANSFER: ""RUN.., - - - - - - - - - ,
F~K
~OO=S=TC=DT~
_______________________________
SELECT
OOSNUM.LSTNAM.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
WHERE
OOSNUM>100000 AND BALDUE>100
ORDER BY
OOSNUM
FORHAT OF TRANSFERRED DAT
TO filename: KASTER.XPC
File type: ASCII text
---- System/36 --- ------- PC ------Nalne • • OOSNUM
Data type • • • • • • • EBCDIC Zoned
ASCI I Nwneri c
Size in bytes • • • • •
8
7
DiBits • • • • • • • •
6
Decimal posi tiona • • •
0
Nalne • • LSTNAK
Data type • • • • • • • EBCDIC Char
Size in bytes • • • • •
8
PBUp/Dn-PllBe
ASCII Char
2
Esc-Exit format of transferred data
.-.-+-+-.-.-+-+-+-+-+-+--+-+
59088634-2
The format of transferred data lists the names
of the fields as they appear in the record. It
contains the following information for each
field that is specified in the SELECT prompt.
(The fields appear in the order in which the
corresponding data appears in the personal
computer disk or diskette file.)
9-82
Name
The name of the field in the
transferred records.
Data type
This identifies the
System/36 data type and the
personal computer data
type.
The following are System/36 or personal
computer data codes and their corresponding
meaning:
Code
Hexadecimal
Binary
EBCDIC Char
EBCDIC Zoned
EBCDIC Packed
ASCII Char
ASCII Zoned
ASCII Packed
BASIC SP
BASIC DP
BASIC Integer
ASCII Numeric
Meaning
Hexadecimal
Binary
EBCDIC character
Zoned decimal in EBCDIC
format
Packed decimal in EBCDIC
format
ASCII character
Zoned decimal in ASCII format
Packed decimal in ASCII
format
BASIC single-precision number
BASIC double-precision
number
BASIC integer
Numeric field in ASCII format
9-83
Size in bytes
This identifies th~ize (in
bytes) of the field n the
System/36 and on he
personal computer.
Digits
For numeric fields
(EBCDIC zoned, EBCDIC
packed, or binary), this
identifies the number of
digits in the number. If
the number has a decimal
point, the number of
digits on both sides of the
decimal point are
included. (Digits applies
only to System/36 data.)
Decimal positions This identifies the
number of decimal
positions in a numeric
field. It is shown for
System/36 EBCDIC
zoned, EBCDIC packed,
and binary fields, and for
personal computer ASCII
zoned, ASCII packed,
ASCII numeric, or binary
fields.
Note:
The decimal positions and size in bytes
are not displayed for personal computer
fields when the file type is BASIC
sequential or DIF.
You can press the Escape key to remove the
window. The transfer request continues
running.
9-84
If the format of the transferred data is to be
printed, the following display appears:
1"",,...--------- S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER :
F~
SELECT
WHERE
O~ERBY
~as~T=~~T~
RUN-----------.~
____________________________
asNUK,LSTHAK,STREET,CITY,STATE,ZIPCOD,BALDUE
asNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
~as~NUK~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
CHOICE
ITEM
output device
••
•
~
TO PC filename • •
•
B:asTOm:R. REPOR'1\KASTER.XPC
Replaoe old f11e • • • • .!!
POSSIBLE CHOICES
l=Diaplay 2=Printer
3=Dlsk
PC filename
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .__ STAnm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .
The tormat of transferred data i. beirlg printed
Pleaae walt
Eac-Exl t Print
~
____________________________________
~l~
89088635·2
If you want to stop printing the records
before they are all printed, press the Escape
key. Mter the format of transferred data is
printed, the window is removed and the
transfer request continues running.
9-85
Saving the Personal Computer
File Description
If you specified 1 (Yes) for the Save PC file
description prompt, the following display
appears:
t l ' r " , - - - - - - - - S / 3 S - T O - P C TRANSFER: RUN.-_ _ _ _ _ _ _......
FROM
CUSTCDT
SELECT
WHERE
CUSNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
ORDER BY
CUSNUK
ITEM
CHOICE
Output device
••
•
~
TO PC filename • •
•
B: CUSTOMER\ REPORT\ KASTER. XPC
Replace old tile?
• • • .!l
POSSIBLE CHOICES
l=Display
2=Printer
3=Disk
PC tilename
l=Yes
2-No
. -__________________ STAWS ____________________- .
The tile description is being written to
disk
Please wait
~---------------------~1
59088662-1
The personal computer file description is
written to the personal computer disk or
diskette file that you specified in the PC file
description name prompt. Mter the personal
computer file is written, the transfer request
continues running.
9-86
Writing Transferred Records
When the transferred records are written to a
personal computer disk or diskette file and
the following window appears:
. . . . - - - - - - - - - S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER : R U l I L - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
F~K
SELECT
WHERE
O~ERBY
~~~T~~~T~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
~NUK.LSTNAK,STREET,CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
~NUK>100000
~~==NUK~
AND BALDUE>100
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
ITEK
CHOICE
Output device
• •
•
~
TO PC fil ename • •
•
B:~TOMER\ REPORT\KASTER.XPC
.
.
__________________
Replace old file? • • • i
POSSIBLE CHOICES
i"'Diaplay
2=Printer
3-Disk
PC fil enanus
~TA.~
______________________
..
i-Yes
2"'No
Retr1eved data recorda are be1ng wr1tten to d1sk
Please wait
Eac"'Ex1t Write
Running
89088632-1
If you want to stop writing records to the file
before the transfer request is finished
running, you can press the Escape key.
9-87
After the records are transferred, the
following display appears:
r - - - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P C TRANSFER: R U N , - - - - - - - - - - . ,
F~M
SELECT
WHERE
O~ERBY
;OO~S~TC=D~T
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
OOSNUK.LSTNAK.STREET.CITY.STATE.ZIPCOD.BALDUE
OOSNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
~OOS==NUK~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
CHOICE
ITEM
Output device
• •
.
~
POSSIBLE CHOICES
l=D1splay
PC tilename
Replace old t1le • • • •
l=Yes
2=Printer
3=D1sk
2-No
.
!
. -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ STA
~
TO PC tilename • •
•
B:OOSTOKEFh REPOR'l\ KASTER.XPC
5 record(s) were written to disk tile
o record(s) had data that could not be
translated
Esc=Exit Run
59088633-1
This display shows the total number of
records written to the personal computer disk
or diskette file, and the number of records
that contained data that could not be
converted.
You can press the Escape key to stop running
the transfer request and display the OPTIONS
menu.
9-88
Saving a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request
This section describes how to save the current
transfer request. The current transfer request
is a transfer request you previously created
and/or modified, and is currently on the
display. After you save a transfer request,
you can recall, modify, or run it.
You can also run a saved transfer request
using the automatic System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility. Refer to "Running
a System/36-to-Personal Computer Transfer
Request" later in this chapter for details.
You should save a transfer request if you
need to transfer the same information often.
Saving a transfer request prevents you from
having to create a transfer request each time
you want this information.
9-89
To save a transfer request, enter a 4 (Save the
current transfer request) on the OPTIONS
menu and press the Enter key. If the
OPTIONS menu is not on the display, you can
save the transfer request by pressing the F4
(Save) key. The following display appears:
. - - - -_ _ _ _ S/38-TO-PC TRANSFER: SAVE _ _ _ _ _ _- - ,
Name of transfer request
to be saved • • • • • • • • •
B:
Replace old f1le?
Description
F1=Help
•••••••
PC filename
&
1 Yea
2=No
• • • • • • • • • • _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
F2=List
Esc=Options Menu
59088626·1
Using the following format, type in the name
of the disk or diskette file in which you want
to save the transfer request:
[d:] [path]filename[.ext]
The DOS default disk drive, followed by a
colon, is automatically typed in for you.
However, you can specify another drive, if
you wish.
9-90
For details on how to specify the file name,
refer to Chapter 2, "What You Should Know
before Operating PC Support/36."
If you want a list of all the transfer request
file names on the disk or diskette, press the
F2 key. You can also specify part of a
transfer request file name (by using DOS
global file name characters, * or ?), on the
Transfer request name input area, to limit the
number of names listed. In this case, pressing
the F2 key lists all of the transfer request
names that match the characters you entered.
You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys, and the Page Up and Page Down keys,
to find the transfer request name you want,
then press the F9 key to select it. This
automatically copies the name from the list to
the Transfer request name input area.
If you do not specify an extension, the
transfer facility automatically limits the
transfer request file names listed to those
with an extension of .TTO.
9-91
For example:
•
Pressing the F2 key with the Transfer
request name input area containing A:
lists all the transfer request file names on
the diskette in drive A in the current
directory that have an extension of .!fTO.
•
Pressing the F2 key with the value
A:TRFILE. * lists all the transfer request
file names on the diskette in drive A in
the current directory having a file name of
TRFILE with any extension (for example,
TRFILE.OOl, TRFILE.002, and so forth).
•
Pressing the F2 key with ~he value
A:TR*. TTO lists all the transfer request
file names on the diskette in drive A in
the current directory having TR as the
first 2 characters of the file name and
anything as the remaining characters of
the file name with .TTO as the extension
(for example, TRACCT1.TTO,
TRBATCH.TTO, and so forth).
•
Pressing the F2 key with the A:*. produces
a list of all transfer request file names on
drive A in the current directory with no
extension.
After you complete the Transfer request name
prompt, press the Enter key. The cursor
moves to the Replace old file prompt.
9-92
Replace old file?
This prompt is required. It specifies whether
or not you want the file specified in the
Transfer request name prompt replaced with
the current transfer request. Specify one of
the following:
•
1 (Yes), if the file should be replaced (if it
exists)
•
2 (No), if the file should not be replaced
The default is 2 (No). If you specify 2 and the
file exists, you will be given a chance to
cancel the save operation or continue,
replacing the file with the transfer request. If
you are creating the file (it does not already
exist), you should answer this prompt as
though the file already exists.
After you complete the Replace old file
prompt, press the Enter key. The cursor
moves to the Description prompt.
Description
The Description prompt is optional. It allows
you to type a short description about the
transfer request. The description can be up to
40 characters long. This description is not
used by the program; it is saved with the
transfer request so that it can be displayed
when you request a list during a save or
recall operation.
If you selected the transfer request name from
a list, the description is automatically copied
into the input area for this prompt.
9-93
After you complete the Description prompt,
press the Enter key. The following display
appears:
. - - - - - - - - S / 3 S - T O - P C TRANSFER: S A W : - - - - - - - - - - - .
Name ot tral'lSter request
to be saved • • • • • • • • •
PC tilename
B: CUSTOMER, REPOR'r\ MASTER. TTO
Replace old tl1e?
Description
•••••••
2
1-Yes
2-No
• • • • . • • • • • _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
. .______________~Urul~__________________~
•
Your tral'lSter request is being saved
Please wait
L------------------------~i
59088627-1
The transfer request is saved in the specified
personal computer disk or diskette file.
Note:
9-94
The transfer request is saved in a
personal computer file that is intended
for use only by the transfer facility. Do
not change the contents of the transfer
request file. If you want to change the
transfer request, you must recall it and
modify it using the transfer facility.
Mter a transfer request is successfully saved
and written to a personal computer disk or
diskette file, the following OPTIONS menu
appears:
r - - - - - - - - - - - S/38-TO-PC
TRANSFER~-------------,
FROK
cos TenT
SELECT
CUSNUK.LSTNAK. STREET. CI TY. STATE. ZIPCOD. BALDUE
WHERE
CUSNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
ORDER BY
CUSNUK
ITEM
OUtput device
. . ._ _-
CHOICE
POSSIBLE CHOICES
• •
l-Display 2=Printer 3-Disk
~
_ _ _ _ _ _-oPTIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _•
Select one ot these options; press Enter.
1 Create a transter request
2 Kodl~ the current transter request
3 Run the current transter request
4 Save the current transter request
15 Reoall a transfer request
8 Exit S/38-to-PC Transter Facil1ty
Seleot
-->
jl
' - - - - - - - - - - y o u r transter request has been successfUlly saved
59088663-3
The saved transfer request remains the
current transfer request.
9-95
Recalling a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request
This section describes how to recall a transfer
request from a personal computer disk or
diskette file. You must save a transfer
~
request before you can recall it. After you
...
recall it, you can modify or run it.
If you specify a 5 (Recall a transfer request)
on the OPTIONS menu and press the Enter
key, the following display appears:
, - - - - - - - S/36-TO-PC TRANSFER: R E C A L L , - - - - - - - - ,
Name of transfer request
to be recalled • • • • • • • •
PC filename
B:
F1=Help
F2=List
Eac=Options Menu
59088620-1
9-96
Name of Transfer Request to be
Recalled
This prompt is required. IType the name of
the personal computer disk or diskette file
that contains the transfer request you want to
recall.
You must specify the transfer request file
name using the following format:
[d:] [path]filename [.ext]
Refer to "File Name Format" in
Chapter 2, "What You Should Know before
Operating PC Support/36" for information
about entering a file name.
If you want a list of all the transfer request
file names on the disk or diskette, press the
F2 key . You can also specify part of a
transfer request file name using DOS global
file name characters, * or ?, to limit the
number of names listed. In this case, pressing
the F2 key lists all of the transfer request
names that match the characters you entered.
9-97
If you do not specify an extension, the
transfer facility automatically limits the
transfer request file names listed to those
with an extension of .TTO. If you specify
only a period (.) for the extension, no
extension is used.
For example:
9-98
•
Pressing the F2 key with the value A: in
the Transfer request name prompt lists all
the transfer request file names on the
diskette in drive A in the current
directory that have an extension of .TTO.
•
Pressing the F2 key with the value
A:TRFILE. * lists all the transfer request
file names on the diskette in drive A in
the current directory having a file name of
TRFILE with any extension (for example,
TRFILE.OOl, TRFILE.002, and so forth).
•
Pressing the F2 key with the value
A:TR*.TTO produces a list of all the
transfer request file names on the diskette
in drive A in the current directory having
TR as the first 2 characters of the file
name and anything as the remaining
characters of the file name with .TTO as
the extension (for example,
TRACCT1.TTO, TRBATCH.TTO, and so
forth).
•
Pressing the F2 key with the A:*. produces
a list of all transfer request file names on
drive A in the current directory with no
extension.
You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys, or the Page Up and Page Down keys, to
find the name you want, then select the name
from the list by pressing the F9 key. This
automatically copies the selected name to the
transfer request name input area.
After you type or select the transfer request
file name, press the Enter key. The following
window appears:
r - - - - - - - - - S / 3 8 - T O - P C TRANSFER: RECALL - - - - - - - - ,
Name of transfer request
to be recalled • • • • • • • •
PC filename
B: CUSTOMER-. RECORD\. KASTER. TTO
. .________________~~nru~~__________________. . .
•
Your transfer request is being recalled
Please wait
~--------------------------Rwmi
S9088621·1
9-99
The transfer request is read from the disk or
diskette and becomes the current transfer
request. The following display appears with
the values for the transfer request just
recalled:
, . . - - - - - - - - - S/36-TO-PC TRANSFER: K O D I F Y - - - - - - - - - ,
S/36 tile or library melllber nalIUI
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
F~K
WHERE
O~ERH
~ru~S~T~CD~T~
rusNUK>100000 AND BALDUE>100
~ru~s~mm~
ITEK
OUtput device
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
CHOICE
••••
~
TO PC tilename • • • •
POSSIBLE CHOICES
l=Display 2-Printer
3-Disk
PC tilename
B: CUSTOMER\, RECORD' KASTER.XPC
•• &
Replace old tile?
PC File type • • • • •
Show tormat ot
transterred data?
Fl=Help
F2=List
1
• 1
F3=Run
l=Yea
2=No
l=ASCII text
3=BASIC sequential
5=DIF(TK)
l=Yes (Display)
F4=Save
FlO=New Line
2=DOS random
4=BASIC random
6=No conversion
2=Yes (Print)
3-No
Esc=Options
t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t
S9088622·1
You can:
9-100
•
Press the F3 key to run the transfer
request.
•
Modify the transfer request, then press the
F3 key to run the transfer request.
•
Press the Escape key to return to the
OPTIONS menu.
Erasing a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request
If you no longer want to use a previously
saved transfer request, you can erase it using
the DOS ERASE command. Refer to the IBM
Personal Computer Disk Operating System
manual for more information about erasing
files.
If you did not specify an extension when you
saved the transfer request, the transfer
facility automatically appended an extension
of .TTO. Therefore, you must specify this
extension when you erase the file.
Ending the
System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Facility
You can end the System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility by entering a 6
(Exit S/36-to-PC Transfer Facility) on the
OPTIONS menu and pressing the Enter key,
or by pressing the Control and Break keys.
When you end the System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility, the DOS prompt
returns. You can then type the command to
start another PC Support/36 program, or
continue with another personal computer
application.
9-101
Running the Automatic
System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Facility
The automatic System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility runs a previously
created and saved System/36-to-personal
computer transfer request without prompting
you for information. To create and save a
transfer request, you must use the interactive
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility.
You might want to use the automatic
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility when you require the same
information to be transferred often from the
System/36 to your personal computer.
For example, if you are required to create a
daily report using current data on the
System/36, you could use the automatic
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility to run the required transfer request
and transfer the current data to your personal
computer each day. That data could then be
used by a personal computer application to
generate the report you need.
9-102
The automatic System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility can be useful when
you need to maintain integrity of the data
being transferred. When the automatic
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility runs, no prompts or displays appear;
therefore, you cannot create or change a
transfer request while the automatic
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility is running.
There are two commands to run the
automatic System/36-to-personal computer
transfer facility. They are TOPCB and
RTOPCB. Both commands have the same
format.
The TOPCB command uses the batch file,
TOPCB.BAT to start the batch
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility program. This file automatically
starts the PC Support/36 programs required to
transfer data from the System/36 to the
personal computer.
The TOPCB command should be used to start
the automatic System/36-to-personal computer
transfer facility if you are starting it for the
first time since you powered on or restarted
your personal computer.
You can use the RTOPCB command to start
the automatic System/36-to-personal computer
transfer facility if you are not starting it for
the first time. The RTOPCB command
assumes that the other programs required to
run the System/36-to-personal computer
transfer facility have already been started
(using the TOPCB command). The RTOPCB
command runs faster than the TOPCB
command.
9-103
TOPCB
Purpose: This command starts the
automatic System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility.
Format:
TOPCB
transfer-request-filename
Remarks: transfer-request-filename
specifies the name of a transfer
request that was previously
created and saved. The
transfer-request-filename is
required. The format of the
transfer-request-filename is:
[d:] [path]filename[.ext]
where:
d: specifies the drive where the
file containing the transfer request
resides. Type the letter followed
by a colon to specify the drive. If \
the drive is not specified, the
default drive is assumed.
9-104
path specifies a path of directory
names. Type the directory names,
separated by backslashes (\). The
file name should be separated from
the last directory name by a
backslash (for example,
\DIR1 \DIR2\FILE1). The first
backslash is optional. If used, it
tells DOS to begin with the root
directory. The maximum length of
the path is 63 characters. If the
path name is not specified, the
current directory is used.
filename specifies the name of
the file that contains the transfer
request. The file name can be
from 1 to 8 characters .
.ext specifies the
transfer-request-filename
extension. This extension consists
of a period and up to 3 characters
immediately following the file
name. The extension is optional.
If you do not specify an extension,
the default extension, .TTO
(transfer to) is used. If you specify
only a period (.) with no
characters following it, no
extension is used.
9-105
Example:
TOPCB A:SALERPT.TTO
To automatically run a transfer request using
the automatic System/36-to-personal computer
transfer facility, type the TOPCB command
with a transfer-request-filename specified and
press the Enter key.
For example, to start the automatic
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility with the transfer request in file
CUSTREQ. TTO in drive A specified, you
would type:
TOPCB A:CUSTREQ
Then you would press the Enter key. The
following messages would appear:
PC Support/36
System/36-to-PC Transfer Facility
Version 04.00 (c) IBM Corp. 1987
While the transfer request is being recalled,
the following message is displayed:
Your transfer request is being recalled
While the transfer request is running, the
following message is displayed:
Your transfer request is running
After the transfer request runs, the
transferred records are sent to the output
device specified in the transfer request.
9-106
~
~
If you specified 1 (Display) for the Output device
prompt, the transferred records are sent to the
display. Each record is shown using one or more
lines of the display, depending on the length of
the record. Column headings are the SELECT
field names.
Each field of a transferred record is converted
from a System/36 data type to personal computer
ASCII. If a field cannot be converted, the field is
displayed with rectangles occupying the
character positions that could not be converted.
You can press Control key and the Numeric Lock
(Num Lock) key to interrupt displaying the
records. To continue displaying the records,
press any other key.
You can press the Escape key to stop displaying
the records. The display then shows the total
number of records that were displayed, and the
total number of records that had data that could
not be translated. For example:
9 record(s) displayed
o record(s) had data that could not be translated
If you specified 2 (Printer) for the Output device
prompt, the transferred records are sent to the
printer. The output is printed according to the
values specified in the transfer request. The
output is in column format. Column headings
are the SELECT field names.
9-107
Each field of a transferred record is
translated from a System/36 data type to
personal computer ASCII. If a field cannot be
translated, the field is printed with rectangles
occupying the character positions that could
not be translated.
If you want to stop printing the transferred
records before all of the records are printed,
you can press the Escape key. The display
then shows the total number of records
printed, and the number of records that had
data that could not be translated. For
example:
9 record(s) printed
o record(s) had data that could not be translated
If you are printing on a personal computer
printer (not a virtual printer), the transfer
facility resets the printer to print 80
characters per line, 6 lines per inch, 66 lines
per page, and no double strike, after printing
the transferred records.
If you are using a virtual printer:
9-108
•
If the print file remains open between
requests, the values specified for the first
request are retained.
•
When the print file is closed, the virtual
printer uses the values initially specified
for the virtual printer.
~
If you specified 3 (Disk) for the Output device
prompt, one of the following occurs:
•
If you specified that the format of the
transferred data is to be displayed, the
display appears as described in "Running
a System/36-to-Personal Computer
Transfer Request" earlier in this chapter.
While the format of the transferred data is
displayed, you can press the Control key
and the Numeric Lock key to interrupt it,
then press any key to continue displaying
it.
•
If you specified that the format of the
transferred data is to be printed, the
following message appears while the data
is being printed:
The format of transferred data is being
printed
You can press the Escape key to stop
printing the format of transferred data.
•
If you specified that the personal
computer file description should be saved,
the following message is displayed while
the file description is being written to the
specified disk or diskette file:
The file description is being written to
disk
9-109
The transferred records are sent directly to
the personal computer disk or diskette file,
and the following message is displayed:
Retrieved data records are being written
to disk
If you want to stop writing records to the disk
or diskette before the transfer request ends,
you can press the Escape key.
After the records are transferred, the
following messages are displayed showing the
total number of records written to the
personal computer disk or diskette file, and
the number of records containing data that
could not be translated. For example:
9 record(s) written to disk file
o record(s) had data that could not be translated
Error Messages
The automatic System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility displays an error
message if an error occurs while running a
transfer request. For some errors, you are
prompted for a response. Other errors cause
the transfer request to stop running. For
information on how to recover from these
errors, refer to the PC Support/36 Messages'
Guide.
9-110
i
Incompatibilities from the
Transfer Facility PRPQ
The System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility portion of PC Support/36 is intended
to be as compatible to the IBM System/36
Transfer Facility PRPQ as possible.
However, you should be aware of the
following incompatibilities:
•
The PC Support/36 transfer facility does
not work with the TMS data dictionary
that was used with the IBM System/36
Transfer Facility PRPQ. The TMS data
dictionary must be converted to IDDU
data definitions before being used with PC
Support/36. (A conversion program is
available.) For details, refer to the IBM
System/36 Getting Started with the
Interactive Data Definition Utility manual.
9-111
•
Queries (known in PC Support/36 as
transfer requests) that were created and
saved using the IBM System/36 Transfer
Facility PRPQ can be recalled and used
with the PC Support/36
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility. However, you may be required to
make one or more of the following
changes:
~
In the FROM prompt, you may have to
change the file name and format name
so that they conform to IDDU
specifications. For details on the
FROM syntax for PC Support/36, refer
to "Creating a System/36-to-Personal
Computer Transfer Request" earlier in
this chapter.
In the WHERE prompt, PC Support/36
does not support the circumflex
character (A) with the equal sign (=)
for not equal. Instead, you must use
the greater than and less than symbols (
together « > or > <) or the not equal
sign (-, =) to specify not equal.
•
9-112
If you created DOS redirected input files
for use with the IBM System/36 Transfer
Facility PRPQ, you must either change
those files (the keystroke sequences are
different for PC Support/36) or use the
automatic System/36-to-personal computer
transfer facility program to automatically
run the transfer requests.
Chapter 10. Transferring Data
from the Personal Computer to
the System/36
Contents
Introduction .....................
Running the Interactive Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Facility .......................
Creating a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request ....................
Specifying a System/36 File ...
Specifying a System/36 Library
Member ............. '. . ..
Modifying a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request ....................
Running a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request ....................
Saving a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request ....................
Recalling a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request ....................
Erasing a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request ....................
10-3
10-3
10-10
10-12
10-16
10-25
10-28
10-34
10-41
10-46
10-1
Ending the Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Facility ..................... .
Running the Automatic Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Facility ..................... .
Error Messages .............. .
10-2
10-46
10-47
10-53 ~
Introduction
This chapter explains how to run the
interactive and automatic Personal
Computer-to-System/36 transfer facility
programs, and how they can be used to
transfer data from the personal computer to
the System/36.
Before you can operate the transfer facility,
you must start PC Support/36 by following
the steps in Chapter 3, "Starting PC
Support/36." If you have not completed those
steps, turn to that chapter and follow the
instructions.
Running the Interactive
Personal
Computer-to-System/36
Transfer Facility
The interactive personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility
program prompts you, step-by-step, to supply
information about the data you want to
transfer. The information you supply is used
to create a personal computer-to-System/36
transfer request.
There are two commands to start the
interactive personal computer-to-System/36
transfer facility. They are FROMPC and
RFROMPC. Both commands have the same
format.
10-3
The FROMPC command uses the
IBM-supplied batch file, FROMPC.BAT, to
start the PC Support/36 programs required to
transfer data from the personal computer to
the System/36. You should use the FROMPC
command to start the personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility if you
are starting it for the first time since you
powered on or restarted your personal
computer.
You can use the RFROMPC command to start
the interactive personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility if you
are not starting it for the first time. The
RFROMPC command assumes that the other
programs required to run the personal
computer-to-SysteIIl/36 transfer facility have
already been started (using the FROMPC
command). The RFROMPC command runs
faster than the FROMPC command.
10-4
~
FROMPC
Purpose: This command is used to start the
interactive personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer
facility.
Format:
FROMPC
[transfer-request-filename] [Ix] [/y]
Remarks: transfer-request-filename
specifies the name of a transfer
request that was previously
created and saved using this
program (FROMPC). The
transfer-request-filename is
optional.
If you specify a
transfer-request-filename, it is
automatically recalled so that you
can modify or run it. If you do
not specify the
transfer-request-filename, the
transfer facility assumes you want
to create a new transfer request.
The format of the
transfer-request-filename is:
[d:] [path]filename[.ext]
where:
d: specifies the drive where the
file containing the transfer request
resides. Type a letter followed by
a colon to specify the drive. If the
drive is not specified, the default
drive is assumed.
10-5
path specifies a path of directory
names. Type the directory names,
separated by backslashes (\).
The file name should be separated
from the last directory name by a
backslash (for example,
\DIRI \DIR2\FILEl). The first
backslash is optional. If used, it
tells DOS to begin with the root
directory. The maximum length of
the path is 63 characters.
If a path name is not specified, the
current directory is used.
filename specifies the name of
the file that contains the transfer
request. The file name can be
from 1 to 8 characters.
. ext specifies the file name
extension. The extension consists
of a period and up to 3 characters
immediately following the file
name. This entry is optional. If
you do not specify an extension, a
default extension of .TFR (transfer
from) is used. If you specify only
a period (.) for the extension, no
extension is used.
10-6
~
~
Ix specifies the type of display
you are using. This parameter is
optional; it tells the program what
attributes to send to your display.
Values you can specify for x are
an uppercase or lowercase M or C.
For details on what to specify for
this parameter, refer to
Chapter 2, "What You Should
Know before Operating PC
Support/36. "
Iy specifies the display writing
speed. This parameter is optional;
it tells the program what speed
your display should write at.
Values you can specify for yare
an uppercase or lowercase H or S.
For details on what to specify for
this parameter, refer to
Chapter 2, "What You Should
Know before Operating PC
Support/36."
Examples:
The following command starts the interactive
personal computer-to-System/36 transfer
facility without specifying any parameters.
FROMPC
10-7
The following command starts the interactive
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility and automatically recalls the transfer
request in file CUSTREQ. TFR located in
drive A. A monochrome display attached to a
Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter card using
slow speed display writing is being used.
~
~
FROMPC A:CUSTREQ/M/S
If you want to start the personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility with
no parameters specified, type:
FROMPC
then· press the Enter key. The following
display appears:
-....
_
.....
--- --- _----_...w_
... --... -.
-. ..
-.
~
-~
yPC SUpport/38
Personal Computer - to - Systeml38 Transfer Facility
. . ._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _'OPTIOINS._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _....
Select one of these options; press Enter.
1 Create a transfer request
5 Recall a transfer request
8 Exit PC-to-S/38 Transfer Facility
Select ==> ..1
' " -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Version 04.00 (c) IBM Corp. 198'1'
59088637·5
This display allows you to create or recall a
personal computer-to-System/36 transfer
request.
10-8
~
~
If you want to start the personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility and
recall an existing transfer request, type
FROMPC followed by the
Transfer-request-filename parameter, then
press the Enter key. The following display
appears:
....---- - - .......
-------- ---- ...-
~
~
-~-
PC Support/38
...
Personal Computer - to - SyatemJ36 Transfer Facility
. . ._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ OPTIOINlilll_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . . .
Select one of these options; press Enter.
1 Create a transfer request
2 Modify the current transfer request
3 Run the current transfer request
4 Save the current transfer request
5 Recall a transfer request
8 Exit pc-to-S/36 Transfer Facility
Select ==>
~
' - - - - - - - - - - -_ _ _ Veraion 04.00 (c) IBM Corp. 1987
S9088664·5
The transfer request you specified on the
FROMPC command is auto~atically recalled
and ready for you to use. From this display,
you can also modify or run the transfer
request you recalled, recall another transfer
request, or create a new transfer request.
10-9
Refer to "Creating a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer Request,"
"Modifying a Personal Computer-to-System/36
Transfer Request," "Running a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer Request," or
"Recalling a Personal Computer-to-System/36
Transfer Request," later in this section.
For examples of how you can transfer data
from the personal computer to the System/36,
refer to Chapter 4, "Tutorial."
Creating a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request
This section describes how to create a
transfer request to transfer data from the
personal computer to the System/36. After
you create a transfer request, you can use the
OPTIONS menu to modify, save, or run it.
The transfer .request you create remains the
current transfer request until you specify 1
(Create a transfer request), 5 (Recall a
transfer request), or 6 (Exit PC-to-System/36
Transfer Facility).
Note:
10-10
If you want to save the current transfer
request, you must save it before you
create or recall another transfer request
or before you end the transfer facility.
Otherwise, the current transfer request
is deleted.
~
~
If you specify 1 (Create a new transfer
request), the following TO prompt appears:
r - - - - - - - - - P C - T O - S / 3 8 TRANSFER: C R E A T B - - - - - - - - ,
S/38
til_
e or
member
name
ro
__
_l1brary
___
__
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
~.
Fl-Help
F2=L1st
F3=Run
F4=Save
Esc=Opt1olll!ll Henu
89088638-1
While you are creating a transfer request, you
can:
•
Press the F1 key to display help text.
•
Press the F2 key to display a list of items
for a prompt.
•
Press the F3 key to run the transfer
request.
•
Press the F4 key to save the transfer
request.
•
Press the Escape key to return to the
OPTIONS menu.
10-11
TO
This prompt is required. It identifies the
name of the System/36 file or library member
to receive the transferred data. If you type
the name of a file, the file must have been
previously created on the System/36. The file
you specify must be sequential, direct, or
indexed, and cannot be an alternate indexed
file or the parent of an alternate indexed file.
Specifying a System/36 File
If you want to specify a System/36 file in the
TO prompt, the format of this prompt depends
on whether or not the file is defined by
interactive data definition utility (IDDU) data
definitions.
10-12
Specifying a File Defined by IDDU
Data Definitions
For a file defined by interactive data
definition utility (IDDU) data definitions, the
file name must be specified using the
following format:
file-label [/format-name]
where:
file-label is the name of the System/36 file.
The file label is required.
format-name is the name of the record
format. The format name is needed only if
there is more than one format definition for
the file. If you specify a format name, it must
be separated from the file label by a slash (/).
If you do not specify a format name and more
than one record format was defined for the
file, PC Support/36 uses the first record
format in the file definition.
10-13
If you do not know the file label, you can
leave the TO prompt blank and press the F2
key to get a list of file labels for all the
System/36 files that are defined by IDDU data
definitions. This list appears as follows:
r - - - - - - - - - P C - T O - S / 3 8 TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - . . . . ,
S/38 tile or library member nam.e
TO
1ST FOR T
FILE
RECL
TEXT
PAYROLL
Department Payroll File
0140
CUSTMAST Kaster Customer List
0098
INVENT01 Inventory tile #1
1140
1140
I NVENTO 2 Inventory tile #2
Item Kaster File
0540
ITEMMST
0120
SUPPLY01 SUpplier tile #1
0120
SUPPLY02 SUpplier tile #2
SUPPLY03 SUppli er tile #3
0120
0080
CUSTCDT
Customer charge til e
TEMPCDT
0080
•
F9=Select
Fl=Help
t/~
F2=List
=;Scroll
Esc=Exit List
F3=Run
F4=Save
89088639-3
Note:
10-14
The list you display will not look
exactly like the one shown here. The
actual file labels listed depend on the
files defined on your System/36.
You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys, or the Page Up and Page Down keys, to
find the desired file label, then press the F9
key to select it. This automatically copies the
file label to the TO input area.
You can list the format names for the file
label you specified by pressing the F2 key.
The cursor should be positioned immediately
after the file label. This displays a list of all
the format names for that file.
You can select a format name from the list
using the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys, or
the Page Up and Page Down keys, to find the
format name you want, then pressing the F9
key. This automatically copies the format
name to the TO input area, and separates it
from the file label by a slash (/).
Specifying a File Not Defined by IDDU
Data Definitions
For a file that is not defined by IDDU data
definitions, you must specify the file name
using the following format:
file-label
where file-label is the name of the System/36
file. The file label is required.
You cannot use the F2 key to list files that
are not defined by IDDU data definitions.
Pressing the F2 key lists only System/36 files
defined by IDDU data definitions.
10-15
Specifying a System/36 Library
Member
You can specify a System/36 library member
name in the TO prompt. The library member
name must be specified as follows:
library-name/member-type/member-name
where:
library-name is the name of the System/36
library. This parameter is required.
member-type is the type of System/36
member. You can enter an S for source or P
for procedure. The member type is required,
and must be separated from the library name
by a slash (/).
member-name is the name of the System/36
library member you wish to create or replace.
The member name is required, and must be
separated from the member type by a slash (f).
When you are transferring data to a
System/36 library member, you must type the
name of the library in the TO prompt. You
cannot use the F2 key to list library names.
Mter you enter the library name, you can use
the F2 key to list the member types and
member names of all source and procedure
members in the library.
10-16
Pressing the F2 key after you have entered
the library name and member type displays a
list of the member names in the library
having the specified member type.
You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys, or the Page Up and Page Down keys to
find the member type and/or name you want,
then press the F9 key to select it. This
automatically copies the member type and/or
name to the TO input area and separates it
from the library name by a slash (f).
Mter you complete the TO prompt, press the
Enter key. The FROM PC filename prompt
appears as follows:
. - - - - - - - - - P C - T O - S / 3 S TRANSFER: C R E A T E - - - - - - - - ,
ro
=~==OO=T~
____________________________
PC filename
FROM: PC 1'llename
B:
F1=Help
F2=L1st
F3=Run
F4=Save
Eac=Opt1ons Menu
S9088640-1
10-17
FROM PC filename
This prompt is required. It identifies the
name of the personal computer file containing
the data you want to transfer to the
System/36. The format of the FROM PC
filename prompt is as follows:
[d:] [path]filename[.ext]
If you are entering more than one file name,
the entries must be separated by a comma.
Refer to Chapter 2, "What You Should Know
before Operating PC Support/36."
You can press the F2 key to list the file
names you can use. You can also specify a
part of a file name using DOS global file
name characters (* or?) in the FROM PC
filename prompt input area to limit the
number of names listed. For example:
•
Pressing the F2 key with the value A:
produces a list of all the file names in the
current directory on the diskette in
drive A.
•
Pressing the F2 key with the value
A:SUPPLY\ produces a list of all file
names on the diskette in drive A in path
SUPPLY.
•
Pressing the F2 key with the value
B:*.DIF produces a list of all the file
names in the current directory on the
diskette in drive B with extension .DIF.
You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys, or the Page Up and Page Down keys, to
find the file name you want, then press the F9
key to select it.
10-18
When you have completed the FROM PC
filename prompt, press the Enter key. The
following display appears:
.....-_ _ _ _ _ _ PC-TO-S/38 TRANSFER: CREATE _ _ _ _ _ _- - ,
ro
=TE=~~DT~
FROK PC filename
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
••• • •
PC filename
B:CUSroKEa. REPOR,!\ KASTER.XPC
'l'ranafer data using
PC tile description? •
Fl-Help
F3=Run
F4=Save
.!
1=Yes
2=No
Eac=Optiona Kenu
59088665·1
Transfer data using PC file description?
This prompt is required. It specifies whether
or not a PC file description is to be used to
transfer the data to the System/36. Specify
one of the following:
•
1 (Yes), if you are transferring data to a
System/36 file that is defined by IDDU
data definitions
•
2 (No), if you are transferring data to a
System/36 file that is not defined by IDDU
data definitions, or to a System/36 library
member
10-19
If you specify 1 (Yes) for this prompt, the
following display appears:
r - -_ _ _ _ _ _ Pc-TO-S/38 TRANSFER: CREATE _ _ _ _ _ _---,
TO
~TE=~~C~DT~
______________________________
FROM PC filename
• • • •
B: CUSTOHEH>. REPOR'r\ KASTER. XPC
Transfer data using
PC tile description! •
1
PC tilename
l=Yes
2=No
PC file description
name. • • • • • • ••
PC 1'11 ename
B:CUSTOHEH>. REPORT, KASTER.FDF
Fl=He1p
F2=List
F3=Run
F4=Save
Esc=PPtions Menu
59088666-1
PC file description name
This prompt appears only if you specified 1
(Yes) for the Transfer data using PC file
description prompt.
This prompt is required. The PC file
description name prompt specifies the name of
the personal computer file description file
containing the description of the data to be
transferred.
The personal computer file description file
can be created for you when you transfer data
from the System/36 to the personal computer.
(Refer to "Sending Output to a Disk" in
Chapter 9, "Transferring Data from the
System/36 to the Personal Computer.")
10-20
If you have not previously transferred the
data from the System/36 to the personal
computer, you will need to create a file
description file. To do this, refer to Chapter
6, "The Transfer Facility" in the PC
Support/36 Technical Reference.
The file description file defines the following:
•
The file type of the personal computer file
to be transferred. The file type can be one
of the following:
ASCII text
DOS random
BASIC sequential
BASIC random
DIF
No conversion
•
The field names and the order in which
they appear in each data record.
•
The personal computer data type of each
field.
•
The size and number of decimal positions
of each field.
A default file description name automatically
appears. This default file description name is
created using the values you specified in the
FROM PC filename prompt. The default
extension is .FDF.
It is recommended that you use the default
extension. However, you can specify your
own extension. If you do not want to use any
extension, specify only a period (.) after the
file name.
10-21
If you do not want to use the default file
description name, you can enter your own file
description name using the file name format
described in Chapter 2, "What You Should
Know before Operating PC Support/a6."
If you do not know the name of the personal ~
computer file description file that you want to ~
use, press the F2 key. This displays a list of
all of the file description files on the default
disk drive in the current directory.
You can also enter part of the name using
DOS global file name characters (* or ?) in
the File description name input area, to limit
the number of names listed. In this case,
pressing the F2 key lists all of the file
description files with names that match the
characters you entered.
You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys, or the Page Up and Page Down keys, to
find the file name you want, then press the F9
key to select a name from the list. This
automatically copies the name to the File
description name input area.
Note:
If the file description file was created
by a JOIN operation, it must be edited
to remove the file qualifiers.
After you complete the File description name
prompt, press the Enter key. The transfer
request is now complete, and the OPTIONS
menu appears.
10-22
If you specified 2 (No) for the Transfer data
using PC file description prompt, the
following display appears:
. . - - - - - - - - P c - T O - S / 3 8 TRANSFER: C R E A T E , - - - - - - - . .
TO
~TE=~~C=DT~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
FROM PC filename
• • • •
B: CUSTOMER\ REPOR'1\ MASTER.XPC
Transfer data using
PC file description? •
File type
~
••••••• !
PC filename
l=Yes
2=No
l=ASCII text
3=BASIC sequential
5~DIF(TK)
Fl=Help
F3=Run
F4=Save
2=DOS random
4=BASIC random
S-No conversion
Esc=Optlons Menu
59088642·'
File type
This prompt appears only if you specified 2
(No) for the Transfer data using PC file
description file prompt.
This prompt is required. You must specify
the type of personal computer file you named
in the FROM PC filename prompt. The
default is ASCII text. For file types 1
through 5 (ASCII text, DOS random, BASIC
sequential, BASIC random, and DIF), the data
file should contain records with one ASCII
character field. For file type 6 (No
conversion), the data file should contain data
that needs no conversion.
10-23
After you complete the previous prompts and
press the Enter key, the transfer request is
created and the following OPTIONS menu
appears:
('"
PC-TO-S/38 TRANSFER
TO
TEKPCDT
FROM PC ~ilename
B:CUSTOKER\ REPORT\KASTER.XPC
Transfer data UBins
PC file deBcription?
!
PC file deBcriptlon
name •
B:CUSTOKER\ REPORT\ KASTER.FDF
. . . .
PC filename
l=YeB
2=No
PC filename
PTIO
Select one of theBe optionaJ presB Enter.
1 Create a transfer request
2 Modi ty the current transfer requeBt
3
Rtm the current transfer request
4 Save the current transfer requeBt
5 Recall a transfer requeBt
8 Exit PC-to-S/38 Transfer Facility
Sel ect ===)
~
'=
:;
89088643-1
From this display, you can modify, save, or
run the transfer request you just created.
Note:
10-24
If you want to save the current transfer
request, you must save it before you
create or recall another transfer request
or end the personal
computer-to-Systemf36 transfer facility.
Otherwise, the current transfer request
is deleted.
Modifying a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request
This section describes how to modify the
current transfer request. The current transfer
request is one that you previously created or
recalled. After you modify a transfer request,
you can use the OPTIONS menu to save or
run it.
Specify a 2 (Modify the current transfer
request) on the OPTIONS menu and press the
Enter key.
If you specified 1 (Yes) for the Transfer data
using PC file description prompt, the
following display appears:
Ir'"
r-------PC-TO-S/3S
TRANSFER : MODI F Y - , , - - - - - - -.....
.,' \
S/36 Ule or library member name
TO
~TE~~~C~DT~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
FROM PC tilename
•••••
B:CUSTOKE~ REPOR1\ KASTER.XPC
Transter data using
PC tile description? •
!.
PC tilename
1=Yes
2=No
PC tile description
PC ti I ename
name • • • • • • • • •
B: CUSTOKE~ REPOR1\ KASTER. FDF
F1=Help
F.2=List
F3=Run
F4=Save
Esc=Options Menu
59088647·1
10-25
If you specified 2 (No) for the Transfer data
using PC file description prompt, the
following display appears:
. . - - - - - - - - - P C - T O - S / 3 8 TRANSFER:
S/38 :tile or library :member name
TO
=TE=KPC~D~T
FROM PC t 11 ena:me • • • • •
B:CUSTOKER\REPORT\KASTER.XPC
Trahllter data using
PC, tile description? •
~
PC tile type • • • • • • 1
F1=Help
F2=Llst
MODIFY---------,
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
F3=R\m
F4=Save
PC tilename
1=Yes
2=No
1=ASCII text
3=BASIC sequential
6=DIF(TK)
2=DOS rande:m
4=BASIC rando:m
8=No conversion
Esc=Opt1ons Menu
S9088648-1
You can modify the transfer request by
moving the cursor to any field and typing the
changes you want to make. Refer to
"Creating a Personal Computer-to-System/36
Transfer Request" earlier in this chapter for
details on what you can enter.
10-26
While you are modifying the transfer request,
you can:
•
Press the F1 key to display help text.
•
Press the F2 key to display a list of items
for a prompt.
•
Press the F3 key to run the transfer
request.
•
Press the F4 key to save the modified
transfer request.
•
Press the Escape key to return to the
OPTIONS menu.
10-27
Running a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request
This section describes how to run a personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer request.
Before you run a transfer request, you must
have previously created, recalled, or modified
the transfer request.
Note:
You should be aware that, when data is
transferred from the personal computer
to the System/36, any data in the
existing System/ 36 fi~e is replaced by
the data being transferred.
j
Specify a 3 (Run the current transfer request)
on the OPTIONS menu and press the Enter
key. If the OPTIONS menu is not on the
display, you can run a transfer request by
pressing the F3 (Run) key. The following
window appears while the transfer request is
running:
r - - - - - _ _ _PC-TO-S/38
TO
~TE=~~C=DT~
TRANSFER : RuN--_ _ _ _ _ _- - ,
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
FROM PC filename • • • • •
B:CUSTOKER\ REPORT\ MASTER.XPC
Transfer data usil'l8
PC file description? •
.1
PC file description
name • • • • • • • • •
B:CUSTOKE~ REPORT\MASTER.FDF
PC filename
l=Yes
2=No
PC filename
. -______________~u~__________________~
III
•
Your transfer request is runnil'l8
I,
Please wait
\:-..----~--------~--------~--------~--------~------------------~----~Runn--.. :J
i
59088652-3
10-28
While the transfer request is running, the PC
file description file (if specified) is read from
the disk or diskette and processed. The
System/36 and personal computer exchange
information while getting ready to transfer
the data. When this exchange is complete,
the following display appears while the data
records are being sent to the System/36:
. . . . - - - - - - - - - PC-TO-S/36 TRANSFER: R U N . - - - - - - - - - ,
ro
~TE~~~D~T
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
FROM PC tilename
••
B:CUSTOKER\ REPOR'I\KASTER.XPC
PC tilename
Transter data using
PC tile description? • .!
i=Yes
PC tile description
name • • • • • • • • •
PC tilename
2=No
B: CUSTOKER\ REPOR'l\ KASTER. FDF
••
~________________~nrul~________________- ,
Data records are being sent to the Systeml38
Please wait
Esc=Ex1t Run
Runn1
S9088653·1
The personal computer sends the records, one
at a time, from the file specified in the FROM
PC filename prompt. The records are
converted and stored on the System/36 in the
file or library member specified in the TO
prompt.
10-29
During this conversion process, it is possible
that conversion errors may occur. For
example, a number in the personal computer
file may need to be rounded in order to fit
into the System/36 field, or the length of a
record in the personal computer file is not the
same as what the System/36 is expecting.
For these errors, you will receive an error
message, the number of the record in the
personal computer file in which the error
occurred, and, in some cases, information
about the specific field in the record
containing the error. The following display
shows an example of a conversion error:
r r " , r - - - - - - - - P C - T O - S / 3 8 TRANSFER:
TO
RUN--------,
cusTcn T
FROM PC f'i 1 enalne •
B:CUSTOMER\REPORT\HASTER.XPC
Transf'er data usi~
PC f'i Ie descriptionY • i
PC f'ilename
1=Yes
2=No
.-------------------ERROR.---------------------.
8153-Data in this f'ield is incorrect or does not lDatch PC data type
PC record number 3
-----System/3S----Name • • BALDUE
Data type • •
Size in bytes • •
D1gits • • • • • •
Decimal posi tiona • •
• EBCDIC Zoned
-------PC------ASCII Numeric
S
S
8
2
2
Press Esc to exit operation
S9088669-1
A severe conversion error can stop the data
from being transferred. In this case, you must
stop the transfer request, correct the error,
and run the transfer request again.
10-30
On less severe errors, you will have an option
to continue transferring data. If you choose
to continue transferring data, arid the error
occurs in the same place in another record,
you will not receive another message. In this
case, the transfer facility automatically
continues running the transfer request.
When the transfer request ends, the transfer
facility displays the number of records that
had errors.
You can end the transfer at any time by
pressing the Escape key. Any records already
sent to the System/a6 remain in the file or
library member and the file is closed.
When the transfer request stops running (the
data was sent to the System/a6 or you pressed
the Escape key to end the run), a display
similar to the following appears:
RUN---------,
. . - - - - - - - P C - T O - S / 3 6 TRANSFER:
TO
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
~TI_R~~_T~
FROH PC tilenalllll • • • • •
B:CUSTOHER!. REPOR'l\ HASTER.XPC
Transter data using
PC tile description? •
1
PC tllenallle
l=Yes
2=No
PC tile description
name • __ • _ •• _ •
PC tllenalllB
B:CUSTOHER!. REPOR1\HASTER.FDF
. .______________~TA.n9____________________•
•
5 record(s) suecesstully sent to the Syateml36
Esc-Exit Run
59088654-1
10-31
If there were any conversion errors while the
transfer request was running, you will see
additional messages in the STATUS window.
These messages tell you the number of
records that had a particular conversion
error. The following status messages can
occur (n is the number of records affected):
10-32
•
n record(s) had data that was padded:
Error message 8154 occurred, and you
chose to continue running the transfer
request. This status message shows the
number of records that had this error.
•
n record(s) had data that was
truncated: Error message 8155 occurred,
and you chose to continue running the
transfer request. This status message
counts the number of records that had this
error.
•
n record(s) had data that was rounded:
Error message 8152 occurred, and you
chose to continue running the transfer
request. This status message counts the
number of records that had this error.
•
n record(s) had data that was lost:
Error message 8158 occurred, and you
chose to continue running the transfer
request. This status message counts the
number of records that had this error.
•
n record(s) had data that was missing:
Error message 8157 occurred, and you
chose to continue running the transfer
request. This status message counts the
number of records that had this error.
•
n record(s) had numeric data with too
many digits: Error message 8156
occurred, and you chose to continue
running the transfer request. This status
message counts the number of records that
had this error.
•
n record(s) had extra data not
transferred: Error message 8171
occurred, and you chose to continue
running the transfer request. This status
message counts the number of records that
had this error.
•
n record(s) had data that could not be
translated or n bytes could not be
translated: These messages occur when
character data could not be translated
from ASCII to EBCDIC. The number of
records that had data that could not be
translated or the number of bytes is
shown. Each character that could not be
translated was set to hexadecimal 00 and
transferred to the System/36.
To reduce the number of untranslatable
characters, you can change the ASCII to
EBCDIC translation table used by the
transfer facility. To do this, use the
translation table utility and the PC
Support/36 configuration file
(CONFIG.S36). Refer to Chapter 2, "The
PC Support/36 Configuration File" in the
PC Support/36 Technical Reference for
details.
10-33
•
n bytes was the longest record in the
PC file: This status message occurs when
you transfer data from a personal
computer ASCII text file without a
personal computer file description, and
one or more of the records had extra data
that was not truncated.
~
For more details on error messages, refer to
the PC Support/36 Messages Guide.
After you finish with the status information,
press the Escape key to return to the
OPTIONS menu.
Saving a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request
This section describes how to save the current
transfer request. The current transfer request
is the transfer request you previously created,
modified, or recalled. After you save a
transfer request, you can use the OPTIONS
menu to recall, modify, or run it.
t
~
You can also automatically run the saved
transfer request using the automatic personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility. For
details, refer to "Running a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer Request"
later in this chapter.
You should save a transfer request if you
need to transfer the same information often.
Saving a transfer request prevents you from
having to create a transfer request each time
you want to transfer this information.
10-34
~
To save a transfer request, enter a 4 (Save the
current transfer request) on the OPTIONS
menu and press the Enter key. If the
OPTIONS menu is not on the display, you can
save a transfer request by pressing the F4
(Save) key. The following display appears:
. - -_ _ _ _ _ _ PC-TO-S/38 TRANSFER: SAVE _ _ _ _ _ _ _---.
at traruster request
to be saved • • • • • • • • •
Name
B:
Replace old tile!
Description
Fl-Help
•••••••
PC tilename
!l
l=Yes
2=No
• • • • • • • • • • _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
P2-List
Esc-Options Menu
S9088649-1
Name of transfer request to be saved
Using the following format, enter the name of
the personal computer disk or diskette file in
which you want to save the transfer request:
[d:] [path]filename [. ext]
10-35
The DOS default disk drive, followed by a
colon, is automatically typed in.
Refer to "File Name Format" in
Chapter 2, "What You Should Know before
Operating PC Support/36" for details on how
to enter a file name.
If you want a list of all the transfer request
names on the disk or diskette, you can press
the F2 key . You can also specify part of a
name using DOS global file name characters
(* or ?) in the Transfer request name input
area, to limit the number of names listed. In
this case, pressing the F2 key lists all of the
transfer request names that match the
characters you entered.
If you do not specify an extension, the
transfer facility automatically limits the
transfer request file names listed to those
with an extension of .TFR. If you specify
only a period (.), no extension is used.
10-36
For example:
•
Pressing the F2 key with the transfer
request name input area containing A:
lists all the transfer request file names on
the diskette in drive A in the current
directory that have an extension of .TFR.
•
Pressing the F2 key with the value
A:TRFILE.* lists all the transfer request
file names on the diskette in drive A in
the current directory having a file name of
TRFILE with any extension (for example,
TRFILE.OOl, TRFILE.002, and so forth).
•
Pressing the F2 key with the value
A:TR*. TFR lists all the transfer request
file names on the diskette in drive A in
the current directory having TR as the
first 2 characters of the file name and
anything as the remaining characters of
the file name with .TFR as the extension
(for example, TRACCTl.TFR,
TRBATCH.TFR, and so forth).
•
Pressing the F2 key with the A:*. produces
a list of all transfer request file names on
drive A in the current directory with no
extension.
10-37
You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys to find the transfer request name you
want, then you can press the F9 key to select
it. This automatically copies the name from
the list to the Transfer request name input
area.
After you complete the Transfer request name
prompt, press the Enter key. The cursor
moves to the Replace old file prompt.
Replace old file?
This prompt is required. It specifies whether
or not you want the file you specified in the
Name of transfer request to be saved prompt
replaced with the current transfer request.
Specify one of the following:
1 (Yes), if the file should be replaced (if it
exists)
2 (No), if the file should not be replaced
The default is 2 (No). If you specify 2 and the
file exists, you are given a chance to cancel
the save operation or continue, replacing the
file with the transfer request.
If you are creating the file (it does not
already exist), you should complete this
prompt as though the file already exists.
After you complete the Replace old file
prompt, press the Enter key. The cursor
moves to the Description prompt.
10-38
Description
The Description prompt is optional. It allows
you to type a short description of the transfer
request. The description can be up to 40
characters long. This description is saved
with the transfer request so that it can be
displayed the next time a list is requested
during a save or recall operation.
If you selected the transfer request name from
a list, the description is automatically copied
into the input area for this prompt.
After you complete the Description prompt,
press the Enter key. The following display
appears:
.---_ _ _ _ _ _ PC-TO-S/36 TRANSFER:
of transfer request
to be saved • • • • • • • • •
B:UP01.TFR
RI!Iplace 0 fa 'til at • • • • • • • ~
SA',v""~
_ _ _ _ _ _----,
NaIDe
Desoription
PC filename
1 Yes
2 No
• • • • • • • • • . Customer update request
. . ._ _ _ _ _ _ _~TATUS: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . .
•
Your transfer request is being saved
Please wait
~------------------------~i~
59088650-1
10-39
The transfer request is saved in the specified
personal computer disk or diskette file. When
the transfer request is successfully saved, the
following display appears:
. -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ pc-To-S/38 TRANSFEDK.-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---,
TO
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
~TE~KP~C~D~T
FROM PC ~ilename •
B: CUSTOMER\ REPORT\ MASTER.XPC
Trans~er
PC
~ile
PC
data usillS
description? • !.
PC ~ile description
nalne • • • • • • • • •
B: CUSTOMER\ REPORT\ MASTER. FDF
. .____________________
Select one
o~
~ilename
l=Yes
PC
~i
2=No
1 enalne
~.PTIO~______________________•
these options; press Enter.
1 Create a transfer request
2 Modi~ the current trans~er request
3 Run the current transfer request
4 Save the current trana~er request
5 Recall a transfer request
8 Exit PC-to-S/38 Trans~er Facility
Select ===> 2
L..-------------your
trans~er
request has beelrl succeast'ully aaved-
59088651·1
The saved transfer request remains the
current transfer request.
Note:
10-40
The transfer request is saved in a
personal computer file that is intended
for use only by the transfer facility. Do
not change the contents of this file. If
you want to change the transfer request,
you must recall the request and modify
it using the transfer facility.
Recalling a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request
This section describes how to recall a transfer
request from a personal computer disk or
diskette file. You must save a transfer
request before you can recall it. After you
recall it, you can modify or run it.
If you specify a 5 (Recall a transfer request)
on the OPTIONS menu and press the Enter
key, the following display appears:
~------PC-TO-S/38
TRANSFER: RE:CALI...---------.
Name of transfer request
to be reoall ed • • • • • • • •
PC filename
B:
Fl-Help
F2=List
Eso=Opttons Menu
59088644-1
Name of transfer request to be recalled
Type the name of the personal computer disk
or diskette file that contains the transfer
request to be recalled. This prompt is
required.
10-41
You must specify the transfer request using
the following format:
[d:] [path]filename[.ext]
The DOS default disk drive followed by a
colon is automatically typed in.
Refer to "File Name Format" in
Chapter 2, "What You Should Know before
Operating PC Support/36" for details on how
to enter a file name.
If you want a list of all the transfer request
file names on the disk or diskette, press the
F2 key. You can also specify part of a name
using DOS global file name characters (* or ?)
to limit the number of names listed. In this
case, pressing the F2 key lists all the transfer
request names that match the characters you
entered.
If you do not specify an extension, the
transfer facility automatically limits the
transfer request file names listed to those
with an extension of .TFR. If you specify
only a period (.) for the extension, no
extension is used.
10-42
For example:
•
Pressing the F2 key with the transfer
request name input area containing A:
lists all the transfer request file names on
the diskette in drive A in the current
directory that have an extension of .TFR.
•
Pressing the F2 key with the value
A:TRFILE. * lists all the transfer request
file names on the diskette in drive A in
the current directory having a file name of
TRFILE with any extension (for example,
TRFILE.001, TRFILE.002, and so forth).
•
Pressing the F2 key with the value
A:TR*.TFR lists all the transfer request
file names on the diskette in drive A in
the current directory having TR as the
first 2 characters of the file name and
anything as the remaining characters of
the file name with .TFR as the extension
(for example, TRACCTl.TFR,
TRBATCH.TFR, and so forth).
•
Pressing the F2 key with the A:*. produces
a list of all transfer request file names on
drive A in the current directory with no
extension.
10-43
You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys, or the Page Up and Page Down keys to
find the name you want, then select the name
from the list by pressing the F9 key. This
automatically copies the selected name to the
Transfer request name input area.
After you type the transfer request name,
"press the Enter key. The following window
appears:
r - - - - - - - - P C - T O - S / 3 8 TRANSFER: R E C A L L - - - - - - - - ,
Name of transfer request
to be recalled • • • • • • • •
PC filename
B:UP01.TFR
. . ._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ :STATUSI_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. .
•
Your transfer request is being recalled
Please wait
~------------------------------Rwming
S9088645-1
10-44
The transfer request is read from the disk or
diskette and becomes the current transfer
request. A display then appears containing
the values of the transfer request just
recalled:
r - - - - - - - - P C - T O - S / 3 8 TRANSFER : M O D I F Y - - - - - - - . . . ,
TO
T=E=~~T~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
FROM PC filename • • •
B:CUSTOKJ!!R\REPORT\KASTER.XPC
Transfer data using
PC file description? •
1.
PC file description
name • • • • • • • • •
B:CUSTOKJ!!R\REPORT\KASTER.FDF
Fl=Help
F2=List
F3=Run
F4=Save
PC filename
l=Yes
2=No
PC filename
Esc=Optiona Menu
S9088646-1
You can:
•
Press the F1 key to display help text.
•
Press the F2 key to display a list of items
for a prompt.
•
Press the Fa key to run the transfer
request.
•
Modify the transfer request, then press the
Fa key to run the transfer request.
•
Press the Escape key to return to the
OPTIONS menu.
10·45
Erasing a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer
Request
If you no longer want to use a previously
saved transfer request, you can erase it using
the DOS ERASE command. Refer to the IBM
Personal Computer Disk Operating System
manual for more information about erasing
files.
~
~
If you did not specify an extension when you
saved the transfer request, the transfer
facility automatically uses the default
extension, .TFR. Therefore, you must specify
the extension .TFR when you erase the file.
Ending the Personal
Computer-to-System/36
Transfer Facility
You can end the personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility by
selecting or typing a 6 (Exit PC-to-S/36
Transfer Facility) on the OPTIONS menu and
pressing the Enter key, or by pressing the
Control and Break keys.
When you end the personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility, the
DOS prompt returns. You can then type the
command to start another PC Support/a6
program, or continue with another personal
computer application.
10-46
,~
~
Running the Automatic
Personal
Computer-to-System/36
Transfer Facility
The automatic personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility runs a
previously created and saved personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer request
without prompting you for information. To
create and save a transfer request, you must
use the interactive personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility.
You might want to use the automatic
personal computer-to-System/36 transfer
facility when you require the same
information to be transferred to the System/36
from your personal computer often.
For example, if you are required to send new
customer account information to a System/36
file daily, you could use the automatic
personal computer-to-System/36 transfer
facility to run the required transfer request
and transfer the current data to the System/36
each day. That data could then be used to
update a customer master file.
The automatic personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility can be
useful when you need to maintain integrity of
the data being transferred. When the
automatic personal computer-to-System/36
transfer facility runs, no prompts or displays
appear; you cannot create or change a
transfer request while the automatic personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility is
running.
10-47
There are two commands you can use to run
the automatic personal computer-to-System/36
transfer facility. They are FROMPCB and
RFROMPCB. Both commands have the same
format.
The FROMPCB command uses the batch file,
FROMPCB.BAT to start the batch personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility
program. This file automatically starts the
PC Support/36 programs required to transfer
data from the personal computer to the
System/36.
The FROMPCB command should be used to
start the automatic personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility if you
are starting it for the first time since you
powered on or restarted your personal
computer.
You can use the RFROMPCB command to
start the automatic personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility if you
are not starting it for the first time. The
RFROMPCB command assumes that the other
programs required to run the personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility have
already been started (using the FROMPCB
command). The RFROMPCB command runs
faster than the FROMPCB command.
10-48
I
FROMPCB
Purpose: This command starts the
automatic personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer
facility.
Format:
FROMPCB
transfer-request-filename
Remarks: transfer-request-filename
specifies the name of a transfer
request that was previously
created and saved. The
transfer-request-filename is
required. The format of the
transfer-request-filename is:
[d:] [path]filename[ .ext]
where:
d: specifies the drive where the
file containing the transfer request
resides. Type the letter followed
by a colon to specify the drive. If
the drive is not specified, the
default drive is assumed.
10-49
path specifies a path of directory
names. Type the directory names,
separated by backslashes (\). The
file name should be separated from
the last directory name by a
backslash (for example,
\DIR1 \DIR2\FILE1). The first
backslash is optional. If used, it
tells DOS to begin with the root
directory. The maximum length of
the path is 63 characters. If the
path name is not specified, the
current directory is used.
filename: specifies the name of
the file that contains the transfer
request. The file name can be
from 1 to 8 characters .
. ext specifies the
transfer-request-filename
extension. This extension consists
of a period and up to 3 characters
immediately following the file
name.
The extension is optional. If you
do not specify an extension, the
default extension, .TFR (transfer
from) is used. If you specify only
a period (no characters following
it), no extension is used.
10-50
Example:
FROMPCB A:CUSTRPT.TFR
To automatically run a transfer request using
the automatic personal computer-to-System/36
transfer facility, type the FROMPCB
command with a transfer-request-filename
specified and press the Enter key.
For example, to start the automatic personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility with
the transfer request in file CUSTREQ.TFR in
drive A, you would type:
FROMPCB A:CUSTREQ
Then you would press the Enter key. The
following messages would appear:
PC Support/36
PC-to-System/36 transfer facility
Version 04.00 (c) IBM Corp. 1987
While the transfer request is being recalled,
the following message is displayed:
Your transfer request is being recalled
While the transfer request is running, the
following message is displayed:
Your transfer request is running
10-51
While the transferred records are being sent
to the System/36, the following message
appears:
Data records are being sent to the
System/36
The data records are read, one at a time, from
the personal computer file. The records are
converted, then stored on the System/36 in
the file or library member specified in the TO
prompt when the transfer request was created
or modified.
You can end the transfer request at any time
by pressing the Escape key. Any records
already sent to the System/36 remain in the
file or library member, and the file is closed.
When the transfer request stops running
(either all the data was sent or you pressed
the Escape key), the following status message
is displayed:
n record(s) successfully sent to the
System/36
I
where n is the number of records successfully
transferred.
In addition, one or more status messages
might appear, showing the number of records
that contained data that was padded,
truncated, rounded, lost, missing, or too long,
and the number of records that contained
untranslatable characters.
10-52
For more information on the messages that
might be displayed when a transfer request is
run, refer to "Running a Personal
Computer-to-System/36 Transfer Request"
earlier in this chapter.
If no file description file was specified when
the transfer request was created or modified,
and extra data was found in one or more
records while being transferred from a
personal computer ASCII text file, the length
of the longest record in the personal computer
file is displayed.
Error Messages
The automatic personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility
displays an error message if an error occurs
while running a transfer request. For some
errors, you are prompted for a response.
Other errors cause the transfer request to
stop running. For information on how to
recover from these errors, refer to the PC
Support/36 Messages Guide.
If an error occurs in a specific field in a
record, a message is displayed showing the
record number, field name, and field
information for the field in error. If the same
error occurs on the same field in another
record, you will not receive another error
message.
The transfer facility automatically continues
running the transfer request. When the
transfer request ends, the transfer facility
displays the number of records that contained
errors.
10-53
10-54
Chapter 11. U sing the PC
Support/36 Message Facility
Contents
Introduction .....................
Installation .....................
Configuration ...................
Setup CONFIG.S36 .............
Creating an Alternate Configuration
File ........................
Starting the Message Facility .......
Message Facility Commands ........
STARTMSG ..................
Use of an Alternate
Configuration File for
STARTMSG ..............
MSG .......................
Interactive MSG Command ...
Command Line MSG Command
RCVMSG ...................
STOPMSG ..................
11-2
11-3
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-7
11-8
11-9
11-11
11-14
11-14
11-23
11-25
11-27
11-1
Introd uction
The PC Support/36 message facility allows
you to communicate with other display
stations and personal computers located in
the IBM Token-Ring Network.
This facility is provided to you if you are
connected to a System/36 via a IBM
Token-Ring Network. If you are connected to
a System/36 via a 5250 Emulation Program
you can use the Message command that the
System/36 currently supports.
I
The PC Support/36 message facility consists
of three components that are used in addition
to the IBM Token-Ring Network PC Adapter
Support Interface and the IBM Token-Ring
Network Router. These components are:
•
11-2
An optional resident message receiver to
receive or notify of incoming messages.
•
A user executable message application
program which can send and receive
messages.
•
A user executable message receive
program that retrieves messages queued
for the user or personal computer by the
System/36, and stores them in a message
file on the personal computer.
~
Installation
All of the code necessary for the PC
Support/36 message facility will be on your
virtual disk when you complete the PC
Support/36 installation. Refer to Chapter 1,
"Installation" of the PC Support/36 Technical
Reference.
Configuration
To use the PC Support/36 message facility
you can add or change identifiers in
CONFIG.S36 or create an alternate
configuration file. If no message facility
identifiers are found in CONFIG.S36 or your
alternate configuration file the default values
will be used. A detailed description of the
message facility identifiers can be found in
Chapter 2, "The PC Support/36 Configuration
File," of the PC Support/36 Technical
Reference.
Note:
For the remainder of this chapter,
reference will be made to the
configuration file. This term will be
used to mean either CONFIG.S36 or the
alternate configuration file you
specified on the STARTMSG
command.
11-3
Setup CONFIG.S36
To add identifiers to the CONFIG.S36 file,
type:
COpy CONFIG.S36
+ CON CONFIG.S36
This COpy command tells DOS to copy the
information into the CONFIG.S36 file on the
default drive. Press the Enter key and type
each identifier and its parameters that you
want to change or add, press the Enter key
after each identifier.
Note:
If you are creating a CONFIG.S36 file,
the first entry in the file must be
SUPPORT/36.
When you have entered all of the identifiers
and parameters you wish to change or add do
the following:
1. Press the F6 key.
2. Press the Enter key again.
This ends the COPY command and saves the
file.
When you add or change any of the
configuration file commands or identifiers,
the changes are not in effect until the next
time you enter STARTMSG.
11-4
Creating an Alternate
Configuration File
If you are planning to use an alternate
configuration file with the STARTMSG
command you can create the file using an
editor (such as EDLIN) or the DOS COPY
command. This section describes how to
create a configuration file using the DOS
COPY command directly from the standard
input device.
Follow these steps to create an alternate
configuration file using the DOS COPY
command.
1. At the DOS prompt, type:
COpy CON filename. ext
The format of the filename is:
[d:] [path] filename [.ext]
where:
d: specifies the drive where the file
resides. Type a letter followed by a colon
to specify the drive. If the drive is not
specifi~d, the default drive is assumed.
path specifies a path of directory names.
Type the directory names, separated by
backslashes (\). The file name should be
separated from the last directory name by
a backslash (for example,
\DIRI \DIR2\FILEl). The first backslash
is optional. If used, it tells DOS to begin
with the root directory.
11-5
If the path name is not specified, the
current directory is used.
filename specifies the name of the file.
The filename can be from 1 to 8
characters .
.ext specifies the filename extension. The
extension consists of a period and up to 3
characters. This entry is optional. If
used, the extension must immediately
follow the filename.
2. Press the Enter key.
3. Type the message identifier and parameter
you want in the file. Press the Enter key
after you type each identifier and its
parameter.
4. When you have finished typing all of the
identifiers press the F6 key and then the
Enter key. This ends the COpy CON
command and saves the file.
This' configuration file will not be effective
until you enter the STARTMSG command
with the alternate configuration file name
parameter.
11-6
~
Starting the Message Facility
The message facility can be started
automatically by entering the STARTMSG
command in an AUTOEXEC.BAT file. If you
choose to use the STARTMSG command in a
.BAT file, the message facility will be loaded
using the identifiers in the CONFIG.S36 file
or the alternate configuration file you specify
on the STARTMSG command. If your
CONFIG.S36 file or your alternate
configuration file does not contain message
facility identifiers, the defaults for these
identifiers will be used. A configuration file
is not necessary for the message facility. If a
configuration file is not found, the default
values for the identifiers will be used. For
more information about the message facility
configuration identifiers, refer to Chapter 2,
"The PC Support/36 Configuration File," of
the PC Support/36 Technical Reference.
11-7
Message Facility Commands
There are four commands that are valid when
you are using the message facility. These
commands are:
•
STARTMSG
•
MSG
•
RCVMSG
•
STOPMSG
These commands are not valid if you have a
5250 Emulation Program operational on your
personal computer. If you have a 5250
Emulation Program operational and you issue
a message facility command an error message
is issued and the command is terminated.
11-8
STARTMSG
This command starts or changes the resident
receive function, and sets up the translate
tables for the other message facility
commands. This command is optional. The
format is:
d: STARTMSG [configuration file] [/x] [/y]
where:
d: specifies the name of the disk or diskette
drive, or virtual drive, where STARTMSG
resides. Type a letter followed by a colon to
specify the drive. For example, A represents
the first drive, B represents the second. The
drive is required only if STARTMSG is not on
the default drive.
configuration file is the name of the
alternate configuration file you are using
instead of CONFIG.S36.
The format of the STARTMSG configuration
file is:
[c:] [path] filename [.ext]
where:
c: specifies the drive where the file
containing the STARTMSG entries resides.
Type a letter followed by a colon to specify
the drive. If the drive is not specified, the
default drive is assumed.
11-9
path specifies a path of directory names.
Type the directory names, separated by
backslashes (\). The file name should be
separated from the last directory name by a
backslash (for example, \DIRI \DIR2\FILEl).
The first backslash is optional. If used, it
tells DOS to begin with the root directory.
If the path name is not specified, the current
directory is used.
filename specifies the name of the file that
contains the STARTMSG entries. The
filename can be from 1 to 8 characters .
. ext specifies the filename extension. The
extension consists of a period and up to 3
characters. This entry is optional. If used,
the extension must immediately follow the
filename.
Note:
If you specify an alternate configuration
file, all of the identifiers in the
alternate configuration file will be used
instead of the entries in CONFIG.S36.
x specifies the type of monitor being used. It
is either an uppercase or lowercase C for a
color display or an uppercase or lowercase M
for a monochrome display. If this value is
entered, it overrides the value specified on
the DSPL identifier in the configuration file.
11-10
y specifies the display write speed. It is
either an uppercase or lowercase H for high
speed display writing or an uppercase or
lowercase S for slow speed display writing. If
the speed parameter is not specified, slow
speed display writing will be used with all
graphic adapter cards except the Enhanced
Graphics Adapter. If this value is entered, it
overrides the value specified on the DSPL
identifier in the configuration file.
For more information on using the correct
display attributes, refer to Chapter 2, "What
You Should Know before Operating PC
Support/36. "
Use of an Alternate
Configuration File for
STARTMSG
STARTMSG allows the user to specify an
alternate configuration file. This
configuration file can be used to set or
change the configuration for automatically
receiving messages. For example:
•
Specify the System/36 that you send
messages to and receive messages from
•
Specify the mode for automatically
receiving messages
•
Specify the length of the message window
timeout
•
Specify the interval of checking with the
System/36 for messages
11-11
For example if you want to be automatically
notified when messages are received by the
default System/36, then no entries need to be
added to the CONFIG.S36 file. The default
System/36 with message receive interval
(MMRI) of 60 seconds will be used.
To automatically start message notification
after starting or restarting your personal
computer, then add the following line to the
AUTOEXEC.BAT file:
STARTMSG
Since an alternate configuration file was not
specified, then the CONFIG.S36 file in the
default drive and current directory is used.
However, if you occasionally would like to
have your messages automatically displayed,
then set up one alternate configuration file to
receive messages in immediate mode. To do
this you need to add the following entry to an
alternate configuration file:
(
MDEF ,2
This causes messages from the default
System/36 to be displayed automatically in a
window. Defaults of 60 seconds for message
window timeout (MTIM) and message receive
interval (MMRI) will be used.
11-12
Additionally, if you would like to change the
message window timeout value, or the
message receive interval, then add the
following entries to the alternate
configuration file:
MTIM 300
MMRI600
This would change the message window
timeout to 5 minutes and the message receive
interval to 10 minutes.
Note: If you are using a personal computer
that has two monitors and you are
automatically displaying messages, the
messages will be displayed on the
monitor that was active when the
STARTMSG command was issued. If
you switch active monitors, the message
window will still be displayed on the
monitor that was active when the
STARTMSG command was issued. If
you want to change the monitor that
displays the messages, issue another
STARTMSG on the monitor you want
to display the messages.
11-13
MSG
There are two methods of entering the MSG
command. They are the interactive MSG
command and the command line MSG
command.
Interactive MSG Command
This function is provided by a menu to send
or display messages. To obtain the menu
display you type:
d:MSG [Ix] [/y]
where:
d: specifies the name of the disk or diskette
drive, or virtual drive, where MSG resides.
Type a letter followed by a colon to specify
the drive. For example, A represents the first
drive, B represents the second drive. This
drive is required only if MSG is not on the
~
default drive.
x and yare display attributes, refer to
Chapter 2, "What You Should Know before
Operating PC Support/36," for details on
these parameters.
11-14
Mter entering this command the following
display appears:
. . . - - - - - - - - - K E S S A G E FACILITY MAUl K E N U - - - - - - - - - ,
SYSTEK/38
S158
RECEIVE MODE
STATUS
Not1ty
Mesl!lage Wai ting
. . ._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ OPTIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . . .
Select one
o~
thel!le Dptione; prel!ll!l Enter.
1 Send a mel!ll!lage
Display mel!ll!lagel!l
3
Exit
2
Seleot =-> 1
El!lc-Exit
89097908-2
where:
SYSTEM/36 is the name of the System/a6
that is being used to send and receive
messages.
Note:
For more information on the
relationship of this name to link name
and remote system name refer to the
sections on multiple systems and
pass-through in Chapter 3, "The PC
Support/36 Routers" of the PC
Support/36 Technical Reference.
11-15
RECEIVE MODE
•
Blank indicates that a STARTMSG has
not been done or is not currently
communicating with the System/a6
because of a STOPMSG or an error.
•
Notify mode, you will receive an audible
tone indicating that you have messages at
the System/a6. You must run a MSG or
RCVMSG command to display the
messages.
•
Immediate mode, you will receive an
audible tone that you have messages at
the System/36 and they will automatically
be displayed.
For more detailed information on notify and
immediate mode refer to the PC Support/36
Technical Reference.
STATUS shows if you have messages
waiting.
OPTIONS
1. Send a message
2. Display messages
3. Exit
11-16
(
If you take option 1 on this menu the Send a
Message display will appear .
....----------SEND A KESSAGE--------------,
SYSTEK/38
S58
RECEIVE MODE
Notify
STATUS
Kessage "ai ting
Type in the requested 1nforlDat1on; press Enter.
ITEM
CHOICE
Destination name • •
Destination address
POSSIBLE CHOICES
User ID .. Display ID,
PC Location, Group, AlL,
blank = System Console
User address
Message text • • • •
F1=Help
Esc=Ex1t to Options Kenu
S909791 0·3
where:
The format of the line displayed across the
top of the display does not change. You will
still see SYSTEM/36, RECEIVE MODE, and
STATUS. However, the STATUS information
may change to the latest information that was
communicated from the System/36.
11-17
To send a message you must type the
following information:
Destination Name: This identifies to whom
you wish to send the message. The recipient
may be a User ID, Display ID, PC Location,
Group Name, or ALL.
11-18
•
User ID is the user ID used by the
recipient to sign on the System/36, or the
first part of the user ID as identified in
the system directory. The user may be on
the local System/36 or a user on another
system.
•
Display ID is the 2-character work station
ID where you want the message sent on
the System/36.
•
PC Location is the location of another
personal computer on any IBM
Token-Ring Network connected to the
System/36. Tj1e PC Location can be
attached to the local System/36 or
attached to another System/36.
•
Group Name is the identifier from the
System/36 directory that identifies a group
of users in the SNA network. This
parameter can only be used if the
Distributed System Node
Executive - Network Distribution
(DSNX-ND) is operational on your
System/36.
•
ALL means send the message to all locally
active work stations and personal
computer locations with active message
receive sessions connected to the
System/36.
Destination Address: This is the recipient's
address. This can be used in conjunction
with the data in the Destination Name field
to identify an entry in the System/36
directory. By using the directory entries you
can send messages to User Groups, users at
other systems, and PC Locations at other
systems. You can only use the Destination
Name/Destination Address combination if
DSNX-ND is operational on your System/36.
Any time the destination name/destination
address combination is used it must be a valid
entry configured in the directory on the host
System/36.
If Destination Name and Destination Address
are both blank the message will be sent to the
console operator. The message text must be
preceded by a comma if you leave this
parameter blank.
11-19
Message Text: This is the data that is to be
delivered to the identified recipient. There
can be up to 75 characters in the message
text.
Help text for this display may be displayed by
pressing the F1 key.
If you take option 2 of the Message Facility
Main menu the Display Messages display will
appear.
Note:
This option cannot be used to display
messages stored in the file created by
the RCVMSG command.
,..----------DISPLAY KESSAGES------------.
SYSTEM/36
S5S
RECEIVE MODE
Notify
STATUS
MESSAGES
From-JONES
This is an example
From-SMITH
Text message 2
From-ABLE
Text message 3
PC Location-DENVER
Date-OS/1S/SS
Time-OS:32:53
message tbat can be up to 75 cbaracters long.
WSID-W2
Date-OS/1S/SS
Time-OS:33:53
Address-HOUSE
Date-OS/1S/as
Time-09:34:00
Esc-Exit to Options Menu
S9097911-3
11-20
The format of the line displayed across the
top of the display does not change. You will
still see SYSTEM/36, RECEIVE MODE, and
STATUS. However, the STATUS information
may change to the latest information that was
communicated from the System/36.
Mter you select this option, up to three
messages will appear on your display. The
following information is displayed:
From: This is the name and address of the
sender.
PC Location: This is the location of the
sender.
W8ID: This is the work station ID of the
sender.
Address: This is the address of the sender.
Date: This is the date the host system
received the message.
Time: This is the time the host system
received the message.
11-21
Message Text: Up to 75 characters of the
message text will be displayed. If the original
message contains more than 75 characters,
the message will be divided into multiple
messages. Words will not be divided between
messages.
Once you display a message it is no longer
available to be displayed again. You do not
have the facility to save messages and use
this option to display them.
If there are more than three messages to be
displayed press the PgDn key to display the
rest of the messages. Any messages moved off
the display cannot be displayed again.
Messages can be printed from the display by
pressing the PRTSC key.
If you select option 3 on the Message Facility
Main menu, EXIT, you will return to the
display where you entered the MSG
command. For example, if you entered the
MSG command on a DOS display and you
take option 3 on this menu you will return to
the DOS display . You can also exit the
display by pressing the ESC key.
s
11-22
Command Line MSG Command
If you want to send a message without going
through the Message Facility Main menu and
subsequent displays you can enter the MSG
command and its associated parameters from
the DOS command line.
The format for this is:
User lO
Oisplay lO
PC Location lO
MSG ALL
(User lO, Address)
(PC Location lO, Address)
Group Name
Message Text
S9097807-0
where:
•
User ID is the user ID used by the
recipient to sign on the System/36, or the
first part of the user ID as identified in
the system directory.
•
Display ID is the 2-character work station
ID where you want the message sent on
the System/36.
•
PC Location ID is the location of another
personal computer on any Token-Ring
Network connected to the System/36, or
the first part of the user ID as identified
in the system directory.
11-23
•
Group Name is the identifier from the
System/36 directory that identifies a group
of users in the SNA network.
•
ALL means send the message to all locally
active work stations and personal
computer locations with active message
receive sessions connected to the
System/36.
Any combination of User ID/Address, PC
Location/ Address, or the Group parameter
can only be used if the Distributed System
Node Executive - Network Distribution is
operational on your System/36.
Any time the destination name/destination
address combination is used it must be a
valid entry in the directory on the
System/36.
If both parameters are left blank the
message will be sent to the console
operator. The message text must be
preceded by a comma if you leave this
parameter blank.
•
Message Text is the data that is to be
delivered to the identified recipient.
There can be up to 75 characters in the
message text.
Note:
11-24
Characters used to identify parameters
to DOS or the MSa command cannot
be used in the user ID, address, or
message text of the command line MSa
command. These characters can also
not be used in the user ID or address of
the interactive MSa command. These
characters can be used in the message
text of the interactive MSa command.
RCVMSG
This command is used to receive messages
and place them in a specified file.
The format is:
d:RCVMSG [message file name]
where:
d: specifies the name of the disk or diskette
drive, or virtual drive, where RCVMSG
resides. Type a letter followed by a colon to
specify the drive. For example, A represents
the first drive, B represents the second drive.
This drive is required only if RCVMSG is not
on the default drive.
message file name is the name of an
alternate file you want to use to hold your
messages, instead of MESSAGE.S36.
The format of the RCVMSG message file
name is:
[c:] [path] filename [.ext]
where:
c: specifies the drive where the RCVMSG file
resides. Type a letter followed by a colon to
specify the drive. If the drive is not specified,
the default drive is assumed.
11-25
path specifies a path of directory names.
Type the directory names, separated by
backslashes (\). The file name should be
separated from the last directory name by a
backslash (for example, \DIRI \DIR2\FILE1).
The first backslash is optional. If used, it
tells DOS to begin with the root directory.
If the path name is not specified, the current
directory is used.
filename specifies the name of the file that
contains the received messages. The filename
can be from 1 to 8 characters .
. ext specifies the filename extension. The
extension consists of a period and up to 3
characters. This entry is optional. If used,
the extension must immediately follow the
filename.
If you do not specify an alternate file and
MESSAGE.S36 cannot be found, it will be
created for you on the current drive, in the
current directory, before the messages are
received.
If no alternate file is specified and a message
file does exist on the current drive, the
messages will be appended to the file.
This command presents no interactive
interface. All parameters are expected to be
found in the CONFIG.S36 file. Any
identifiers that are not found in the
configuration file will use the default value.
11-26
Mter the messages have been received and
stored in this file they can be viewed using
the DOS TYPE or DOS PRINT commands.
Alternatively, you can develop a procedure to
retrieve and display or print these messages.
You cannot use the Display Message option
on the Message Facility Main menu to
display this file.
STOPMSG
This command is used to stop either
automatic display of messages or notification
that there are messages waiting. Issuing this
command does not halt the use of the MSG
and RCVMSG commands. When this
command is issued all message sessions are
stopped. No resident storage is freed by this
command. The format is:
d:STOPMSG
where:
d: specifies the name of the disk or diskette
drive, or virtual drive, where STOPMSG
resides. Type a letter followed by a colon to
specify the drive. For example, A represents
the first drive, B represents the second drive.
This drivejs required only if STOPMSG is
not on the default drive.
11-27
11-28
Chapter 12. Ending PC
Support/36
Contents
Overview .......................
Ending the PC Support/36 Programs ..
Ending the PC Support/36 Router ....
12-2
12-2
12-4
12-1
Overview
When you finish using the PC Support/36
programs and want to power off or restart
your personal computer, or if you want to use
the session for other work, you should end all
PC Support/36 programs and the PC
Support/36 router.
Ending the PC Support/36
Programs
To end the PC Support/36 programs you are
using, do the following:
12-2
•
If you are running the
System/36-to-personal computer transfer
facility or the personal
computer-to-System/36 transfer facility,
select option 6 (Exit S/36-to-PC Transfer
Facility or Exit PC-to-S/36 Transfer
Facility) on the OPTIONS menu and press
the Enter key. This returns you to the
DOS prompt.
•
If you are using the shared folders facility,
you must release any folders you currently
have assigned. You can do this using the
FSPC Release command. Refer to
Chapter 6, "Using the PC Support/36
Shared Folders Facility" for details on
how to release shared folders.
•
If you are using the virtual printer
facility, you must release all virtual
printers you currently have assigned. You
can do this using the SETVPRT program
or CFGVPRT program. Refer to
Chapter 7, "Using the PC Support/a6
Virtual Printer Facility" for details on
how to release virtual printers.
If the SETVPRT program is still running,
you must end the virtual printer facility
by pressing the Escape key on the
OPTIONS menu, or by entering a 5 (Exit)
on the OPTIONS menu and pressing the
Enter key. This returns you to the DOS
prompt.
•
If you are using the virtual disk facility,
you must release any virtual disks you
currently have assigned. You can do this
using the SETVDSK program or
CFGVDSK program. Refer to
Chapter 5, "Using the PC Support/a6
Virtual Disk Facility" for details on how
to release virtual disks.
12-3
If the SETVDSK program is still running,
you must end the virtual disk facility by
pressing the Escape key on the OPTIONS
menu, or by entering a 5 (Exit) on the
OPTIONS menu and pressing the Enter
key. This returns you to the DOS prompt.
•
If you are running the IBM PC Support/a6 (
message facility, you need to run the
STOPMSG command. Refer to
Chapter 11, "Using the PC Support/a6
Message Facility," for details on how to
run the STOPMSG command.
Ending the PC Support/36
Router
To end the router, the STOPRTR command
should be typed after the DOS prompt.
12-4
STOPRTR
Purpose: This command ends the System/36
router and frees the session (or
sessions) so that it can be used for
other applications.
Format:
[d:]STOPRTR [IF]
Remarks: d: specifies the name of the disk
or diskette drive, or virtual drive,
where STOPRTR resides. Type a
letter followed by a colon to
specify the drive. (For example, A
represents the first drive, B
represents the second.) The drive
is required only if STOPRTR is
not in the default drive.
IF is the Force Stop option. This
is an optional parameter. The
router verifies that all personal
computer applications using the
router have ended. For example,
it makes sure that all the virtual
disks and virtual printers have
been released. If the /F option is
specified and there are
applications still using the router,
the personal computer router
program ends the System/36 router
program.
12-5
lVote: If you have virtual printers
assigned when you enter the
STOPRTR command, it is
not recommended that you
force the router
conversations to end. It is
possible that data remains
in the buffers, and this data
is not yet sent to the
Systeml36 printer.
To ensure that all of the
data is sent to the printer
and the print file is closed,
you must use the
SETVPRT command to
release the virtual printers,
then enter the STOPRTR
command again.
If the IF parameter is not specified
and the personal computer
applications using the router have
not ended, an error message is
displayed. This gives you the
option to end the personal
computer application anyway by
pressing the Enter key or to
cancel the STOPRTR command by
pressing the Escape key.
If you press the Escape key, the
STOPRTR command is ignored.
You can then use the SETVDSK
program to release virtual disks,
the SETVPRT program to release
virtual printers, the FSPC Release
command to release the shared
folders, and the STOPMSG
command to stop the message
facility.
12-6
~
~
Once the STOPRTR program ends,
PC Support/36 is inactive and the
personal computer can be
restarted, powered off, or used for
other purposes.
The IBM Token-Ring Network Router can
also be stopped abnormally by using the
Disable command. However, this is not the
recommended way to stop the router. It is
possible that data remains in the buffers that
has not been sent to the System/36. Refer to
Using System/36 Communications for more
information on how to abnormally stop the
router.
12-7
12-8
Chapter 13. Problem
Determination Procedures
Contents
Introduction .....................
Personal Computer or PC Support/36
Stopped .......................
Virtual Printer Stopped .........
Interactive Virtual Printer
Program (SETVPRT) Stopped .
Display Problems ............
Printer Input/Output Problems .
Virtual Disk Stopped ...........
Interactive Virtual Disk Program
(SETVDSK) Stopped ........
. Output Problems ...........
Transfer Facility Stopped .......
Transfer Facility to System/36
Communications Problems ...
Disk Input/Output Problems ..
Printer Input/Output Problems
Output Not as Expected ...........
Virtual Printer ............
Transfer Facility ...........
Transfer Facility Output
Problems ................
Communications Problems .........
Determining if You Have a
Communications Problem ......
Problems Using Emulation ...
Problems Using the IBM
Token-Ring Network .......
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-9
13-9
13-11
13-12
13-12
13-16
13-18
13-20
13-20
13-30
13-33
13-40
13-40
13-40
13-45
13-1
Recovering from a Link Failure
Terminating the System/36
Router ..................
Restarting the System/36 Router
Restarting Your Personal
Computer ................
LINK36.BAT Problems .........
Shared Folder Problems ........
13·2
13·46
13·48
13·52
13·54
13·55
13·58
Introduction
CAUTION
If you detect smoke, excessive heat, or
unusual odors coming from your personal
computer, immediately position the
system unit switch to Off, disconnect the
power cord, and have the unit serviced.
Before following these problem determination
procedures, perform the actions described for
messages in the PC Support/36 Messages
Guide.
This chapter can help you solve a problem
with PC Support/36. Check to see if any of
the symptoms describe your problem, and take
the corrective action described.
Problems may occur in one of the following
problem types:
•
Personal computer or PC Support/36
stopped
•
Output not as expected
•
Communications problems
13-3
Personal Computer or PC
Support/36 Stopped
This section describes those times when the
personal computer is not responding as it
should.
First, look for some indication of processor
activity to verify that a stopped condition
does exist. Then, attempt to isolate the
problem to the System/36, personal computer,
or communications data link. Finally,
proceed with the appropriate recovery
procedure. The following descriptions may
assist you in problem determination.
13-4
Virtual Printer Stopped
Problem:
The personal computer was sending data to a
virtual printer, but the transfer of
information appears to have stopped and
there are no messages.
Action:
•
A large file may take several minutes to
print. Be sure you allow enough time.
•
You may have sent the data to a local
personal computer printer that is not
turned on. Turn on the local printer and
the data may start printing.
•
If you are not using the time-out method
of closing a print file, you may need to use
the SETVPRT program to close the print
file.
You may have a communications problem;
refer to "Communications Problems" later in
this chapter.
13-5
Interactive Virtual Printer
Program (SETVPRT) Stopped
Problem:
The interactive virtual printer program
(SETVPRT) appears to have stopped. It may
have stopped at one of the following times:
•
After the F2 key was pressed to get a list
•
After the list was displayed, and after
pressing the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Page
Up, Page Down, Home, or End key
•
After the Enter key was pressed, when the
cursor was in the last input area on the
display
Action:
13-6
•
If the SETVPRT program is not displaying
a Running indicator, the personal
computer is waiting for you to do
something.
•
If the Running indicator is displayed,
allow enough time for the operation to
complete.
•
Refer to "Communications Problems,"
later in this chapter, to determine if you
have a communications problem.
If the System/a6 is functioning properly,
this is probably a personal computer
problem. Run personal computer
diagnostics. If no problem is found and
this application is still not working,
contact the System/36 system operator for
help. The System/36 site is responsible for
contacting the service representative if an
error is suspected in a
System/36-supported program.
Display Problems
Problem:
The display is difficult to read when using the
interactive virtual printer facility.
Action:
If you are using a monochrome monitor
attached to a Color/Graphics Monitor
Adapter Card, you must specify /M after the
command you used to start SETVPRT, or put
a DSPL entry in the CONFIG.S36 file. For
details, refer to Chapter 2, "What You
Should Know before Operating PC
Support/a6. "
13-7
Printer Input/Output Problems
Problem:
While trying to print to a virtual printer, the
following DOS message is displayed:
Write fault error writing device LPTx
Abort, Retry, Ignore?
Action:
1. You may have sent the data to a local
personal computer printer that is out of
paper, offline, or not available. Correct
the error and retry the operation.
2. Run SETVPRT or CFGVPRT to display an
error message. Correct the problem and
reassign the printers if necessary.
13-8
Virtual Disk Stopped
Problem:
The personal computer was transferring
information to or from a virtual disk; the
transfer of information appears to have
stopped and there are no messages.
Action:
A large file may take several minutes to
transfer. Make sure you allow enough time.
You may have a communications problem;
refer to "Communications Problems" later in
this chapter.
Interactive Virtual Disk Program
(SETVDSK) Stopped
Problem:
The interactive virtual disk program
(SETVDSK) appears to have stopped. It may
have stopped at one of the following times:
•
Mter the F2 key was pressed to get a list
•
Mter the list was displayed, and after
pressing the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Page
Up, Page Down, Home, or End key
•
Mter the Enter key was pressed when the
cursor was in the last input area on the
display
13-9
Action:
•
If the SETVDSK program is not displaying
a Running indicator, the personal
computer is waiting for you to do
something.
•
If the Running indicator is displayed,
allow enough time for the operation to
complete.
•
Refer to "Communications Problems,"
later in this chapter, to determine if you
have a communications problem.
If the System/36 is functioning properly,
this is probably a personal computer
problem. Run personal computer
diagnostics. If no problem is found and
this application is still not working,
contact the System/36 system operator for
help. The System/36 site is responsible for
contacting the service representative if an
error is suspected in a
System/36-supported program.
13-10
Output Problems
Problem:
The display is difficult to read when using the
interactive virtual disk facility.
Action:
If you are using a monochrome monitor
attached to a Color/Graphics Monitor
Adapte~ Card, you must specify /M after the
command you used to start SETVDSK, or put
a DSPL entry in the CONFIG.S36 file. For
details, refer to Chapter 2, "What You
Should Know before Operating PC
Support/36. "
If the monitor you are using has random
dashes or snow appearing on the display, you
should specify /S for slow speed display
writing after the command you used to start
SETVDSK, or put a DSPL entry in the
CONFIG.S36 file. For details, refer to
Chapter 2, "What You Should Know before
Operating PC Support/36."
13-11
Transfer Facility Stopped
Transfer Facility to System/36
Communications Problems
Problem:
The transfer of data between the System/36
and the personal computer appears to have
stopped. It may have stopped at one of the
following times:
•
•
13-12
When the FROM, SELECT, WHERE,
JOIN BY, ORDER BY, or TO prompts are
displayed and:
-
Mter the F2 key was pressed to get a
list
-
After the list is displayed and after
pressing an Up Arrow, Down Arrow,
Page Up, Page Down, Home, or End
key
While the Your transfer request is running
message is displayed
•
While a System/36-to-personal computer
transfer request with the display specified
as the output device is running
After pressing an UpArrow, Down
Arrow, Page Up, Page Down, Home, or
End key, while the Transferred Data
window is being displayed
While the records are being displayed
by the automatic System/36-to-personal
computer transfer facility program
•
While a System/36-to-personal computer
transfer request with the printer specified
as the output device is running, and the
Retrieved data records are being printed
message is being displayed
•
While a System/36-to-personal computer
transfer request with disk specified as the
output device is running, and the
Retrieved data records are being written to
disk message is being displayed
13-13
Action:
1. If the interactive transfer facility is not
displaying a Running message on the
message line, the personal computer is
waiting for you to do something.
2. If Running is on the message line or you
are using the automatic transfer facility,
allow enough time (possibly several
minutes) for the operation to complete.
13-14
•
If you have used the JOIN BY or
ORDER BY prompt and the Your
transfer request is running message is
being displayed, allow more time for
this operation.
•
If you have pressed the End key while
a list is being displayed or while
transferring data to the display,
additional time may be required to
complete the transfer request.
•
If you are transferring data to a virtual
disk or printer, or from a virtual disk,
additional time may be required.
3. Refer to "Communications Problems" later
in this chapter to determine if you have a
communications problem.
If the System/36 is functioning properly,
the problem is probably on the personal
computer. Run personal computer
diagnostics. If no problem is found while
running the diagnostics, and this
application is still failing, contact the
System/36 site for assistance. The
System/36 site is responsible for
contacting the service representative if an
error is suspected in a
System/36-supported program.
4. If you are printing the format of
transferred data, you must use printer
LPTl. Make sure you have an LPT1
printer or a virtual printer assigned as
LPTl.
5. If the output device is either the printer or
disk and the output is directed to a virtual
printer or disk, perform problem
determination for the virtual printer or
disk.
13-15
Disk Input/Output Problems
Problem:
Disk problems may have occurred at one of
the following times:
•
When the Name of transfer request to be
saved, Name of transfer request to be
recalled, FROM PC filename, or File
description name prompts are displayed
and:
After the F2 key was pressed to get a
list
After the list is displayed and after
pressing an Up Arrow, Down Arrow,
Page Up, Page Down, Home, or End
key
13-16
•
While saving a transfer request and the
Your transfer request is being saved
message is being displayed
•
While recalling a transfer request and the
Your transfer request is being recalled
message is being displayed
•
While the File description is being written
to disk message is being displayed
•
While the Retrieved data records are being
written to disk message is being displayed
Action:
1. If the interactive transfer facility is not
displaying a Running message on the
message line, the personal computer is
waiting for you to do something.
2. If Running is on the message line or you
are using the automatic transfer facility,
allow enough time for the operation to
complete.
•
If you have pressed the End key while
a list is being displayed, a long time
may be required for this operation.
•
If you are working with a virtual disk,
allow several minutes for the transfer
to complete.
3. If the output is being directed to a virtual
disk, perform problem determination for a
virtual disk. Refer to "Communications
Problems," later in this chapter, for more
information.
4. If the output is being directed to a
personal computer disk, run personal
computer diagnostics. If no problem is
found while running the diagnostics and
this application is still failing, contact the
System/36 site for assistance. The
System/36 site is responsible for
contacting the service representative if an
error is suspected in a
System/36-supported program.
13-17
Printer Input/Output Problems
Problem:
Printer problems may have occurred at one of
the following times:
•
While the Retrieved data records are being
printed message is being displayed
•
While the Format of transferred data is
being printed message is being displayed
Action:
1. If the interactive transfer facility is not
displaying a Running message on the
message line, the personal computer is
waiting for you to do something.
2. If Running is on the message line or you
are using the automatic transfer facility
or a virtual printer, allow enough time for
the operation to complete.
3. If the output is being directed to a virtual
printer, perform problem determination for
a virtual printer. Refer to "Virtual
Printer Stopped" earlier in this chapter.
13-18
I
4. If the output is being directed to a
personal computer printer, make sure the
personal computer printer is supported by
the transfer facility. Refer to "What Is
Needed to Use PC Support/36?" in
Chapter 1, "Introduction" to find out
what printers are supported.
5. If the output is being directed to a
personal computer printer that is
supported by the transfer facility, run
personal computer diagnostics. If no
problem is found while running the
diagnostics and this application is still
failing, contact the System/36 site for
assistance. The System/36 site is
responsible for contacting the service
representative if an error is suspected in a
System/36-supported program.
6. You may find that it takes 30 seconds or
more to get an error message for printer
out of paper, printer offline, or printer not
available (printer adapter card is present
in the system). This is consistent with the
way DOS works. You can correct the
problem before the error message appears
and printing will continue immediately, or
you can correct the error after the error
message appears, and then press the Enter
key to continue printing.
13-19
Output Not as Expected
The information printed, displayed, or in
output disk files is missing, incomplete, not in
the format that you expected, or is not
readable.
Virtual Printer
Problem:
No output received.
Action:
•
You may have attempted to print by using
a printer name (LPT1, LPT2, LPT3) that is
not a personal computer printer and is not
assigned as a virtual printer. Be sure you
have run VPRT. Then, enter the
SETVPRT or CFGVPRT command to
activate the virtual printer.
•
If the virtual printer was set up to defer
printing, (this is the default), it does not
start printing until the file is closed. The
file is automatically closed when the time
interval you selected expires. Be sure you
have waited long enough for the file to be
closed.
If you are running certain applications
(such as BASIC), it is possible that the file
will not close, even after the specified time
interval has expired, until a key is
pressed. Press any key or return to DOS
and the file will be closed.
13-20
If you selected a time interval of zero, the
file must be closed using the SETVPRT or
CFGVPRT command. (Refer to "Using the
Virtual Printer Facility" for information
about the SETVPRT and CFGVPRT
commands). However, if there is an End
Document or Begin Document command at
the end of your data string this is not
necessary. (Refer to Chapter 5, "The
Virtual Printer Facility" in the IBM PC
Support/36 Technical Reference for
information about the End and Begin
Document commands).
•
If an error message appears on the
System/36 console associated with the
System/36 printer, ask the system operator
to respond to any error messages and
make the System/36 printer ready.
•
If the print file was closed and no
messages appear on the System/36 console,
there may be a problem with the
System/36 Spool utility. (For example, the
spool writer may have been stopped.) Ask
your System/36 operator if this could be
the reason your output is not being
printed. If so, ask the System/36 operator
to help you resolve the problem.
•
If each of the procedures listed above are
followed, and still no output is received,
you may have a hardware problem. Run
personal computer and printer diagnostics.
If no error is found, contact the System/36
site for assistance. The System/36 site is
responsible for contacting the service
representative if an error is suspected in a
System/36-supported program.
13-21
Problem:
"
Printed output started but not completed.
Action:
•
You may have specified to print on the
virtual printer, but it cannot print until
the file is closed. The file is automatically
closed when the time interval expires. Be
sure you have waited long enough for the
file to be closed.
If you are running certain applications
(such as BASIC), it is possible that the file
will not be closed, even after the specified
time interval has expired, until a key is
pressed. Press any key or return to DOS
and the file will be closed.
If you selected a time interval of zero, you
must use the SETVPRT or CFGVPRT
command to close the file unless there is
an End Document or Begin Document
command at the end of your print data
string. Also, the commands End
Document, Begin Document, or Reset
Printer in the beginning or end of a
document will close the file.
13-22
•
If the procedure listed above is followed,
and complete output is still not received,
you may have a hardware problem. Run
personal computer and printer diagnostics.
If no error is found, contact the System/36
site for assistance. The System/36 site is
responsible for contacting the service
representative if an error is suspected in a
System/36-supported program.
If the virtual printer does not work, test
the printer locally by sending the
following:
A System/36 file/document to it.
A PC file / document from a personal
computer to its locally attached PC
printer.
Problem:
Format of printed output is correct at first,
but formatting is lost and! or changes in
subsequent pages.
Action:
Certain applications take longer to reach the
print file, a time-out occurs, and the job is
segmented. Set a longer time-out value, or
disable the time-out value.
13-23
Problem:
Output is not readable or as expected.
Action:
13-24
•
You may be attempting to print data from
a personal computer file that is not
readable or printable.
•
The translation table may be damaged.
Refer to Chapter 7 "The Translation Table
Utility," in the PC Support/36 Technical
Reference manual for information about
translation tables.
•
You may have specified a printer data
type, but the data to be printed is not in a
format suitable for printing on a
System/36 printer. Refer to
Chapter 7, "Using the PC Support/36
Virtual Printer Facility" for information
on setting printer data type.
•
You may be attempting functions that are
not supported by the System/36 printer
(such as, superscript, double width, and so
on). In this case, the output may not be
the same as you expected. Refer to
Chapter 7, "Using the PC Support/36
Virtual Printer Facility" for the functions
that are supported.
•
You may be attempting to print data for
ASCII character set 2. Your virtual
printer was initialized for character set 1
and did not receive a Select character set
2 command. The data was treated as a
printer command for character set 1.
Refer to Chapter 7, "Using the PC
Support/36 Virtual Printer Facility" to
select the PC printer character set option
by using the SETVPRT or CFGVPRT
command. Refer to Chapter 5, "The
Virtual Printer Facility" of the PC
Support/36 Technical Reference for details
on the Select character set 2 command.
•
If each of the procedures listed above are
followed, and the output is still not
readable, you may have a hardware
problem. Run personal computer
diagnostics and printer diagnostics. If no
error is found, contact the System/36 site
for assistance. The System/36 site is
responsible for contacting the service
representative if an error is suspected in a
System/36-supported program.
13-25
If the virtual printer does not work, test
the printer locally by sending the
following:
A System/36 file/document to it.
A PC file/document from a personal
computer to its locally attached PC
printer.
Problem:
The printer ej ects at the wrong place.
Action:
Your virtual printer parameters and the
System/36 printer configuration do not match.
Change your virtual printer parameters to
match the System/36 configuration. Refer to
"Using the Virtual Printer Facility" for
information on using the Lines per page and
Page length parameters for a virtual printer.
Problem:
The MODE command was entered, but the
changes failed to take effect.
13-26
Action:
•
You should enter the MODE command
after running SETVPRT or CFGVPRT and
before printing a file.
•
The print file closed before you entered
the MODE command.
•
You did not specify command override
option in SETVPRT or CFGVPRT
commands.
Problem:
Output goes to the local personal computer
printer rather than the virtual printer.
Action:
•
The virtual printer was not activated by
either SETVPRT or CFGVPRT command.
•
You tried to use the virtual printer
facility after entering the STOPRTR
command. You must start the router
again before you can run SETVPRT or
CFGVPRT.
13-27
Problem:
Attempted to print a Final Form
Text/Document Content Architecture (DCA)
on a virtual printer, but the output was not
readable or you did not get all the output.
Action:
•
The default printer data type was
specified. You should use option 3 (Final
'form text) for the printer data type. Refer
to Chapter 7, "Using the PC Support/36
Virtual Printer Facility," for information
on setting printer data type.
•
A /b parameter was not used to indicate a
binary file when using a DOS COPY
command to copy a file to a virtual printer
(including the DOS end of file characters).
•
The System/36 printer must be a printer
that can handle a DCA level-2 document.
Problem:
Printer lines are truncated.
Action:
Personal computer printer output is either 132
or 198 characters per line. The System/36
printer paper is not wide enough to handle
either 132 or 198 characters per line.
13-28
Problem:
Printer output is divided into multiple parts.
There is more than one entry in the Spool
Writer Status display for the job.
Action:
Time-out value specified for SETVPRT or
CFGVPRT commands is too short. Refer to
"Using the Virtual Printer Facility" for
information on setting the time out value.
Problem:
Printer output is combined.
Action:
Time-out value specified for the SETVPRT or
CFGVPRT commands is too long. Refer to
"Using the Virtual Printer Facility" for more
information on setting the timer interval.
13-29
Transfer Facility
Problem:
No list or an incomplete list was received for
a list of personal computer file names
requested for the SAVE, RECALL, or File
description name prompt.
Action:
The transfer facility searches the personal
computer disk for file names that have a
specific extension (the extension is different
for different prompts). The file names
specified (if any) cannot be found on the
specified disk.
You can request the transfer facility to search
a specific drive for file names that have
certain characteristics. This overrides the
default search arguments used by the transfer
facility.
The list is based on the personal computer file
name you specified prior to pressing the F2
key.
13-30
Problem:
The display is difficult to read when using the
interactive transfer facility.
Action:
If you are using a monochrome monitor
attached to the Color Graphics Adapter, you
must specify the /M parameter when you start
the transfer facility or put a DSPL entry in
the CONFIG.S36 file.
If the monitor you are using has random
dashes or snow appearing on the display, you
should specify /S for slow speed display
writing after the command you used to start
SETVDSK, or put a DSPL entry in the
CONFIG.S36 file. For details, refer to
Chapter 2, "What You Should Know before
Operating PC Support/36."
13-31
Problem:
A file, defined by IDDU data definitions, is
being transferred. However, the resulting
data is not converted and broken into fields
as expected.
Action:
The file does not have an IDDU data
definition, or the wrong data definition is
being used. Use IDDU on the System/36 to
check the data definition. Also, make sure
that the IDDU data definition is linked to the
file you are transferring.
Problem:
No column headings appear on data
transferred to the display or printer.
Action:
13-32
•
You are transferring a file that is not
defined by IDDU data definitions or a
library member. No column headings
should appear.
•
If the file is supposed to be defined by
IDDU, use IDDU on the System/36 to
check the data definition. Also, make
sure that the IDDU data definition is
linked to the file you are transferring.
Transfer Facility Output
Problems
Printing on Locally Attached PC
Printer
Problem:
Printing appears to be in progress, but no
output appears on the printer:
Action:
•
If you try to print on LPT1, LPT2, or
LPT3, and there is no adapter set up for
the printer, the transfer facility acts as
though it is printing, although it is not.
This is consistent with the way DOS
handles printing to a printer that does not
exist.
•
You may be printing on a virtual printer.
Release the virtual printer if you wish to
print on a personal computer printer
defined by the same LPT number as the
virtual printer.
13-33
Problem:
Printer error messages take a long time to
appear.
Action:
You may find that it takes 30 seconds or more
to get an error message for printer out of
paper, printer offline, or printer not available
(printer adapter card is present in the
system). This is consistent with the way DOS
works. You can correct the problem before
the error message appears and printing will
continue immediately, or you can correct the
error after the error message appears and
press the Enter key to continue printing.
Problem:
Printer out of paper message appears when the
printer is not available.
Action:
DOS does not always correctly diagnose
printer errors. You can still correct the
actual problem and press the Enter key to
continue printing.
13-34
Problem:
Part or all of a line of printing is missing.
Action:
This can happen when an error occurs and
printing is restarted after the error is
corrected. The printer loses the data sent for
the line when it is turned off. When
correcting problems, use the offline button
rather than turning the printer off, if
possible.
Problem:
Page eject does not work properly.
Action:
Turning the printer off and then back on may
cause it to set a new top of form. Try to
avoid turning the printer off and on again
when correcting problems.
13-35
Problem:
Printer did not go to the top of the next page
at the end of the output.
Action:
01·
If you select the ESC option on an error
message and do not correct the error
condition, it is possible that the final page
eject may not be received by the printer. Put
the printer in an offline condition and then
press the form feed to complete the page eject.
Problem:
For a virtual print file, output that should
have appeared in separate print files appears
in the same print file.
Action:
Print files are not automatically closed
between running transfer requests. The
time-out method for closing files is used.
Change the time-out value to a smaller
number if too much time is elapsing between
requests or close the file with SETVPRT.
13-36
Problem:
For a virtual print file, output is broken up
into more than one part when only one
continuous piece was expected.
Action:
A print file may be closed before the transfer
request is completed if there is a delay
greater than the time-out value specified for
the virtual printer. Change the time-out
value to a larger number if output is being
broken up.
Problem:
A Status window displays Your transfer
request has been resubmitted while you are
scrolling backwards in the Transferred Data
window.
Action:
This is normal. However, if this occurs often,
you should increase the amount of storage on
your personal computer.
13-37
Problem:
A personal computer file containing the
transferred records contains incorrect data.
Your application program cannot process the
file.
Action:
13-38
•
Verify that the personal computer file type
used in the transfer request prompt is
correct for the application you are
runnIng.
•
If you have data in the System/36 file that
cannot be translated, a status message at
the end of the transfer request identifies
the number of records that could not be
translated. If the transfer request
indicates data that is not translatable,
check the data in the System/36 file and
check the IDDU data definition for that
file.
•
If you have transferred data to a BASIC
sequential file, make sure the character
data in the file does not contain any
double quotation marks.
Problem:
The data displayed or printed contains
substitution rectangle characters.
Action:
The rectangle characters represent data in
the System/36 file that could not be translated
from EBCDIC to ASCII. The status message
at the end of the transfer request run
identifies the number of records that could
not be translated. Check the data in the
System/36 file and check the IDDU data
definition for that file.
Problem:
Printed records from transferred data are
truncated at the end of each print line.
Action:
Change the Truncate records prompt in the
transfer request you are running to No so all
data for each record is printed.
13-39
Communications Problems
Determining if You Have a
Communications Problem
Be sure that you have allowed enough time
for the requested operation to complete.
Some operations require several minutes.
Problems Using Emulation
Use the hot key sequence to try to enter
emulation mode. If you are using emulation
and the router is active in a session other
than 1, you have to use the hot key sequence
several times.
If you are using emulation, you cannot use
the hot key sequence to enter the emulation
session being used by the router while data is
being transferred between the router and the
emulation session. The emulation session
being used by the router is temporarily
removed from the hot key session rotation.
This means that, if you have two emulation
sessions active (either two display sessions or
one display session and one printer session),
and you attempt to use the hot key sequence
while the router is transferring data, you will
bypass the router session and hot key directly
into the next available emulation session. If
you have only one emulation session active,
the hot key sequence will not work until the
data transfer is completed.
13-40
If you are using emulation and are unable to
use the hot key sequence to enter the session
being used by the router, one of the followinr
may have occurred: you have not allowed
enough time for the router to transfer the
data; the System/36 processor was stopped
with Alter/Display; the personal computer is
waiting for another display from the
System/36.
If you allowed enough time and determined
that the System/36 processor was not stopped,
ask the system operator to end your job. This
should cause an error on your personal
computer and allow you to use the hot key
sequence. If no error is displayed, and you
are still unable to use the hot key sequence,
follow the recovery described under
"Restarting Your Personal Computer" later in
this chapter.
If you are using the 5250 Emulation Program
(not the Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program),
you should always be able to use the hot key
sequence. If you cannot use the hot key
sequence, the personal computer is probably
in a loop and needs to be restarted .. Follow
the recovery described under "Restarting
Your Personal Computer" later in this
chapter.
13-41
If you successfully used the hot key sequence
to enter 5250 emulation mode, the PC
Support/36 Router Hot Key Menu will appear
as follows:
. - - - - - ' - - - - - - - P C Support/38 Router: Hot Key M e n u - - - - - - - - - ,
The PC Support/38 Router has control at this emulation
session. The hot key sequence is not allowed tram this
session unless this screen is visible •
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .~.PTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Hot Key to leave this session
or
Select one at the tollowins:
1 Display Systeml38 Inquiry Options Menu
2 Enter Systeml38 Console Mode
Select ===> _
59097906-'
13-42
If the System/36 Router display does not
appear, one of the following appears.
Indication
Blank display and
system available
indicator is off.
Message indicates a
task dump was
taken.
Message does not
indicate a task
dump was taken.
System/36 Inquiry
display or
Command display
appears in inquiry
mode.
Some other display
appears.
Action
Follow the recovery action
described under
"Recovering from a Link
Failure" later in this
chapter.
Select option 0 to the task
dump message and follow
the recovery action
described under
"Restarting the System/36
Router" later in this
chapter.
Respond to the message
and follow the recovery
action described under
"Restarting the System/36
Router" later in this
chapter.
Exit inquiry mode by
pressing the emulated
command key 1 or by
taking option 0 on the
System Inquiry menu, hot
key to personal computer
mode, then try the
operation again.
Return to the System/36
command display, then
follow the recovery action
described under
"Restarting the System/36
Router" later in this
chapter.
13-43
If you recognize the display as the router
display, the personal computer may be
waiting for data to be returned from the
System/36 router. The possible reasons for
this condition and its recovery are shown in
the following table.
Indication
Response is slower
than usual
(System/36
processor is heavily
loaded).
System/36 router is
in a loop and must
be canceled.
System/36 was
stopped using
Alter/Display.
System/36 has a
processor check.
13-44
Action
Allow enough time. Then,
if the II indicator stays on,
follow the recovery under
"Terminating the
System/36 Router" later in
this chapter.
Follow the recovery action
under "Terminating the
System/36 Router" later in
this chapter.
Wait for the System/36 to
be restarted, then hot key
back to personal computer
mode and continue the
task you were working on.
Wait for the system
operator to restart the
system and then follow the
recovery action under
"Restarting the System/36
Router" later in this
chapter.
Problems Using the IBM
Token-Ring Network
It is possible that the System/36 is not
communicating with the personal computer
for one of the following reasons:
•
The System/36 processor was stopped with
Alter/Display.
•
An error message was generated on the
System/36 and is waiting for a user
response. Respond to the message and
follow the recovery action that is
described in "Restarting the System/36
Router" later in this chapter.
•
The System/36 has a processor check.
Wait for the system operator to restart the
system, then follow the recovery action
described in "Restarting the System/36
Router" later in this chapter.
•
The System/36 is in a loop and must be
canceled. Follow the recovery action
described in "Terminating the System/36
Router" later in this chapter.
•
The personal computer IBM Token-Ring
Network router is in a loop and must be
canceled. Follow the recovery action
described in "Restarting Your Personal
Computer" later in this chapter.
•
There is a problem with the IBM
Token-Ring· Network. Refer to the IBM
Token-Ring Network PC Adapter Guide to
Operations and the IBM Token-Ring
Network Problem Determination Guid~ to
determine the cause of the network error.
13-45
Recovering from a Link Failure
You must restore the data link (connection
between the personal computer and
System/36) and restart the System/36 router.
If you still have a problem do one of the
following:
•
If you are using 5250 Emulation:
If your personal computer is locally
attached to the System/36 (twinaxial
cable), restore the twinaxial connection to
your personal computer and respond to
any messages that may be on the
System/36 console. The Command or Sign
On display should return. When the
Command or Sign On display appears,
follow the recovery action defcribed under
"Restarting the System/36 Router" later in
this chapter.
If your personal computer is remotely
attached to the System/36 (5251 Model 12
Display Station, 5294 Control Unit, or
Remote 5250 Emulation Feature),
determine the cause of the
communications failure and restore the
remote connection. Ask the system
operator to activate your work station and
controller. The Command or Sign On
display should return. When the
Command or Sign On display appears,
follow the recovery action described under
"Restarting the System/36 Router" later in
this chapter.
13-46
~
•
If you are using the IBM Token-Ring
Network:
You must restore your link and restart the
System/36 router.
You must respond to any messages on the
System/36 console. If the System/36 IBM
Token-Ring router was stopped, it must be
restarted. Follow the recovery action
described in "Restarting the System/36
Router" later in this chapter.
If no messages were on the System/36,
then make sure that the IBM Token-Ring
Network is functioning correctly. Refer to
the IBM Token-Ring Network PC Guide to
Operations and the IBM Token-Ring
Network Problem Determination Guide for
more information.
13-47
Terminating the System/36
Router
If you have determined that the System/36
router has an error from which recovery is
not possible or is in a loop, then it must be
ended and restarted. There are two ways to
end the System/36 router. They are listed in
the order in which they should be used (the
most preferred first).
1. If you are in personal computer mode and
your keyboard is active, enter the
STOPRTR command at the DOS prompt.
If there are virtual disk or virtual print
sessions active, you will receive a message
indicating that programs are still
communicating with the router.
If you still want to stop the System/36
router, press the Enter key to stop the
active sessions. However, if you do this,
and have virtual print files that are open,
the data in those print files may be lost.
13-48
2. If you are using the 5250 Emulation
communication link and you used the hot
key to enter 5250 emulation mode, you can
end the System/36 router as follows:
a. Take option 1 on the Hot Key Menu.
h. When the Inquiry options menu is
displayed, take option 3 (Cancel job)
and press the emulated Enter key.
c. When the System/36 Command display
appears, the router has successfully
ended. You can leave the Command
display active or you can sign off the
System/36.
d. Use the hot key sequence. The
following window appears:
INQUIRY
MAIN
X1
Main Syateml38 help menu
Select one
o~
the
~ollo.ing:
1. Display a user menu
2. Pertorm general syatem activities
3. Use and control printers .. diskettes .. or tape
::
8.
T.
8.
9.
10.
''''I'''k _i t'h .,i 1....
1 ih'l"'ari ....
f!IaloR:.,.....
""lM1dl'..
~'I"'
.. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. .
HOt key at this time may abnormally terminate the router.
HOt key is recommended only from the PC Support/38 Hot Key
Henu. Press any key to continue .. or press Enter to allow
hot key at this time.
Cmd.3-Previous menu
Cmd7-End
Cmd12-Ho. to use help
Ready tor option number or command
Home-Sign on menu
Cmd1-Resume Job
(c) 1985 15K Corp.
59097907-0
13-49
e. Press the Enter key to remove the
window.
f.
Use the hot key sequence to get back
into personal computer mode, and
return to the DOS prompt if you are
not already at the DOS prompt. If you
are using the Enhanced 5250
Emulation Program, you may have to
use the hot key twice to go to personal
computer mode.
g. Enter the STOPRTR command from
the DOS prompt. This notifies the
personal computer router that the
System/36 router has ended.
3. If you are using the IBM Token-Ring
Network communication link you will
need to ask the system operator to disable
your personal computer. You must tell
the system operator your personal
computer location name (the TRLN entry
in your PC Support/36 configuration file).
Then enter the STOPRTR command from
the DOS prompt. This lets the personal
computer router know that the System/36
router has ended. For more information
on terminating the System/a6 IBM
Token-Ring router see Using System/36
Communications.
13-50
4. If you are using the 5250 Emulation
communication link ask the system
operator to cancel the job for you. You
must tell the system operator your work
station identification or, if you do not
know your work station identification,
your user identification. Then enter the
STOPRTR command from the DOS
prompt. This notifies the personal
computer router that the System/3f> router
has ended.
Now follow the recovery action described
under "Restarting the System/36 Router" later
in this chapter.
13-51
Restarting the System/36 Router
If Using Emulation
If you ended the System/36 router or it ended
abnormally, you must restart it before you
can run any virtual disk, virtual printer,
transfer facility, or shared folders functions.
If you have not already done so, you must
enter the STOPRTR command from the DOS
prompt to notify the personal computer router
that the System/36 router has ended. You
will receive an error message if there are any
virtual disk, virtual printer, transfer facility
sessions, or shared folders active. Take the
Force option to this message to force these
sessions inactive.
The personal computer router may then be
restarted by entering the STARTRTR
command from the DOS prompt. Any virtual
disk, virtual printer, transfer facility, or
shared folders sessions that were active must
now be restarted before they can be used.
Refer to the appropriate chapter in this
manual for instructions on restarting these
facilities. These programs were not aware
that the router ended, they may send an error
message indicating that contact with the
System/36 ended when you attempt to restart
them. This is normal. Simply try the
operation again.
13-52
If Using IBM Token-Ring Network
If you ended the System/36 router or it ended
abnormally, you must restart it before you
can run any virtual disk, virtual printer,
transfer facility, message facility, or shared
folders functions. If you have not already
done so, you must enter the STOPRTR
command from the DOS prompt to notify the
personal computer router that the System/36
router has ended. You will receive an error
message if there are any virtual disk, virtual
printer, transfer facility sessions, message
facility, or shared folders active. Take the
Force option to this message to force these
sessions inactive.
To restart the System/36 router the System/36
operator must run the Enable procedure.
Refer to the manual Using System/36
Communications for more information on the
Enable procedure. The personal computer
router may then be restarted by entering the
STARTRTR command from the DOS prompt.
Any virtual disk, virtual printer, transfer
facility, message facility, or shared folders
sessions that were active must now be
restarted before they can be used. Refer to
the appropriate chapter in this manual for
instructions on restarting these facilities.
These programs were not aware that the
router ended, they may send an error message
indicating that contact with the System/36
ended when you attempt to restart them.
This is normal. Simply try the operation
again.
13-53
Restarting Your Personal
Computer
If you have encountered an error from which
recovery is not possible or one of the PC
Support/36 programs is in a loop, you must
restart your personal computer. To restart
the personal computer, press and hold the
Alternate and Control keys, then press the
Delete key. You can also restart your
personal computer by powering it off for 5
seconds and then powering it back on.
If using emulation and the System/36 router is
still running, restarting the personal
computer causes the System/36 router to
abnormally end.
If you are using the 5250 Emulation
communication link, a message will be sent to
the System/36 console. You must notify the
System/36 system operator to respond to this
message before you will be able to continue.
However, if your System/36 is set up with
automatic response capability, the message
may be responded to automatically.
If you are using the IBM Token-Ring
Network communication link, you may have
to wait for several minutes for your
c1onnection to the IBM Token-Ring Network
to timeout before you attempt to restart PC
Support/36. If the System/36 Token-Ring
router has terminated, it must be enabled
again before you attempt to start the
Token-Ring router. Refer to Using System/36
Communications for information on how to do
this.
13.. 54
Once the personal computer is successfully
restarted, you may run PC Support/36
programs again. Refer to the appropriate
chapters in this manual for information about
starting PC Support/36 programs.
.
LINK36.BAT Problems
Problem:
You received the message Bad command or
file name.
Action:
The default drive and directory you specified
must contain the LINK36 support programs.
If the specified drive is a diskette drive, make
sure that the correct diskette is in the drive.
Problem:
You received the message 5212 - 5250
Emulation is not running.
Action:
You must start the 5250 Emulation Program
before running LINK36.
13-55
Problem:
You received the message 5210 - Unable to
start System/36 router.
Action:
You must have the Sign On display or the
command display available before you can
start the router (make sure that you are not
using a dedicated menu). If you are using a
personal computer attached as the system
console to a System/36 5364 System Unit, you
must use the hot key sequence to enter 5250
emulation mode and sign on before you can
start the router.
Problem:
You received the message 5412 - Cannot
continue: VDSK not installed or not available
13-56
Action:
You must restart your personal computer
from the disk or diskette containing the
LINK36 programs. VDSK.SYS and
CONFIG.SYS with the DEVICE = VDSK.SYS
entry must be in the root directory of the
drive from which you are restarting the
personal computer. If the virtual disk support
was correctly installed when you restarted
your personal computer, you should see the
following message:
PC Support/36
Virtual Disk Device Driver
Version 4.00 (c) IBM Corp. 1987
If you are using a personal computer attached
as the system console to a System/36 5364
System Unit, make sure that you have copied
VDSK.SYS and CONFIG.SYS to the working
PC DSKT 01 diskette or, if you already have
a CONFIG.SYS file, copy the entry
DEVICE = VDSK.SYS into your CONFIG.SYS
file, then restart (IPL) your personal
computer.
Problem:
You received the message 5416 - CONFIG.S36
could not be found.
Action:
Make sure that the CONFIG.S36 file is in the
default drive and directory.
13-57
Shared Folder Problems
Problem:
You received a message that your folder is
going to be converted.
Warning: If you continue, your folder will
be converted to the new Release 5 internal
format and you will not be able to use it on a
Release 4 system anymore. Make sure that
you have backed up this folder in its Release
4 format before proceeding.
Action:
Copy this and all other folders in the Release
4 format and then convert all of them to the
new Release 5 format.
Problem:
You have an error loading DisplayWrite 3 or
DisplayWrite 4.
13-58
Action:
•
Go to the Profile Options display and
check the following prompts: Name of
editor, Primary program path, and
Alternate program path. To check the
Name of editor prompt you key in
PCEXEC and the value of the editor
prompt. This should indicate the problem
in executing the program. See if the
primary and alternate program path point
to where DisplayWrite 3 or DisplayWrite 4
can be found.
•
Using the DOS command CHKDSK on
your personal computer check to see if
you have enough memory available.
DisplayWrite 4 requires 340K bytes to load
the program.
Problem:
You received a message that PCO.EXE is not
active.
Action:
•
Are you using a personal computer as
your terminal? A personal computer is
required.
•
Is your emulation the proper version?
13-59
•
Have you keyed STARTRTR or is it in
your AUTOEXEC.BAT file?
•
Is there an S2 on the right side of the
bottom line on the display? If there is,
you are executing in the second session.
Make the necessary changes and try the
operation again.
Problem:
You are unable to load the emulator.
Action:
•
Does the requested menu exist? The
requested menu is specified in the
System/36 user profile as the default menu
or in CONFIG.S36 on HPRC MENU
statement.
•
Have you correctly identified the library
containing the menu, if not #LIBRARY?
Does the System/36 user profile have the
library containing the menu or is there a
HPRC SLIB entry in CONFIG.S36 on the
personal computer?
Make the necessary corrections and try
loading the emulator again.
13-60
Problem:
You cannot find a document.
Action:
•
Are the parameters spelled correctly? If
not, correct the spelling and retry the
operation.
•
Is the document stored in a folder? If you
are using DisplayWrite 3 or DisplayWrite
4 in standalone mode, you may have
stored the document in a folder or a
virtual disk. If the document is stored in
a virtual disk you can convert it to a
folder using the PC Utility facility.
•
Are you in the correct folder? You can
find this out by either blanking the name
parameter on the Work with Documents
display which will give you a list of the
folders on the system or, if you are
running stand alone on the personal
computer, enter FSPC ASSIGN X. After
the command has completed, enter DIR
and this will give you a list of the folders
on the system.
13-61
•
Are you in the proper subdirectory? On
the Work with Documents display press
the CMD14 key to see a list of the
subdirectories at the current level.
Selecting a subdirectory will return you to
the Work with Documents display with a
list of the documents in the subdirectory.
If you are running standalone on the
personal computer you will have to enter
CHDIR followed by the name of the
subdirectory and then enter DIR to see the
list of documents in the subdirectory.
Problem:
You have an error when you try to enter DOS
commands using PCEXEC from the HELP
prompt.
Action:
Make sure you have single quotes around the
DOS command. Retry the operation.
13-62
~
Problem:
The DOS command does not work.
Action:
Are you using a DOS command that is not
supported by shared folders? Refer to
Chapter 6, "Using the PC Support/36 Shared
Folders Facility" for list of DOS commands
not supported by shared folders.
Problem:
You cannot perform an operation on a folder
because it is being used.
Action:
•
If someone else is on a TEXTDOC screen
using the desired shared folder, back out
of TEXTDOC (work with documents/foldeidisplay).
•
If someone else has issued an FSPC
assigning a drive to the folder, enter an
FSPC RELEASE of the drive assigned to
the folder. Try to perform the operation"
again.
13-63
Problem:
There is a disk error on drive n.
Action:
Do the following:
1. At the System/36 console enter HELP
CANCEL.
2. Select: Cancel Running Jobs.
3. Cancel both jobs running at Wx with the
DUMP option.
4. Record the document name, folder name,
and description of what you were doing.
5. Save the folder on diskette in noncompress
mode.
6. Turn off the power to your personal
computer. If you are using the IBM
Token-Ring Network, wait 1.5 minutes and
restart your personal computer. Try to
access the document again.
7. Call your service representative.
13-64
Problem:
A document cannot be accessed.
Action:
Do the following:
1. Set DisplayWrite 3 or DisplayWrite 4 to a
standalone environment.
2. Select the utility option.
3. Select the recovery option.
If this standalone procedure does not correct
the problem, do the following:
•
Enter an FSPC Release command to the
drive assigned to the folder containing the
document.
•
Enter an FSPC Assign command to the
drive, to reassign the folder to the drive.
•
Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the
DisplayWrite 3 or DisplayWrite 4
standalone procedure.
13-65
If the preceding procedure has not corrected
the problem try the following:
13-66
•
Turn off the power to your personal
computer. If you are using the IBM
Token-Ring Network, wait 1.5 minutes and
restart your personal computer. Try to
access the document again.
•
Re-IPL the System/36 and try to access the
document again.
•
Call your service representative.
Glossary
access. A way or means of approach to a
part or to data.
adapter. The part of a device or feature
required to attach it to a processing unit.
address. The number assigned to a device or
to a location in storage.
align. To bring into or be in line with
another or with others. For example, to line
up the numbers on the decimal point.
allocate. To assign a resource, such as a
disk file or a diskette file, to perform a
specific task.
alphabetic keys. The letter keys A through
Z, blank, comma, period, and hyphen.
APAR. Acronym for Authorized Program
Analysis Report. A request for correction of
a defect in a current version of an
IBM-supplied program.
application. A particular data processing
task, such as an inventory control application
or payroll.
G-l
application program. A program used to
perform a particular data processing task
such as payroll.
application program interface. A set of
functions that can be accessed by an
application program.
ASCII. American Standard Code for
Information Interchange. A standard code
using a coded character set consisting of 7-bit
coded characters (8 bits including parity
check), used for information interchange
among data processing systems, data
communications systems, and associated
equipment. The IBM Personal COI!lPuter uses
an extended version of ASCII.
asterisk. The character * used in printing
or writing as a reference mark.
attribute. A characteristic; for example,
attributes of a data file include record length
(fixed-length or variable-length), file name,
and creation date.
authorization. The process of giving a user
either complete or restricted access.
authorize. To allow a user to communicate
with or make use of an object, resource, or
function.
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. A batch file that
contains DOS commands or program names
that are automatically executed immediately
after DOS is started.
G-2
back space. To move back a position along
a row.
back up. To copy information, usually onto
a diskette for safekeeping.
BASIC. Acronym for Beginners All-Purpose
Symbolic Instruction Code. A programming
language developed for interactive systems.
batch file. A file containing one or more
commands that DOS executes one at a time.
All batch files must have the extension of
.BAT.
binary. Pertaining to a numbering system
with a base of 2. Valid digits are 0 (zero) and
1 (one).
buffer. A temporary storage unit that
accepts data at one rate and delivers it at
another rate.
byte. The amount of storage required to
represent one character; a byte is 8 bits.
card. An adapter card that is installed in a
computer to enable it to be connected to
another device or to increase the size of the
computer storage.
G-3
character codes. The ASCII or EBCDIC
values assigned to the symbols or functions
that are used by a computer.
character set. A set or style of alphabetic,
numeric, and special characters that can be
displayed or printed by a computer.
character string. A series of characters.
close a file. To remove a file from the
program which is executing it. Contrast with
open a file.
column. The character position within a
print line or on a display. The positions are
numbered from 1, by 1 starting at the leftmost
character position and extending to the
rightmost position.
command. A statement used to request a
function of the system. A command consists
of the command name, which identifies the
requested function, and parameters.
command display. A display that allows a
user to request a function of the system.
command key. A System/36 keyboard key
that is used with the command control key
(CMD) to request preassigned functions.
configuration. The group of machines,
devices, and programs that make up a data
processing system. See also system
configuration.
configure. To connect the devices, work
stations, programming, and the System/36 to
each other by using addresses.
G-4
Control key. A keyboard key (Ctrl) that
requests an action but does not display or
print a character.
controller. A device used to coordinate and
control the operation of one or more devices.
copyright. The exclusive right to reproduce,
publish, and sell the matter and form of a
material.
current transfer request. The transfer
request you are working with. The transfer
request remains the current transfer request
until you create or recall another transfer
request, or end the Transfer facility.
cursor. A movable symbol (usually a block)
on the display used to indicate where to type
the next character.
cursor location. The location on the
display (row 1 through 25 and column 1
through 80), at which the cursor is located.
data. All information entered into or used
by the computer.
data definition. Describes the contents and
characteristics of a file.
data dictionary. Information that describes
the organization of data on the System/36.
G-5
data stream. The sequence of characters
being transmitted over a line.
default value. A value that is used when no
other value is specified.
delete. To remove. For example, to erase a
file.
device. The generic term for a piece of
equipment or a mechanism; for example; the
personal computer display or the personal
computer attached printer.
device type. The number assigned to a unit
or box in a system, such as 5150 (the IBM
Personal Computer system unit).
DE5250. One of the controlling programs of
the Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program. This
program allows use of one or two display
sessions.
DIF. Acronym for Data Interchange Format.
A format that represents ,data in rows and
columns.
digit. Any of the numbers from 0 through 9.
directory. DOS terminology for a list of the
files that are contained on the diskette. A
directory also contains information about the
file (such as size and date of last revision).
directory drive. A personal computer drive
assigned to one directory on the System/a6.
The directory can be a shared folder or a
subdirectory within a shared folder.
disable. To prevent a unit of a data
processing system from operating with the
rest of the system.
G-6
display station. (1) A device that includes a
keyboard from which the user can send
information to the system and a display on
which the user can see the information sent
to or the information received from the
system. (2) See also work station.
DOS. Disk Operating System. A program
that works with the processing unit and the
disk or diskette drive to control the flow of
data.
double-precision number. A specification
that causes a number to be stored in the long
format (8 bytes).
download. To move data or programs from
the System/36 to the personal computer.
DP5250. One of the controlling programs of
the Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program. This
program allows use of one or two display
sessions or one display session and one
printer session.
dump. To write the contents of storage, or
of a part of storage, to an output device for
debugging purposes.
EBCDIC. (1) An acronym for Extended
Binary-Coded Decimal Interchange Code. A
set of 256 eight-bit characters. (2) A set of
standards for data transmission.
G-7
emulation mode. The mode of operation in
which the personal computer is operated like
a work station in an IBM 5250 Information
Display System.
Emulation Program. This program, which
allows you to imitate an IBM 5250 work
station and use the functions of a host
system.
emulator. A program or device that
performs the functions of another program or
device.
error code. A hexadecimal value that
identifies a condition that interferes with
normal operations.
error message. A displayed indication that
an error was detected.
field. One or more characters of information
(such as a name or an amount).
field definition. Describes each field in a
record.
file. A collection of records of data that you
create, group, and access by name.
file attribute. A characteristic of a file (for
example, the length of records in a file).
file definition. Describes the contents and
characteristics of a file. Also called data
defini tion.
G-8 \
file description file. A personal computer
file that contains information describing
another personal computer data file. This
information includes the name, data type, and
length of each field and the format of the
personal computer file. This information is
used by the PC Support/36 Transfer facility
when transferring data to the System/36.
filename. The name assigned to a file.
filename extension. A three-letter code
that forms the second part of a DOS filename,
and is separated from the filename by a
period (.). Extensions have meanings to the
programs, and are usually used to identify the
type of the file.
Final form text. Text in a document that is
in a fixed format and cannot be edited.
fixed disk. A non-removable disk medium
used for mass storage of data.
fixed-length. A file attribute in which all of
the records are the same length.
format. (1) (noun) The specific arrangement
of information. (2)' (verb) To prepare a
diskette for use by initializing the diskette to
a recording format acceptable by DOS.
function control keys. See function keys.
function keys. (1) Personal computer keys
F1 through FlO, whose functions are assigned
by the operating system or application
program. (2) A keyboard key that requests
an action but does not display a character.
G-9
help text. A display aid that provides the
operator with an explanation of a message
that has been received or that allows an
operator to request information on how to use
a key, menu, or parameter.
hex. See hexadecimal.
hexadecimal. A numbering system with a
base of 16. Valid digits range from 0 (zero)
through 9 (nine) and A (ten) through F
(fifteen).
home position. (1) The first input position
of the first input field on the display. (2) The
position (far left) to which the print head
moves after the printer is turned on, after the
Stop switch is pressed. (3) In a list or help
window, the first item in the list or the first
line of help text.
host system. (1) The System/36. (2) The
primary or controlling system in a data
communications configuration.
hot key sequence. A keying sequence that
allows you to switch your personal computer
between personal computer mode and
System/36 mode.
G-I0
IBM Token-Ring Network. The local area
network designed to run on the IBM Cabling
System.
IDDU. Acronym for interactive data
definition utility.
identifier. A form character identifying the
parameter in the configuration file that is
used to describe the PC Support/36
environment.
inadvertent. By mistake, unintentional.
inhibited. Prevented from doing something.
initial program load (IPL). The process of
loading the system programs and preparing
the system to run jobs.
initialize. To prepare for use. For example,
to format a diskette and to initialize registers,
and/or program variables to the condition
previously determined by a program.
input. Data to be processed.
input area. An area on the display in which
an operator enters data. Input areas usually
have a prompt before the input area, and are
either blank or contain a default value.
G-ll
insert mode. The mode of operation that
allows characters to be placed between the
characters already on the display when a
character key is pressed. Characters are
inserted at the location identified by the
cursor.
integer. A positive or negative whole
number or zero.
intensity. The level of brightness used to
display the characters on the display.
interactive data definition utility. A part
of SSP that allows you to use prompts from
the display to define data.
interface. The machinery and programs that
permit the exchange of information between
computers or devices.
interrupt. A break in the normal sequence
of instruction execution.
interrupt level. A path used to get the
processing unit's immediate attention.
1/0. Input/output.
1/0 address. See device address.
IPL. See initial program load.
G-12
JOin. To link together two to five System/36
files as if the data were all in one file.
K-byte. Kilobyte, which is 1024 bytes of
information.
keyword. A symbol that identifies a
parameter.
load. To move data or programs into
storage.
local work station. A work station that is
attached directly to the host system with
twinaxial cable.
lowercase mode. The keyboard is in
lowercase mode when the Shift keys are npt
pressed and the shift lock and shift toggle
functions are unlocked and untoggled.
G-13
M-byte. Megabyte. 1,048,576 bytes of
information.
machine check. An equipment error or
failure.
memory. See storage.
message. A communication sent from one
person or program to another person or
program.
mode. A method of operation.
monitor. The device that is used to display
information that is viewed by a computer
operator.
monochrome. Made with a single color.
numeric. Refers to any of the numbers 0
through 9.
G-14
open a file. To associate a file with a
program. Contrast with close a file.
operating system. A program that
supervises the execution of user programs by
the computer.
output device. A device used to receive
information from a computer (for example,
display, printer, or diskette).
override. To use in place of another.
packed decimal. A format in which a byte
may contain 2 decimal digits or 1 decimal
digit and a sign.
parameter. A value supplied to a program
that is used as input or controls the actions of
the program.
password. A code you must enter before you
can access specific programs.
patch. To modify a disk or diskette sector
by entering modifications from the keyboard.
G-15
PC. An IBM Personal Computer, IBM
Personal Computer XT, IBM Portable
Personal Computer, or IBM Personal
Computer AT.
Personal Computer Technical
Coordinator. The person who has personal
computer expertise, responsibility for
installation, and maintenance of personal
computers. This person acts as a focal point
for questions on the personal computer.
PC Support/36 Organizer. A part of PC
Support/36 that allows you to access both
personal computer and System/36 programs
from a single menu.
PC Support/36 Pass-through. A part of PC
Support/36 that allows PC Support/36
applications to pass through one system to
another system via an APPC or APPN
connection.
PC Support/36 Work Station Feature. A
Licensed Program Product to support the
IBM Personal Computer as a work station
attached via IBM Token-Ring Network to a
System/36.
PC utility. A utility provided through PC
Support/36 that allows you to manage virtual
disks, shared folders and documents on the
System/36.
personal computer mode. The method of
operation which allows the personal computer
to perform independently of the host system
when attached as an emulated 5250 work
station.
print. To send output to a hard copy device
(for example, a printer).
print file. A file created by the host system
that is printed on your system.
printer. A device that provides printed
output.
procedure. A set of related operation
control language statements that cause a
specific program or set of programs to be
performed.
procedure command. A command that
runs a procedure.
profile. Data file that describes the features
of a user, program, or device. See also 5250
profile.
program. A sequence of instructions for a
computer.
program diskette. A diskette which
contains programs to be executed on the
personal computer. For example, the
Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program Licensed
Program Diskette.
prompt. A displayed request for information
or operator action.
PTF. Acronym for program temporary fix.
A temporary solution to or bypass of a defect
in a current release.
G-17
record. A collection of related data treated
as a unit.
record definition. Describes each record
type in a file.
record type. The classification of records in
a file.
recovery procedure. The action performed
by the operator when an error message
appears on the display.
register. A storage device having a specified
storage capacity and usually intended for a
special purpose.
remote display station. See remote work
station.
remote work station. A work station that
is attached directly or indirectly to the host
system via some communication channel.
resource security. The control of access to,
or use of, system resources (such as data or
functions).
restart. To start again. You can restart
your personal computer by powering it off
and powering it back on again, or by pressing
and holding the Control and Alternate keys,
then pressing the Delete key. Often called
IPL and boot.
G-18
return code. A value placed in the return
code register at the completion of a program.
right adjust. To position a character(s)
within a field to the rightmost position of the
field.
root directory. The directory on a disk(ette)
that contains the list of files stored on that
disk(ette). If there is more than one directory
on the disk(ette), the root directory can also
contain the names of each of the other
directories. This directory is established
when the disk(ette) is formatted.
router. A set of PC Support/36 programs
that run on the personal computer and the
System/36 and manage communication
between PC Support/36 facilities.
run. To perform a job.
save. To duplicate by transferring from
internal storage to a diskette.
SAP. Service Access Point. A logical point
in a system that provides a service for the
system.
security. The control of access to, or use of,
data or functions.
sequential file. A file in which records
occur in the order in which they were
entered.
G-19
session. (1) The period of time in which the
host system and· one of the devices are
communicating. (2) The logical connection
between the host system and a work station.
The session may be established for a display
station or for a printer.
shared folders. The portion of PC
Support/36 that allows you to work with
document folders on the System/36.
sign on (verb). To begin a session at a
display station.
sign-on (noun). The action an operator uses
at a display station in order to begin working
at the display station.
sign-on display. The display that prompts
the user to enter the appropriate sign-on
command.
single-precision. A specification that
causes a number to be stored in the short
format (4 bytes).
source member. A member that contains
information in the form in which it was
entered.
special character. A character other than
an alphabetic or numeric character (for
example, *, %, or @).
SSP. Acronym for System Support Program
Product. A group of programs that manage
the running of other programs and the
operation of associated devices on the
System/36.
status indicator. The 25th (or bottom) row
on the display of the personal computer,
which is used to display the' condition of the
session.
G-20
storage. The devices used to store data
within a computer.
syntax. The rules for the construction of a
statement.
system. A computer, its devices, and
programs.
system console. An I/O device from which
you can keep track of and control system
operation.
system drive. A personal computer drive
assigned to a System/36. All directories
(shared folders and subdirectories) can be
accessed from this drive.
system operator. A person who uses a
display station, which is designated as the
system device to activate certain system
functions and control and monitor system
operation.
system reset. The pressing and holding of
the Alt and Ctrl keys, then the pressing of the
Del key. This causes the boot record to be
read into storage and given control.
system unit. The part of the personal
computer that contains the processing unit.
table. A list of data in which each item can
be uniquely identified.
template. A pattern to help the user
identify the location of keys on a keyboard.
G-21
terminate. Brought to an end.
termination. The end or the act of ending.
TOKREUI. IBM Token-Ring Network User
Interface program. The program required to
run the IBM Token-Ring Network.
transfer facility. A portion of PC
Support/36 that allows you to transfer data to
the personal computer from the System/36, or
to the System/36 from the personal computer.
transfer request. A description of the file
you want to transfer to or from the System/36.
translation table utility. The portion of PC
Support/36 that allows you to create or
change the translation tables used by PC
Support/36.
truncate. To shorten a field to a specified
length.
twinaxial cable. A cable made of two wires
inside a shield.
update. To modify with information.
uppercase. Capital letters.
G-22
uppercase mode. The method of operation
that causes alphabetic characters to be
displayed as capital letters and all other keys
in the typewriter area, when pressed, to be
displayed as the character shown on the
upper portion of these keys.
user identification. A unique string of
characters that identify a user to the system.
This string of characters limits the functions
and information that the user is allowed to
use.
variable-length. A file attribute in which
all of the records are not of the same length.
virtual disk. A portion of a disk attached to
the host system that is used to simulate a
personal computer disk. A virtual disk has a
capacity of up to 32 megabytes.
virtual disk drive. The concept of a
simulated personal computer disk or diskette
drive.
virtual disk facility. The portion of PC
Support/36 that allows you to use storage on
the System/36 as though it was actually
personal computer storage on a personal
computer fixed disk.
virtual printer. A System/36 printer being
used from a personal computer as though it
were a personal computer printer.
G-23
virtual printer facility. The portion of PC
Support/36 that allows you to use one or more
System/36 printers as though they were
personal computer printers.
window. An area that overlays a portion of
the display that is used to show additional
information.
work station. An input/output device
consisting of a display station and/or printer
that allows you to send and receive
information from a host system.
work station address. The address assigned
to a work station which enables the host
system to communicate with it.
zoned decimal. A format in which a byte
may contain a single decimal digit in one byte
or a single decimal digit and a sign in one
byte.
G-24
I Numerics I
5250 profile. A table of attributes containing
session numbers, device types, keyboard
selection, mode selection, virtual diskette
drive names, virtual diskette drive override
flag, I/O address assignments, on-card address
assignments, and an interrupt level.
G-25
G-26
Index
access level, for virtual
disks 5-18
accessing shared
folders 6-12
advanced options
command override
mode 7-31
defer status 7-27
ending 7-46
printer data type 7-35
time-out value 7-24
untranslatable
characters 7-29
virtual printer 7-23
alternate configuration
file
PC Support/36 message
facility 11-5
application program
interface
overview 1-12
arrows 2-6
assigning a virtual
disk 5-15
assigning virtual disk
drives 5-6
automatic personal
computer-to-System/36
transfer facility 10-47
automatic personal
computer-to-System/36
transfer facility
commands 10-47
automatic
System/36-to-personal
computer transfer
facility
commands 9-103
running 9-102
automatic transfer
facility programs 8-4
automatic virtual disk
facility
command 5-24
running 5-24
automatic virtual disk
facility program 5-7
automatic virtual printer
program
running 7-47
Back Tab key 2-16
Backspace key 2-17
X-I
CFGVDSK command
setup file 5-25
CFGVPRT
command 7-48
setup file 7-48
CFGVPRT program
running 7-47
change authority 6-21
character set
selecting 7-43
character strings
specifying for
WHERE 9-26
characters per line
for virtual printer 7-16
closing a print file 7-21
command format
PC Support/36 2-29
command line
MSG
PC Support/36
message
facility 11-23
command override mode
specifying 7-31
commands
message facility 3-9
miscellaneous PC
Support/36 3-10
summary for PC
Support/36 3-5
transfer facility 3-8
virtual disk facility 3-5
virtual printer
facili ty 3-7
X-2
communications
problems 13-40
recovering 13-46
condition
specifying for
WHERE 9-25
CONFIG.SYS file
DEVICE entry 5-4
processing 5-6
CONFIG.S36
PC Support/36 message
facility 11-4
CONFIG.S36 set up
for virtual disk 5-4
for virtual printer 7-6
shared folders entry 6-6
considerations
for virtual disk 5-29
for virtual printer 7-52
constants
specifying for
WHERE 9-25
Control and Break
keys 2-24
Control and End
keys 2-24
Control and Left Arrow
keys 2-24
Control and Right Arrow
keys 2-24
Control keys 2-24
creating a personal
computer-to-System/36
transfer request 10-10
creating a
System/36-to-personal
computer transfer
request 9-12
cursor movement
keys 2-16
cursor, description
of 2-14
data
format of
on personal
computer 8-5
on System/36 8-5
transferred
showing format
of 9-51
transferring 8-5
from the personal
computer to the
System/36 10-1
from the System/36 to
the personal
computer 9-1
transferring to System/36
overview 8-6
defer status
specifying 7-27
Delete key 2-23
deleting virtual disks or
diskettes 5-21
DEVICE entries
for shared folders 6-7
DEVICE entry
for virtual disk 5-4
directory considerations
for shared folders 6-15
directory drive
description 6-12
using 6-16
directory size
specifying 5-14
disk
sending output to 9-47
disk I/O problems 13-16
disk stopped 13-9
display
sending output to 9-37
display attributes
specifying 2-31
display operation 2-3
displaying print file
status 7-21
Down Arrow key 2-19
End key 2-22
ending PC
Support/36 12-1
ending the personal
computer-to-System/36
transfer facility 10-46
ending the
System/36-to-personal
computer transfer
facility 9-101
Enter key 2-17
erasing a personal
computer-to-System/36
transfer request 10-46
erasing a
System/36-to-personal
computer transfer
request 9-101
Escape key 2-22
X-3
examples
setting up PC
Support/36 4-3
using the PC Support/36
message facility 4-17
using the PC
utility 4-37
using the shared folders
facility 4-21
using the transfer
facility 4-22
using the virtual disk
facility 4-7
using the virtual printer
facility 4-13
file
System/36
defined by IDDU data
definitions 9-14,
10-13
not defined by IDDU
data
definitions 9-16,
10-15
file closed, printer 13-26
file description
saving 9-86
file name
format of 2-27
personal computer 2-27
file type
personal computer 9-49
files
description of 2-26
naming 2-26
X-4
files (continued)
personal computer 2-26
System/36 2-28
Final form text 7-40
folder
shared 6-2
format of transferred
data
contents of 9-82
displaying 9-82
printing 9-85
FROM PC filename
prompt 10-18
FROM prompt
System/36-to-personal
computer 9-13, 9-65
FROMPC command 10-3
FROMPCB
command 10-47
FSPC command 6-9
Function keys 2-25
F1 key 2-25
FlO key 2-25
F2 key 2-25
F3 key 2-25
F4 key 2-25
F9 key 2-25
getting started
3-1
help
for shared folders 6-11
on FSPC command 6-11
help text 2-9
highlighting
description of 2-15
Home key 2-21
I/O problems, disk 13-16
I/O problems,
printer 13-18
IBM Token-Ring
Net\\!ork
nonresident
storage 1-25
resident storage 1-23
incompatabilities from
Transfer Facility
PRPQ 9-111
indicator
status 2-12
input areas
description of 2-12, 2-13
Insert key 2-23
installation
PC Support/36 1-27
interactive
MSG
PC Support/36
message
facility 11-14
interactive personal
computer-to-System/36
transfer facility
commands 10-3
running 10-3
interactive
System/36-to-personal
computer transfer
facility 9-4
interactive virtual disk
facility
command 5-7
program 5-7
running 5-7
interactive virtual
printer facility program
running 7-9
ISETVDSK 5-10
ISETVPRT
command 7-6, 7-11
I
JOIN BY prompt
System/36-to-personal
computer 9-67
keyboard
operation 2-16
keys
Back Tab 2-16
Backspace 2-17
Control 2-24
Control and Break 2-24
X-5
keys (continued)
Control 2-24
Control and Break 2-24
Control and End 2-24
Control and Left
Arrow 2-24
Control and Right
Arrow 2-24
cursor movement 2-16
Delete 2-23
Down Arrow 2-19
End 2-22
Enter 2-17
Escape 2-22
Function 2-25
F1 2-25
FlO 2-25
F2 2-25
F3 2-25
F4 2-25
F9 2-25
Home 2-21
Insert 2-23
Left Arrow 2-20
list of 2-8
Page Down 2-22
Page Up 2-22
Right Arrow 2-20
Tab 2-16
Up Arrow 2-18
window movement 2-16
keywords
reserved 8-13
X-6
Left Arrow key 2-20
libraries
System/36 2-28
library member
System/36 9-17, 10-16
LIKE condition 9-28
lines per inch
for virtual printer 7-16
lines per page
for virtual printer 7-18
link failure 13-46
LINK36
LINK36.BAT 13-55
list of keys 2-8
Local and remote
attached
nonresident
storage 1-20
resident storage 1-18
Storage
requirements 1-17
member
in shared folder 6-2
menu
OPTIONS 2-5
message facility
command summary 3-9
Configuration 11-3
overview 1-7
PC Support/a6 11-1
messages
displayed 2-10
status 10-32
types of 2-10
error 2-10
informational 2-11
miscellaneous PC
Support/36
command summary 3-10
modifying a personal
computer-to-System/36
transfer request 10-25
modifying a
System/36-to-personal
computer transfer
request 9-73
MSG
PC Support/36 message
facility command 11-14
nonresident storage
IBM Token-Ring
Network 1-25
Local and Remote
Attached 1-20
number of copies
for virtual printer 1-19
numbers
specifying for
WHERE 9-27
OPTIONS menus 2-5
ORDER BY prompt
System/36-to-personal
computer 9-32
output
incorrect 13-20
not readable 13-23
sending to a disk 9-47
sending to the
display 9-37
sending to the
printer 9-38
output device
specifying 9-36
to receive transferred
data 9-35
owner authority 6-21
Page Down key 2-22
page length
for virtual printer 7-17
Page Up key 2-22
PC file description
saving 9-54
PC file description file
description of 10-21
PC file description name
prompt 9-55
PC Support/36
command format 2-29
endi~ 12-1
examples of using 4-1
installation 1-27
X-7
PC Support/36 (continued)
major functions 1-2
message facility 11-1
operating
what you should
know before 2-1
overview 1-2
programming
functions 1-12
programs/starting 3-3
requirements for 1-14
shared folders 6-2
starting 3-1
transfer facility 8-1
tutorial 4-1
virtual disk facility 5-1
virtual printer
facility 7-1
PC Support/36 commands
summary 3-5
PC Support/36 message
facility
alternate configuration
file 11-5
example 4-17
installation 11-3
introduction 11-2
MSG
command line 11-23
interactive 11-14
MSG command 11-14
RCVMSG
command 11-25
Setup CONFIG.S36 11-4
starting message
facility 11-7
STARTMSG
command 11-9
STOPMSG
command 11-27
X-8
PC Support/36 programs
ending 12-2
PC Support/36 router
ending 12-4
PC utility
example 4-37
overview 1-13
personal computer
character set
selecting 7-43
specifying 7-43
data format 8-5
file description
saving 9-86
file type 9-49
personal
computer-to-System/36
transfer request
creating 10-10
erasing 10-46
recalling 10-41
running 10-28
saving 10-34
personal
computer-to-System/36
transfer facility
automatic
commands 10-47
running 10-47
ending 10-46
introduction 10-1
personal
computer-to-System/36
transfer request
modifying 10-25
print file
closing 7-21
print file status
displaying 7-21
~rinter
ej ects wrong
place 13-26
file closed 13-26
functions 13-23
lines truncated 13-28
selecting a character set
for 7-43
sending output to 9-38
timer interval 13-28
translation table 13-23
printer character set
selecting 7-43
printer data type 13-23
specifying 7-35
printer I/O
problems 13-18
printer stopped 13-5
problem determination
communications
problems 13-40
descriptions 13-4
output incorrect 13-20
recovery
procedures 13-3
stopped 13-4
symptoms 13-3
programs
virtual disk facility 5-7
prompts
default values 2-12
description of 2-12
RCVMSG
PC Support/36 message
facility command 11-25
read authority 6-21
recalling a personal
computer-to-System/36
transfer request 10-41
recalling a
System/36-to-personal
computer transfer
request 9-96
records
transferred
to personal
computer 9-87
recovering from
communications
problems 13-46
link failure 13-46
recovery
procedures 13-3
releasing virtual disk
drives 5-20
releasing virtual
printers 7-20
reserved words 8-13
resident storage
IBM Token-Ring
Network 1-23
Local and Remote
Attached 1-18
restarting
personal
computer 13-54
System/36 router 13-52
X-9
RFROMPC
command 10-3
RFROMPCB
command 10-47
Right Arrow key 2-20
RTOPC command 9-4
RTOPCB
command 9-103
run authority 6-21
running a personal
computer-to-System/36
transfer request 10-28
running a
System/36-to-personal
computer transfer
request 9-74
saving a personal
computer-to-System/36
transfer request 10-34
saving a
System/36-to-personal
computer transfer
request 9-89
saving PC file
description 9-54
securing shared
folders 6-20
security level
change 6-21
none 6-21
owner 6-21
read 6-21
run 6-21
update 6-21
X-I0
security requirements
for shared folders 6-20
SELECT prompt
System/36-to-personal
computer 9-19
selecting a character
set 7-43
setting up PC Support/36
example 4-3
setup file
on CFGVDSK
command 5-25
on CFGVPRT
command 7-48
specifying for virtual
disk 5-25
specifying for virtual
printer 7-48
SETVDSK command 5-7
SETVPRT
command 7-10
shared folder
advantages over virtual
disk 6-5
command 6-9
member 6-2
shared folders
accessing 6-12
CONFIG.SYS file
entry 6-6
device entries for 6-7
directory
considerations 6-15
example 4-21
getting ready to use 6-6
overview 6-2
securing 6-20
security
requirements 6-20
sharing folder
members 6-18
shared folders (continued)
using 6-2
using help 6-11
shared folders facility
overview 1-5
sharing folder
members 6-18
starting
PC Support/36
programs 3-3
starting message facility
PC Support/36 message
facility 11-7
starting PC
Support/36 3-1
STARTMSG
PC Support/36 message
facility command 11-9
status
print file 7-21
status indicator 2-12
status messages 10-32
STOPMSG
PC Support/36 message
facility command 11-27
stopped
PC Support/36 13-4
transfer facility 13-12
virtual disk 13-9
virtual printer 13-5
STOPRTR
command 12-4
Storage
requirements 1-16
Local and Remote
attached 1-17
subdirectories
using 6-4
subdirectory
in shared folder 6-4
summary
miscellaneous PC
Support/36
commands 3-10
PC Support/36
commands 3-5
transfer facility
commands 3-8, 3-9
virtual disk facility
commands 3-5
virtual printer facility
commands 3-7
symptoms 13-3
system drive
description 6-12
using 6-17
System/36
data format 8-5
file
defined by IDDU data
definitions 9-14,
10-13
not defined by IDDU
data
definitions 9-16,
10-15
transferring data
to 10-12
files
description 2-28
libraries
description 2-28
library member 9-17,
10-16
System/36 data
codes 9-22
X-II
System/36 files
defined by IDDU
using 8-6
not defined by IDDU
using 8-10
System/36 library
members
using 8-10
System/36 printers 7-5
System/36 resource
security
for shared folders 6-20
System/36 router 13-48
System/36-to-personal
computer transfer
facility
automatic 9-102
commands 9-103
ending 9-101
interactive 9-4
introduction 9-1
System/36-to-personal
computer transfer
request
creating 9-12
erasing 9-101
modifying 9-73
recalling 9-96
running 9-74
saving 9-89
Tab key 2-16
terminating
System/36 router 13-48
X-12
test conditions
connecting 9-29
logical AND or OR 9-29
specifying for
WHERE 9-27
time-out value
specifying 7-24
TO PC filename
prompt 9-47
TO prompt 10-12
TOPC command 9-4
TOPCB command 9-103
transfer facility 13-12,
13-29
command summary 3-8
communications
problems 13-12
example 4-22
introduction 8-2
overview 1-8
personal
computer-to-System/36
automatic 10-47
commands 10-47
ending 10-46
PRPQ
incompatabilities
with 9-111
stopped 13-12
System/36-to-personal \
computer
automatic 9-102
ending 9-101
using 8-1
transfer facility
commands
RTOPC 9-4
TOPC 9-4
tra~sfer
facility
programs
automatic 8-4
description 8-4
transfer request
description of 8-3
personal
computer-to-System/36
creating 10-10
erasing 10-46
modifying 10-25
recalling 10-41
running 10-28
saving 10-34
reserved words 8-13
System/36-to-personal
computer
creating 9-12
erasing 9-101
modifying 9-73
recalling 9-96
running 9-74
saving 9-89
transferred data
format
contents of 9-82
showing format of 9-51
transferring data
from the personal
computer to the
System/36 10-1
from the System/36 to
the personal
computer 9-1
overview 8-5
to the System/36
overview 8-6
transferring data to the
System/36
using PC file description
file 10-19
translation table utility
overview 1-12
unexpected output 13-20
unreadable output 13-23
untranslatable
characters
specifying 7-29
Up Arrow key 2-18
update authority 6-21
using a directory
drive 6-16
using a system
drive 6-17
using help
for FSPC 6-11
using System/36 files
defined by IDDU 8-6
not defined by
IDDU 8-10
using System/36 library
members 8-10
VDSK
setup file 5-25
VDSK-setup-filename 5-25
specifying 5-25
virtual disk
assigning 5-15
considerations 5-29
creating 5-12
X-13
virtual disk drives
assigning 5-6
releasing 5-20
virtual disk facility
automatic program 5-7
command summary 3-5
example 4-7
installing 5-3
interactive program 5-7
introduction 5-2
overview 1-4
programs 5-7
using 5-1
virtual disk size
specifying 5-13
virtual disk stopped 13-9
virtual diskettes
deleting 5-21
virtual disks
deleting 5-21
virtual printer
advanced options
for 7-23
assigning 7-13
command override
mode 7-31
defer status 7-27
printer data type 7-35
setup file 7-48
time-out value 7-24
untranslatable
characters 7-29
virtual printer
configuration
assigning and
changing 7-13
virtual printer facility
command summary 3-7
example 4-13
introduction 7-2
X-14
virtual printer facility
(continued)
overview 1-6
starting 7-7
using 7-1
virtual printer
programs 7-6
virtual printer
stopped 13-5
virtual printers
releasing 7-20
VPRT
, setup file 7-48
VPRT command 7-7
VPRT-setup-filename
specifying 7-48
WHERE prompt
System/36-to-personal
computer 9-24
window movement
keys 2-16
windows
using 2-4
writing transferred
records to the personal
computer 9-87
IBM System/36
PC Support/36 User's Guide
SC21·9088·3
READER'S COMMENT FORM
Please use this form only to identify publication errors or to request
changes in publications. Direct any requests for additional publications,
technical questions about IBM systems, changes in IBM programming support, and
80 on, to your mM representative, authorized IBM Personal Computer dealer or to
your nearest mM branch office. You may use this form to communicate your
comments about this publication, its organization, or subject matter, with the
understanding that mM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in
any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
o
If your comment does not need a reply (for example, pointing out a
typing error), check this box and do not include your name and address
below. If your comment is applicable, we will include it in the next
revision of the manual.
o
If you would like a reply, check this box. Be sure to print your name and
address below.
Page number(s):
Comment(s):
Please contact your IBM representative or your IBM-approved remarketer
to request additional publications.
Name
Company or
Organization
Address
City
Phone No.
Area Code
No postage necessary if mailed in the U.S.A.
State
Zip Code
Fold and tape. Please do not staple.
I
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS / PERMIT NO. 40 / ARMONK, NEW YORK
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
Intetnational Business Machines Corp.
Information Development
Department 245
Rochester, Minnesota, U.S.A, 55901
Fold and tape. Please do not staple.
--.-------- ---------,
-
-- -
~
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES
IBM System/36
PC Support/36 User's Guide
SC21·9088·3
READER'S COMMENT FORM
Please use this form only to identify publication errors or to request
changes in publications. Direct any requests for additional publications,
technical questions about IBM systems, changes in IBM programming support, and
so on, to your mM representative, authorized IBM Personal Computer dealer or to
your nearest mM branch office. You may use this form to communicate your
comments about this publication, its organization, or subject matter, with the
understanding that mM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in
any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
o
If your comment does not need a reply (for example, pointing out a
typing error), check this box and do not include your name and address
below. If your comment is applicable, we will include it in the next
revision of the manual.
o
If you would like a reply, check this box. Be sure to print your name and
address below.
Page number(s):
Comment(s):
Please contact your IBM representative or your IBM-approved remarketer
to request additional publications.
Name
Company or
Organization
Address
City
Phone No.
Area Code
No postage necessary if mailed in the U.S.A.
State
Zip Code
Fold and tape. Please do not staple.
I
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS / PERMIT NO. 40 / ARMONK, NEW YORK
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
Intetnational Business Machines Corp.
Information Development
Department 245
Rochester, Minnesota, U.S.A. 55901
Fold and tape. Please do not staple.
--
-~-------------~
-~-,-
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES
IBM System/a6
PC Support/a6 User's Guide
SC21-90BB-3
READER'S COMMENT FORM
Please use this form only to identify publication errors or to request
changes in publications. Direct any requests for additional publications,
technical questions about IBM systems, changes in IBM programming support, and
so on, to your mM representative, authorized IBM Personal Computer dealer or to
your nearest IBM branch office. You may use this form to communicate your
comments about this pUblication, its organization, or subject matter, with the
understanding that mM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in
any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
o
If your comment does not need a reply (for example, pointing out a
typing error), check this box and do not include your name and address
below. If your comment is applicable, we will include it in the next
revision of the manual.
o
If you would like a reply, check this box. Be sure to print your name and
address below.
Page number(s):
Comment(s):
Please contact your IBM representative or your IBM-approved remarketer
to request additional publications.
Name
Company or
Organization
Address
City
Phone No.
Area Code
~o
postage necessary if mailed in the U.S.A.
State
Zip Code
Fold and tape Please do not staple.
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS / PERMIT NO. 40 / ARMONK, NEW YORK
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
In tetnational Business Machines Corp.
Information Development
Department 245
Rochester, Minnesota, U.S.A. 55901
Fold and tape. Please do not staple.
- - --
-~-----------, ~
~
-~-
IBM System/36
PC Support/36 User's Guide
SC21-9088-3
READER'S COMMENT FORM
Please use this form only to identify publication errors or to request
changes in publications. Direct any requests for additional publications,
technical questions about IBM systems, changes in IBM programming support, and
so on, to your mM representative, authorized mM Personal Computer dealer or to
your nearest IBM branch office. You may use this form to communicate your
comments about this publication, its organization, or subject matter, with the
understanding that IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in
any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
o
If your comment does not need a reply (for example, pointing out a
typing error), check this box and do not include your name and address
below. If your comment is applicable, we will include it in the next
revision of the manual.
o
If you would like a reply, check this box. Be sure to print your name and
address below.
Page number(s):
Comment(s):
I?lease contact your IBM representative or your IBM-approved remarketer
;0 request additional publications.
~ame
~ompany
or
)rganization
~ddress
City
)hone No.
Area Code
Jo postage necessary if mailed in the U.S.A.
State
Zip Code
Fold and tape. Please do not staple.
.------------------------------------------------~---- -----
I
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS / PERMIT NO. 40 / ARMONK, NEW YORK
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
Intetnational Business Machines Corp.
Information Development
Department 245
Rochester, Minnesota, U.S.A. 55901
Fold and tape. Please do not staple.
----- ------------ ------
-- -
-~-,-
'NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES
IBM System/36
PC Support/36 User's Guide
SC21·9088·3
READER'S COMMENT FORM
Please use this form only to identify publication errors or to request
changes in publications. Direct any requests for additional publications,
technical questions about IBM systems, changes in IBM programming support, and
so on, to your ffiM representative, authorized IBM Personal Computer dealer or to
your nearest IBM branch office. You may use this form to communicate your
comments about this publication, its organization, or subject matter, with the
llDderstanding that IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in
any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
:J
If your comment does not need a reply (for example, pointing out a
typing error), check this box and do not include your name and address
below. If your comment is applicable, we will include it in the next
revision of the manual.
J
If you would like a reply, check this box. Be sure to print your name and
address below.
)age number(s):
Comment(s):
'lease contact your IBM representative or your IBM-approved remarketer
[) request additional publications.
rame
!ompanyor
Irganization
.ddress
City
Ilone No.
Area Code
o postage necessary if mailed in the U.S.A.
State
Zip Code
Fold and tape. Please do not staple.
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS / PERMIT NO. 40 / ARMONK, NEW YORK
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
Intetnational Business Machines Corp.
Information Development
Department 245
Rochester, Minnesota, U.S.A. 55901
Fold and tape. Please do not staple.
--..----------------,-
--
~
IBM System/3S
PC Support/36 User's Guide
SC21·9088·3
READER'S COMMENT FORM
Please use this form only to identify publication errors or to request
changes in publications. Direct any requests for additional publications,
technical questions about IBM systems, changes in IBM programming support, and
so on, to your mM representative, authorized IBM Personal Computer dealer or to
your nearest mM branch office. You may use this form to communicate your
comments about this publication, its organization, or subject matter, with the
understanding that mM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in
any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
o
If your comment does not need a reply (for example, pointing out a
typing error), check this box and do not include your name and address
below. If your comment is applicable, we will include it in the next
revision of the manual.
o
If you would like a reply, check this box. Be sure to print your name and
address below.
Page number(s):
Comment(s):
Please contact your IBM representative or your IBM-approved remarketer
to request additional publications.
Name
Company or
Organization
A.ddress
City
Phone No.
Area Code
No postage necessary if mailed in the U.S.A.
State
Zip Code
Fold and tape. Please do not staple.
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS / PERMIT NO. 40 / ARMONK, NEW YORK
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
In tetnational Business Machines Corp.
Information Development
Department 245
Rochester, Minnesota, U.S.A. 55901
Fold and tape. Please do not staple.
--..---. --- ------
--
-~-,-
International
.
• •
\
SC21-9088-03
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising